All the Little Lesions in a Row

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 01/03/2019 - 10:11
Display Headline
All the Little Lesions in a Row

A 10-year-old boy has had a lesion on his left foot for almost a year. It has not responded to either topical antifungal cream (econazole, applied twice daily for weeks) or, subsequently, topical corticosteroid cream (mometazone, also applied twice daily). Frustrated by the lack of resolution, his mother brings him for evaluation.

The condition began with faint linear scaling, the area of which became gradually wider and longer. The child reports no associated symptoms, and the mother denies seeing her son manipulate, rub, or scratch the affected skin.

Aside from mild atopy—in the form of seasonal allergies and asthma—the boy is healthy.

All the Little Lesions in a Row

EXAMINATION
The child is well developed, well nourished, and in no distress. He gladly permits examination of the lesion, which is located on the dorsum of the left foot, running from the lower leg to just proximal to the toes. The linear strip of skin measures 2 cm at its widest point. The lesion is tan and uniformly scaly; it exhibits no overt signs of inflammation or increased warmth or tenderness on palpation.

Examination reveals no other such lesions, or indeed any abnormalities. The adjacent toenails do not appear to be involved.

What is the diagnosis?

 

 

DISCUSSION
This child has a common condition called lichen striatus in modern times, but also known as linear lichenoid dermatitis, or (in older texts) Blaschko linear acquired inflammatory skin eruption. It has nothing to do with fungal infection.

This case illustrates a fairly typical presentation, but—as with most dermatologic conditions—there are many variants. For example, lichen striatus can present as a linear collection of scaly skin running the entire length of the leg (often beginning on the buttocks) and can even affect the toenails at its distal terminus. Although the line is usually solitary, lichen striatus can affect multiple locations simultaneously. Likewise, the lesions can run in an uninterrupted line, or stop and start at various points.

Skin type can affect the appearance of the lesions: on children with darker skin, lichen striatus usually appears lighter and on fair-skinned children, darker. The condition is more common in girls than boys (3:1) and occurs most often in those ages 5 to 15. The arms are another typical location, but it can even affect the face in rare instances. There is some support for atopy as a predisposing factor—but since almost 20% of all children are atopic, this is debatable.

Lichen striatus received its historical name because it follows Blaschko’s lines—named for Alfred Blaschko, a German dermatologist who first described the condition in 1901. These bizarre curving lines are now known to follow recognized patterns of embryonic cell migration that have nothing to do with neural, lymphatic, or vascular patterns as one might otherwise imagine. Several other skin conditions involve so-called blaschkoid features, including inflammatory linear verruciform nevi and some forms of epidermal nevi.

LS is not dangerous in any way, though it does cause considerable consternation among parents of affected children. Luckily, it causes few if any symptoms and is self-limited. A few children will complain of mild itching, for which class 4 or 5 topical steroids can be used. Within a year or two at most, the condition will resolve—albeit with occasional postinflammatory hyperpigmentation in those with darker skin.

TAKE-HOME LEARNING POINTS

  • Lichen striatus is a common condition affecting children ages 5 to 15 who develop a linear, papulosquamous eruption that favors arms and leg (but can rarely involve the face).
  • Not infrequently, the condition can cause dystrophy of the nails at the terminus of the lesions.
  • The lesions follow Blaschko’s lines, which are thought to represent patterns of embryonic cell migration.
  • The condition is seldom symptomatic, is self-limited, and rarely leaves permanent signs of damage.
Publications
Topics
Sections

A 10-year-old boy has had a lesion on his left foot for almost a year. It has not responded to either topical antifungal cream (econazole, applied twice daily for weeks) or, subsequently, topical corticosteroid cream (mometazone, also applied twice daily). Frustrated by the lack of resolution, his mother brings him for evaluation.

The condition began with faint linear scaling, the area of which became gradually wider and longer. The child reports no associated symptoms, and the mother denies seeing her son manipulate, rub, or scratch the affected skin.

Aside from mild atopy—in the form of seasonal allergies and asthma—the boy is healthy.

All the Little Lesions in a Row

EXAMINATION
The child is well developed, well nourished, and in no distress. He gladly permits examination of the lesion, which is located on the dorsum of the left foot, running from the lower leg to just proximal to the toes. The linear strip of skin measures 2 cm at its widest point. The lesion is tan and uniformly scaly; it exhibits no overt signs of inflammation or increased warmth or tenderness on palpation.

Examination reveals no other such lesions, or indeed any abnormalities. The adjacent toenails do not appear to be involved.

What is the diagnosis?

 

 

DISCUSSION
This child has a common condition called lichen striatus in modern times, but also known as linear lichenoid dermatitis, or (in older texts) Blaschko linear acquired inflammatory skin eruption. It has nothing to do with fungal infection.

This case illustrates a fairly typical presentation, but—as with most dermatologic conditions—there are many variants. For example, lichen striatus can present as a linear collection of scaly skin running the entire length of the leg (often beginning on the buttocks) and can even affect the toenails at its distal terminus. Although the line is usually solitary, lichen striatus can affect multiple locations simultaneously. Likewise, the lesions can run in an uninterrupted line, or stop and start at various points.

Skin type can affect the appearance of the lesions: on children with darker skin, lichen striatus usually appears lighter and on fair-skinned children, darker. The condition is more common in girls than boys (3:1) and occurs most often in those ages 5 to 15. The arms are another typical location, but it can even affect the face in rare instances. There is some support for atopy as a predisposing factor—but since almost 20% of all children are atopic, this is debatable.

Lichen striatus received its historical name because it follows Blaschko’s lines—named for Alfred Blaschko, a German dermatologist who first described the condition in 1901. These bizarre curving lines are now known to follow recognized patterns of embryonic cell migration that have nothing to do with neural, lymphatic, or vascular patterns as one might otherwise imagine. Several other skin conditions involve so-called blaschkoid features, including inflammatory linear verruciform nevi and some forms of epidermal nevi.

LS is not dangerous in any way, though it does cause considerable consternation among parents of affected children. Luckily, it causes few if any symptoms and is self-limited. A few children will complain of mild itching, for which class 4 or 5 topical steroids can be used. Within a year or two at most, the condition will resolve—albeit with occasional postinflammatory hyperpigmentation in those with darker skin.

TAKE-HOME LEARNING POINTS

  • Lichen striatus is a common condition affecting children ages 5 to 15 who develop a linear, papulosquamous eruption that favors arms and leg (but can rarely involve the face).
  • Not infrequently, the condition can cause dystrophy of the nails at the terminus of the lesions.
  • The lesions follow Blaschko’s lines, which are thought to represent patterns of embryonic cell migration.
  • The condition is seldom symptomatic, is self-limited, and rarely leaves permanent signs of damage.

A 10-year-old boy has had a lesion on his left foot for almost a year. It has not responded to either topical antifungal cream (econazole, applied twice daily for weeks) or, subsequently, topical corticosteroid cream (mometazone, also applied twice daily). Frustrated by the lack of resolution, his mother brings him for evaluation.

The condition began with faint linear scaling, the area of which became gradually wider and longer. The child reports no associated symptoms, and the mother denies seeing her son manipulate, rub, or scratch the affected skin.

Aside from mild atopy—in the form of seasonal allergies and asthma—the boy is healthy.

All the Little Lesions in a Row

EXAMINATION
The child is well developed, well nourished, and in no distress. He gladly permits examination of the lesion, which is located on the dorsum of the left foot, running from the lower leg to just proximal to the toes. The linear strip of skin measures 2 cm at its widest point. The lesion is tan and uniformly scaly; it exhibits no overt signs of inflammation or increased warmth or tenderness on palpation.

Examination reveals no other such lesions, or indeed any abnormalities. The adjacent toenails do not appear to be involved.

What is the diagnosis?

 

 

DISCUSSION
This child has a common condition called lichen striatus in modern times, but also known as linear lichenoid dermatitis, or (in older texts) Blaschko linear acquired inflammatory skin eruption. It has nothing to do with fungal infection.

This case illustrates a fairly typical presentation, but—as with most dermatologic conditions—there are many variants. For example, lichen striatus can present as a linear collection of scaly skin running the entire length of the leg (often beginning on the buttocks) and can even affect the toenails at its distal terminus. Although the line is usually solitary, lichen striatus can affect multiple locations simultaneously. Likewise, the lesions can run in an uninterrupted line, or stop and start at various points.

Skin type can affect the appearance of the lesions: on children with darker skin, lichen striatus usually appears lighter and on fair-skinned children, darker. The condition is more common in girls than boys (3:1) and occurs most often in those ages 5 to 15. The arms are another typical location, but it can even affect the face in rare instances. There is some support for atopy as a predisposing factor—but since almost 20% of all children are atopic, this is debatable.

Lichen striatus received its historical name because it follows Blaschko’s lines—named for Alfred Blaschko, a German dermatologist who first described the condition in 1901. These bizarre curving lines are now known to follow recognized patterns of embryonic cell migration that have nothing to do with neural, lymphatic, or vascular patterns as one might otherwise imagine. Several other skin conditions involve so-called blaschkoid features, including inflammatory linear verruciform nevi and some forms of epidermal nevi.

LS is not dangerous in any way, though it does cause considerable consternation among parents of affected children. Luckily, it causes few if any symptoms and is self-limited. A few children will complain of mild itching, for which class 4 or 5 topical steroids can be used. Within a year or two at most, the condition will resolve—albeit with occasional postinflammatory hyperpigmentation in those with darker skin.

TAKE-HOME LEARNING POINTS

  • Lichen striatus is a common condition affecting children ages 5 to 15 who develop a linear, papulosquamous eruption that favors arms and leg (but can rarely involve the face).
  • Not infrequently, the condition can cause dystrophy of the nails at the terminus of the lesions.
  • The lesions follow Blaschko’s lines, which are thought to represent patterns of embryonic cell migration.
  • The condition is seldom symptomatic, is self-limited, and rarely leaves permanent signs of damage.
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
All the Little Lesions in a Row
Display Headline
All the Little Lesions in a Row
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Thu, 01/03/2019 - 09:30
Un-Gate On Date
Thu, 01/03/2019 - 09:30
Use ProPublica
CFC Schedule Remove Status
Thu, 01/03/2019 - 09:30

Single-dose propranolol tied to ‘selective erasure’ of anxiety disorders

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 01/18/2019 - 18:13

– A single 40-mg dose of oral propranolol, judiciously timed, constitutes an outside-the-box yet highly promising treatment for anxiety disorders, and perhaps for posttraumatic stress disorder as well, Marieke Soeter, PhD, said at the annual congress of the European College of Neuropsychopharmacology.

Bruce Jancin/MDedge News
Dr. Marieke Soeter

The concept here is that the beta-blocker, when given with a brief therapist-led reactivation of a fear memory, blocks beta-adrenergic receptors in the brain so as to interfere with the specific proteins required for reconsolidation of that memory, thereby disrupting the reconsolidation process and neutralizing subsequent expression of that memory in its toxic form. In effect, timely administration of one dose of propranolol, a drug that readily crosses the blood/brain barrier, achieves pharmacologically induced amnesia regarding the learned fear, explained Dr. Soeter, a clinical psychologist at TNO, the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research, an independent nonprofit translational research organization.

“It looks like permanent fear erasure. You can never say that something is erased, but we have not been able to get it back,” she said. “Propranolol achieves selective erasure: It targets the emotional component, but knowledge is intact. They know what happened, but they aren’t scared anymore. The fear association is affected, but not the innate fear response to a threat stimulus, so it doesn’t alter reactions to potentially dangerous situations, which is important. If there is a bomb, they still know to run away from it.”

This single-session therapy addressing what psychologists call fear memory reconsolidation is totally outside the box relative to contemporary psychotherapy for anxiety disorders, which typically entails gradual fear extinction learning requiring multiple treatment sessions. But contemporary psychotherapy for anxiety disorders leaves much room for improvement, given that up to 60% of patients experience relapse. That’s probably because the original fear memory remains intact and resurfaces at some point despite initial treatment success, according to Dr. Soeter.

Nearly 2 decades ago, other investigators showed in animal studies that fear memories are not necessarily permanent. Rather, they are modifiable, and even erasable, during the vulnerable period that occurs when the memories are reactivated and become labile.

Later, Dr. Soeter – then at the University of Amsterdam – and her colleagues demonstrated the same phenomenon using Pavlovian fear-conditioning techniques involving pictures and electric shocks in healthy human volunteers. They showed that a dose of propranolol given before memory reactivation blocked the fear response, while nadolol, a beta-blocker that does not cross the blood/brain barrier, did not.

However, since the fear memories they could ethically induce in the psychology laboratory are far less intense than those experienced by patients with anxiety disorders, the researchers next conducted a randomized, double-blind clinical trial in 45 individuals with arachnophobia. Fifteen received 40 mg of propranolol after spending 2 minutes in proximity to a large tarantula, 15 got placebo, and another 15 received propranolol without exposure to a tarantula. One week later, all patients who received propranolol with spider exposure were able to approach and actually pet the tarantula. Pharmacologic disruption of reconsolidation and storage of their fear memory had turned avoidance behavior into approach behavior. This benefit was maintained for at least a year after the brief treatment session (Biol Psychiatry. 2015 Dec 15;78[12]:880-6).

“Interestingly, there was no direct effect of propranolol on spider beliefs. Therefore, do we need treatment that targets the cognitive level? These findings challenge one of the fundamental tenets of cognitive-behavioral therapy that emphasizes changes in cognition as central to behavioral modification,” Dr. Soeter said.

Most recently, she and a coinvestigator have been working to pin down the precise conditions under which memory reconsolidation can be targeted to extinguish fear memories. They have shown in a 30-subject study that the process is both time- and sleep-dependent. The propranolol must be given within roughly an hour before to 1 hour after therapeutic reactivation of the fear memory to be effective. And sleep is an absolute necessity: When subjects were rechallenged 12 hours after memory reactivation and administration of propranolol earlier on the same day, with no opportunity for sleep, there was no therapeutic effect: The disturbing fear memory was elicited. However, when subjects were rechallenged 12 hours after taking propranolol the previous day – that is, after a night’s sleep – the fear memory was gone (Nat Commun. 2018 Apr 3;9[1]:1316. doi: 10.1038/s41467-018-03659-1).

“Postretrieval amnesia requires sleep to happen. Sleep may be the final and necessary link to prevent the process of reconsolidation,” Dr. Soeter said. It’s still unclear, however, how much sleep is required. Perhaps a nap will turn out to be sufficient, she said.

Colleagues at the University of Amsterdam are now using single-dose propranolol-based therapy in patients with a wide range of phobias.

“The effects are pretty amazing,” Dr. Soeter said. “Everything is treatable. It’s almost too good to be true, but these are our findings.”

Based upon her favorable anecdotal experience in treating a Dutch military veteran with severe combat-related PTSD of 10 years’ duration which had proved resistant to multiple conventional and unconventional interventions, a pilot study of single-dose propranolol with traumatic memory reactivation is now being planned in patients with war-related PTSD.

“After one pill and a 20-minute session, this veteran with severe chronic PTSD has no more nightmares, insomnia, or alcohol problems, and he now travels the world,” she said.

Her research met with an enthusiastic reception from other speakers at the ECNP session on PTSD. Eric Vermetten, MD, PhD, welcomed the concept that pharmacologic therapy upon reexposure to fearful cues can impede the molecular and cellular cascade required to reestablish fearful memories. This also is the basis for the extremely encouraging, albeit preliminary, clinical data on ketamine, an N-methyl-D-aspartate receptor antagonist, as well as 3,4-Methylenedioxymethamphetamine (MDMA) for therapeutic manipulation of trauma memories.

Bruce Jancin/MDedge News
Dr. Eric Vermetten

“Targeting reconsolidation of existing fear memories is worthy of looking into further,” declared Dr. Vermetten, professor of psychiatry at Leiden (the Netherlands) University and a military mental health researcher for the Dutch Ministry of Defense.

New thinking regarding pharmacotherapy for PTSD is sorely needed, he added. He endorsed a consensus statement by the PTSD Psychopharmacology Working Group that decried what was termed a crisis in pharmacotherapy of PTSD (Biol Psychiatry. 2017 Oct 1;82[7]:e51-e59. doi: 10.1016/j.biopsych.2017.03.007. Epub 2017 Mar 14).

“We only have two [Food and Drug Administration]-approved medications for PTSD – sertraline and paroxetine – and they were approved back in 2001,” Dr. Vermetten noted. “Research has stalled, and there is a void in new drug development.”

Dr. Soeter’s study of the time- and sleep-dependent nature of propranolol-induced amnesia was supported by the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research, where she is employed.

Meeting/Event
Publications
Topics
Sections
Meeting/Event
Meeting/Event

– A single 40-mg dose of oral propranolol, judiciously timed, constitutes an outside-the-box yet highly promising treatment for anxiety disorders, and perhaps for posttraumatic stress disorder as well, Marieke Soeter, PhD, said at the annual congress of the European College of Neuropsychopharmacology.

Bruce Jancin/MDedge News
Dr. Marieke Soeter

The concept here is that the beta-blocker, when given with a brief therapist-led reactivation of a fear memory, blocks beta-adrenergic receptors in the brain so as to interfere with the specific proteins required for reconsolidation of that memory, thereby disrupting the reconsolidation process and neutralizing subsequent expression of that memory in its toxic form. In effect, timely administration of one dose of propranolol, a drug that readily crosses the blood/brain barrier, achieves pharmacologically induced amnesia regarding the learned fear, explained Dr. Soeter, a clinical psychologist at TNO, the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research, an independent nonprofit translational research organization.

“It looks like permanent fear erasure. You can never say that something is erased, but we have not been able to get it back,” she said. “Propranolol achieves selective erasure: It targets the emotional component, but knowledge is intact. They know what happened, but they aren’t scared anymore. The fear association is affected, but not the innate fear response to a threat stimulus, so it doesn’t alter reactions to potentially dangerous situations, which is important. If there is a bomb, they still know to run away from it.”

This single-session therapy addressing what psychologists call fear memory reconsolidation is totally outside the box relative to contemporary psychotherapy for anxiety disorders, which typically entails gradual fear extinction learning requiring multiple treatment sessions. But contemporary psychotherapy for anxiety disorders leaves much room for improvement, given that up to 60% of patients experience relapse. That’s probably because the original fear memory remains intact and resurfaces at some point despite initial treatment success, according to Dr. Soeter.

Nearly 2 decades ago, other investigators showed in animal studies that fear memories are not necessarily permanent. Rather, they are modifiable, and even erasable, during the vulnerable period that occurs when the memories are reactivated and become labile.

Later, Dr. Soeter – then at the University of Amsterdam – and her colleagues demonstrated the same phenomenon using Pavlovian fear-conditioning techniques involving pictures and electric shocks in healthy human volunteers. They showed that a dose of propranolol given before memory reactivation blocked the fear response, while nadolol, a beta-blocker that does not cross the blood/brain barrier, did not.

However, since the fear memories they could ethically induce in the psychology laboratory are far less intense than those experienced by patients with anxiety disorders, the researchers next conducted a randomized, double-blind clinical trial in 45 individuals with arachnophobia. Fifteen received 40 mg of propranolol after spending 2 minutes in proximity to a large tarantula, 15 got placebo, and another 15 received propranolol without exposure to a tarantula. One week later, all patients who received propranolol with spider exposure were able to approach and actually pet the tarantula. Pharmacologic disruption of reconsolidation and storage of their fear memory had turned avoidance behavior into approach behavior. This benefit was maintained for at least a year after the brief treatment session (Biol Psychiatry. 2015 Dec 15;78[12]:880-6).

“Interestingly, there was no direct effect of propranolol on spider beliefs. Therefore, do we need treatment that targets the cognitive level? These findings challenge one of the fundamental tenets of cognitive-behavioral therapy that emphasizes changes in cognition as central to behavioral modification,” Dr. Soeter said.

Most recently, she and a coinvestigator have been working to pin down the precise conditions under which memory reconsolidation can be targeted to extinguish fear memories. They have shown in a 30-subject study that the process is both time- and sleep-dependent. The propranolol must be given within roughly an hour before to 1 hour after therapeutic reactivation of the fear memory to be effective. And sleep is an absolute necessity: When subjects were rechallenged 12 hours after memory reactivation and administration of propranolol earlier on the same day, with no opportunity for sleep, there was no therapeutic effect: The disturbing fear memory was elicited. However, when subjects were rechallenged 12 hours after taking propranolol the previous day – that is, after a night’s sleep – the fear memory was gone (Nat Commun. 2018 Apr 3;9[1]:1316. doi: 10.1038/s41467-018-03659-1).

“Postretrieval amnesia requires sleep to happen. Sleep may be the final and necessary link to prevent the process of reconsolidation,” Dr. Soeter said. It’s still unclear, however, how much sleep is required. Perhaps a nap will turn out to be sufficient, she said.

Colleagues at the University of Amsterdam are now using single-dose propranolol-based therapy in patients with a wide range of phobias.

“The effects are pretty amazing,” Dr. Soeter said. “Everything is treatable. It’s almost too good to be true, but these are our findings.”

Based upon her favorable anecdotal experience in treating a Dutch military veteran with severe combat-related PTSD of 10 years’ duration which had proved resistant to multiple conventional and unconventional interventions, a pilot study of single-dose propranolol with traumatic memory reactivation is now being planned in patients with war-related PTSD.

“After one pill and a 20-minute session, this veteran with severe chronic PTSD has no more nightmares, insomnia, or alcohol problems, and he now travels the world,” she said.

Her research met with an enthusiastic reception from other speakers at the ECNP session on PTSD. Eric Vermetten, MD, PhD, welcomed the concept that pharmacologic therapy upon reexposure to fearful cues can impede the molecular and cellular cascade required to reestablish fearful memories. This also is the basis for the extremely encouraging, albeit preliminary, clinical data on ketamine, an N-methyl-D-aspartate receptor antagonist, as well as 3,4-Methylenedioxymethamphetamine (MDMA) for therapeutic manipulation of trauma memories.

Bruce Jancin/MDedge News
Dr. Eric Vermetten

“Targeting reconsolidation of existing fear memories is worthy of looking into further,” declared Dr. Vermetten, professor of psychiatry at Leiden (the Netherlands) University and a military mental health researcher for the Dutch Ministry of Defense.

New thinking regarding pharmacotherapy for PTSD is sorely needed, he added. He endorsed a consensus statement by the PTSD Psychopharmacology Working Group that decried what was termed a crisis in pharmacotherapy of PTSD (Biol Psychiatry. 2017 Oct 1;82[7]:e51-e59. doi: 10.1016/j.biopsych.2017.03.007. Epub 2017 Mar 14).

“We only have two [Food and Drug Administration]-approved medications for PTSD – sertraline and paroxetine – and they were approved back in 2001,” Dr. Vermetten noted. “Research has stalled, and there is a void in new drug development.”

Dr. Soeter’s study of the time- and sleep-dependent nature of propranolol-induced amnesia was supported by the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research, where she is employed.

– A single 40-mg dose of oral propranolol, judiciously timed, constitutes an outside-the-box yet highly promising treatment for anxiety disorders, and perhaps for posttraumatic stress disorder as well, Marieke Soeter, PhD, said at the annual congress of the European College of Neuropsychopharmacology.

Bruce Jancin/MDedge News
Dr. Marieke Soeter

The concept here is that the beta-blocker, when given with a brief therapist-led reactivation of a fear memory, blocks beta-adrenergic receptors in the brain so as to interfere with the specific proteins required for reconsolidation of that memory, thereby disrupting the reconsolidation process and neutralizing subsequent expression of that memory in its toxic form. In effect, timely administration of one dose of propranolol, a drug that readily crosses the blood/brain barrier, achieves pharmacologically induced amnesia regarding the learned fear, explained Dr. Soeter, a clinical psychologist at TNO, the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research, an independent nonprofit translational research organization.

“It looks like permanent fear erasure. You can never say that something is erased, but we have not been able to get it back,” she said. “Propranolol achieves selective erasure: It targets the emotional component, but knowledge is intact. They know what happened, but they aren’t scared anymore. The fear association is affected, but not the innate fear response to a threat stimulus, so it doesn’t alter reactions to potentially dangerous situations, which is important. If there is a bomb, they still know to run away from it.”

This single-session therapy addressing what psychologists call fear memory reconsolidation is totally outside the box relative to contemporary psychotherapy for anxiety disorders, which typically entails gradual fear extinction learning requiring multiple treatment sessions. But contemporary psychotherapy for anxiety disorders leaves much room for improvement, given that up to 60% of patients experience relapse. That’s probably because the original fear memory remains intact and resurfaces at some point despite initial treatment success, according to Dr. Soeter.

Nearly 2 decades ago, other investigators showed in animal studies that fear memories are not necessarily permanent. Rather, they are modifiable, and even erasable, during the vulnerable period that occurs when the memories are reactivated and become labile.

Later, Dr. Soeter – then at the University of Amsterdam – and her colleagues demonstrated the same phenomenon using Pavlovian fear-conditioning techniques involving pictures and electric shocks in healthy human volunteers. They showed that a dose of propranolol given before memory reactivation blocked the fear response, while nadolol, a beta-blocker that does not cross the blood/brain barrier, did not.

However, since the fear memories they could ethically induce in the psychology laboratory are far less intense than those experienced by patients with anxiety disorders, the researchers next conducted a randomized, double-blind clinical trial in 45 individuals with arachnophobia. Fifteen received 40 mg of propranolol after spending 2 minutes in proximity to a large tarantula, 15 got placebo, and another 15 received propranolol without exposure to a tarantula. One week later, all patients who received propranolol with spider exposure were able to approach and actually pet the tarantula. Pharmacologic disruption of reconsolidation and storage of their fear memory had turned avoidance behavior into approach behavior. This benefit was maintained for at least a year after the brief treatment session (Biol Psychiatry. 2015 Dec 15;78[12]:880-6).

“Interestingly, there was no direct effect of propranolol on spider beliefs. Therefore, do we need treatment that targets the cognitive level? These findings challenge one of the fundamental tenets of cognitive-behavioral therapy that emphasizes changes in cognition as central to behavioral modification,” Dr. Soeter said.

Most recently, she and a coinvestigator have been working to pin down the precise conditions under which memory reconsolidation can be targeted to extinguish fear memories. They have shown in a 30-subject study that the process is both time- and sleep-dependent. The propranolol must be given within roughly an hour before to 1 hour after therapeutic reactivation of the fear memory to be effective. And sleep is an absolute necessity: When subjects were rechallenged 12 hours after memory reactivation and administration of propranolol earlier on the same day, with no opportunity for sleep, there was no therapeutic effect: The disturbing fear memory was elicited. However, when subjects were rechallenged 12 hours after taking propranolol the previous day – that is, after a night’s sleep – the fear memory was gone (Nat Commun. 2018 Apr 3;9[1]:1316. doi: 10.1038/s41467-018-03659-1).

“Postretrieval amnesia requires sleep to happen. Sleep may be the final and necessary link to prevent the process of reconsolidation,” Dr. Soeter said. It’s still unclear, however, how much sleep is required. Perhaps a nap will turn out to be sufficient, she said.

Colleagues at the University of Amsterdam are now using single-dose propranolol-based therapy in patients with a wide range of phobias.

“The effects are pretty amazing,” Dr. Soeter said. “Everything is treatable. It’s almost too good to be true, but these are our findings.”

Based upon her favorable anecdotal experience in treating a Dutch military veteran with severe combat-related PTSD of 10 years’ duration which had proved resistant to multiple conventional and unconventional interventions, a pilot study of single-dose propranolol with traumatic memory reactivation is now being planned in patients with war-related PTSD.

“After one pill and a 20-minute session, this veteran with severe chronic PTSD has no more nightmares, insomnia, or alcohol problems, and he now travels the world,” she said.

Her research met with an enthusiastic reception from other speakers at the ECNP session on PTSD. Eric Vermetten, MD, PhD, welcomed the concept that pharmacologic therapy upon reexposure to fearful cues can impede the molecular and cellular cascade required to reestablish fearful memories. This also is the basis for the extremely encouraging, albeit preliminary, clinical data on ketamine, an N-methyl-D-aspartate receptor antagonist, as well as 3,4-Methylenedioxymethamphetamine (MDMA) for therapeutic manipulation of trauma memories.

Bruce Jancin/MDedge News
Dr. Eric Vermetten

“Targeting reconsolidation of existing fear memories is worthy of looking into further,” declared Dr. Vermetten, professor of psychiatry at Leiden (the Netherlands) University and a military mental health researcher for the Dutch Ministry of Defense.

New thinking regarding pharmacotherapy for PTSD is sorely needed, he added. He endorsed a consensus statement by the PTSD Psychopharmacology Working Group that decried what was termed a crisis in pharmacotherapy of PTSD (Biol Psychiatry. 2017 Oct 1;82[7]:e51-e59. doi: 10.1016/j.biopsych.2017.03.007. Epub 2017 Mar 14).

“We only have two [Food and Drug Administration]-approved medications for PTSD – sertraline and paroxetine – and they were approved back in 2001,” Dr. Vermetten noted. “Research has stalled, and there is a void in new drug development.”

Dr. Soeter’s study of the time- and sleep-dependent nature of propranolol-induced amnesia was supported by the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research, where she is employed.

Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Click for Credit Status
Ready
Sections
Article Source

REPORTING FROM THE ECNP CONGRESS

Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Vitals

Key clinical point: A single 40-mg dose of oral propranolol, judiciously timed, is a highly promising novel treatment for anxiety disorders.

Major finding: The beta-blocker must be given within an hour before to an hour after therapist-facilitated reactivation of the fear memory.

Study details: This study included 30 healthy volunteers who underwent a cued Pavlovian fear-conditioning program.

Disclosures: Dr. Soeter’s study of the time- and sleep-dependent nature of propranolol-induced amnesia was supported by the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research, where she is employed.

Disqus Comments
Default
Use ProPublica

Endometriosis surgery: Women can expect years-long benefits

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 03/01/2019 - 17:32

Laparoscopic endometriosis excision improves quality of life for at least 7 years, even when women have conservative, fertility-sparing surgery, according to a survey study from the University of Pittsburgh.

U.S. Air Force photo by Staff Sgt. Ciara Gosier

The work was likely the first to assess long-term outcomes after laparoscopic endometriosis excision with a disease-specific questionnaire, the Endometriosis Health Profile-30 (EHP-30). The findings should reassure both surgeons and patients. “I really feel these results can help us as endometriosis providers” to counsel women, said lead investigator Nicole M. Donnellan, MD, a gynecologic surgeon at the University of Pittsburgh.

Surgery “offers lasting improvement in all quality of life domains ... measured by the EHP-30”: pain; control/powerlessness; emotional well-being; social support; and self-image, with supplemental questions about work, sexual function, and other matters. Because “definitive surgery was not associated with improved outcomes when compared with fertility-sparing surgery ... fertility preservation should continue to be offered as first-line surgery for treatment of symptomatic disease,” Dr. Donnellan and her team concluded at a meeting sponsored by AAGL.

Surgery is the gold standard for endometriosis, but there just hasn’t been much data on long-term outcomes until now, especially with a potent questionnaire like the EHP-30. The gap left surgeons in the lurch on what to tell women how they’ll do, especially because results from previous, shorter, and less-rigorous studies have been mixed. The Pittsburgh results mean that competent surgeons can breathe easier and be confident in telling women what to expect.

The team administered EHP-30 to 61 women before surgery and at 4 weeks postoperatively; 45 patients (74%) had fertility-sparing excisions, 7 (11%) had hysterectomy with adnexa preservation, and 9 (15%) had hysterectomy with bilateral salpingo-oophorectomy. The women were contacted again in 2017 to fill out the survey anywhere from 3 to 7 years after their operation; 45 women agreed, a response rate of 74%.

There was a definitive, statistically significant reduction in scores across all five domains of the survey, both at 4 weeks and out to 7 years, and the improvements did not vary by endometriosis stage or the type of surgery women had.

The overall score – a combination of the five domains – fell from a preoperative median of 50 points out of a possible 100, with 100 being the worst possible score, to a median of about 20 points 4 weeks after surgery, and a median of about 10 points at long-term follow-up. Pain scores fell about the same amount; the greatest improvements were on questions that focused on sense of control and empowerment.

At long-term follow-up, overall scores improved a median of 43 points in women with American Society for Reproductive Medicine stage 1 endometriosis and 28 points among women with stage 4 disease (P = .705). Although the differences were not statistically significant, women with stage 1 disease generally reported the greatest improvements, except on the control and empowerment scale, where women reported the same improvement across all four stages, about 50 points out of 100.

Long-term score improvements were pretty much identical among women who had fertility-sparing surgery and those who had hysterectomies, with, for instance, both groups reporting about a 33-point improvement in pain scores. The two groups separated out only on emotional well-being scores, a 38-point improvement in the hysterectomy group versus 21 points, but the difference was not statistically significant (P = .525).

The long-term results remained the same when eight women who had subsequent gynecologic surgery were excluded.

In the end, the take home is that “all of these women improved,” Dr. Donnellan said.

The investigators didn’t report any disclosures.

SOURCE: Donnellan NM et al. 2018 AAGL Global Congress, Abstract 82.

Meeting/Event
Publications
Topics
Sections
Meeting/Event
Meeting/Event

Laparoscopic endometriosis excision improves quality of life for at least 7 years, even when women have conservative, fertility-sparing surgery, according to a survey study from the University of Pittsburgh.

U.S. Air Force photo by Staff Sgt. Ciara Gosier

The work was likely the first to assess long-term outcomes after laparoscopic endometriosis excision with a disease-specific questionnaire, the Endometriosis Health Profile-30 (EHP-30). The findings should reassure both surgeons and patients. “I really feel these results can help us as endometriosis providers” to counsel women, said lead investigator Nicole M. Donnellan, MD, a gynecologic surgeon at the University of Pittsburgh.

Surgery “offers lasting improvement in all quality of life domains ... measured by the EHP-30”: pain; control/powerlessness; emotional well-being; social support; and self-image, with supplemental questions about work, sexual function, and other matters. Because “definitive surgery was not associated with improved outcomes when compared with fertility-sparing surgery ... fertility preservation should continue to be offered as first-line surgery for treatment of symptomatic disease,” Dr. Donnellan and her team concluded at a meeting sponsored by AAGL.

Surgery is the gold standard for endometriosis, but there just hasn’t been much data on long-term outcomes until now, especially with a potent questionnaire like the EHP-30. The gap left surgeons in the lurch on what to tell women how they’ll do, especially because results from previous, shorter, and less-rigorous studies have been mixed. The Pittsburgh results mean that competent surgeons can breathe easier and be confident in telling women what to expect.

The team administered EHP-30 to 61 women before surgery and at 4 weeks postoperatively; 45 patients (74%) had fertility-sparing excisions, 7 (11%) had hysterectomy with adnexa preservation, and 9 (15%) had hysterectomy with bilateral salpingo-oophorectomy. The women were contacted again in 2017 to fill out the survey anywhere from 3 to 7 years after their operation; 45 women agreed, a response rate of 74%.

There was a definitive, statistically significant reduction in scores across all five domains of the survey, both at 4 weeks and out to 7 years, and the improvements did not vary by endometriosis stage or the type of surgery women had.

The overall score – a combination of the five domains – fell from a preoperative median of 50 points out of a possible 100, with 100 being the worst possible score, to a median of about 20 points 4 weeks after surgery, and a median of about 10 points at long-term follow-up. Pain scores fell about the same amount; the greatest improvements were on questions that focused on sense of control and empowerment.

At long-term follow-up, overall scores improved a median of 43 points in women with American Society for Reproductive Medicine stage 1 endometriosis and 28 points among women with stage 4 disease (P = .705). Although the differences were not statistically significant, women with stage 1 disease generally reported the greatest improvements, except on the control and empowerment scale, where women reported the same improvement across all four stages, about 50 points out of 100.

Long-term score improvements were pretty much identical among women who had fertility-sparing surgery and those who had hysterectomies, with, for instance, both groups reporting about a 33-point improvement in pain scores. The two groups separated out only on emotional well-being scores, a 38-point improvement in the hysterectomy group versus 21 points, but the difference was not statistically significant (P = .525).

The long-term results remained the same when eight women who had subsequent gynecologic surgery were excluded.

In the end, the take home is that “all of these women improved,” Dr. Donnellan said.

The investigators didn’t report any disclosures.

SOURCE: Donnellan NM et al. 2018 AAGL Global Congress, Abstract 82.

Laparoscopic endometriosis excision improves quality of life for at least 7 years, even when women have conservative, fertility-sparing surgery, according to a survey study from the University of Pittsburgh.

U.S. Air Force photo by Staff Sgt. Ciara Gosier

The work was likely the first to assess long-term outcomes after laparoscopic endometriosis excision with a disease-specific questionnaire, the Endometriosis Health Profile-30 (EHP-30). The findings should reassure both surgeons and patients. “I really feel these results can help us as endometriosis providers” to counsel women, said lead investigator Nicole M. Donnellan, MD, a gynecologic surgeon at the University of Pittsburgh.

Surgery “offers lasting improvement in all quality of life domains ... measured by the EHP-30”: pain; control/powerlessness; emotional well-being; social support; and self-image, with supplemental questions about work, sexual function, and other matters. Because “definitive surgery was not associated with improved outcomes when compared with fertility-sparing surgery ... fertility preservation should continue to be offered as first-line surgery for treatment of symptomatic disease,” Dr. Donnellan and her team concluded at a meeting sponsored by AAGL.

Surgery is the gold standard for endometriosis, but there just hasn’t been much data on long-term outcomes until now, especially with a potent questionnaire like the EHP-30. The gap left surgeons in the lurch on what to tell women how they’ll do, especially because results from previous, shorter, and less-rigorous studies have been mixed. The Pittsburgh results mean that competent surgeons can breathe easier and be confident in telling women what to expect.

The team administered EHP-30 to 61 women before surgery and at 4 weeks postoperatively; 45 patients (74%) had fertility-sparing excisions, 7 (11%) had hysterectomy with adnexa preservation, and 9 (15%) had hysterectomy with bilateral salpingo-oophorectomy. The women were contacted again in 2017 to fill out the survey anywhere from 3 to 7 years after their operation; 45 women agreed, a response rate of 74%.

There was a definitive, statistically significant reduction in scores across all five domains of the survey, both at 4 weeks and out to 7 years, and the improvements did not vary by endometriosis stage or the type of surgery women had.

The overall score – a combination of the five domains – fell from a preoperative median of 50 points out of a possible 100, with 100 being the worst possible score, to a median of about 20 points 4 weeks after surgery, and a median of about 10 points at long-term follow-up. Pain scores fell about the same amount; the greatest improvements were on questions that focused on sense of control and empowerment.

At long-term follow-up, overall scores improved a median of 43 points in women with American Society for Reproductive Medicine stage 1 endometriosis and 28 points among women with stage 4 disease (P = .705). Although the differences were not statistically significant, women with stage 1 disease generally reported the greatest improvements, except on the control and empowerment scale, where women reported the same improvement across all four stages, about 50 points out of 100.

Long-term score improvements were pretty much identical among women who had fertility-sparing surgery and those who had hysterectomies, with, for instance, both groups reporting about a 33-point improvement in pain scores. The two groups separated out only on emotional well-being scores, a 38-point improvement in the hysterectomy group versus 21 points, but the difference was not statistically significant (P = .525).

The long-term results remained the same when eight women who had subsequent gynecologic surgery were excluded.

In the end, the take home is that “all of these women improved,” Dr. Donnellan said.

The investigators didn’t report any disclosures.

SOURCE: Donnellan NM et al. 2018 AAGL Global Congress, Abstract 82.

Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Click for Credit Status
Active
Sections
Article Source

REPORTING FROM THE AAGL GLOBAL CONGRESS

Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
CME ID
191907
Vitals

Key clinical point: Endometriosis excision improves quality of life for at least 7 years, even when women have conservative, fertility-sparing surgery.

Major finding: The overall score on the Endometriosis Health Profile-30 fell from a preoperative median of 50 points out of a possible 100, with 100 being the worst possible score, to a median of about 20 points 4 weeks after surgery, and a median of about 10 points at the 7-year follow-up.

Study details: A review of 61 cases

Disclosures: The investigators didn’t report any disclosures.

Source: Donnellan NM et al. 2018 AAGL Global Congress, Abstract 82.

Disqus Comments
Default
Use ProPublica
Hide sidebar & use full width
render the right sidebar.

Behavioral Therapy for Migraine and Tension-Type Headache

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 12/15/2022 - 14:43
Display Headline
Behavioral Therapy for Migraine and Tension-Type Headache
An Interview with Steven M. Baskin, PhD

Steven M. Baskin, PhD, a clinical psychologist at the New England Institute for Neurology and Headache in Stamford, Connecticut, recently answered the Migraine Resource Center’s questions about the benefits of behavioral therapy in the treatment of migraine and tension-type headache.
 

Alan M. Rapoport, MD: Could you please give a brief description of the 5 best modalities of behavioral therapy for migraine and tension-type headache? 
 

Steven M. Baskin, PhD: The most researched modalities that have a good evidence base for both migraine and tension-type headache (TTHA) are relaxation therapies that often combine abdominal breathing with some form of progressive relaxation, electromyography (EMG) biofeedback therapy where headache patients learn to decrease scalp and neck muscle tension utilizing muscular biofeedback, thermal biofeedback where migraine sufferers learn a way to warm their hands which often creates a low arousal state that may reduce brain hyperexcitability, and cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) techniques to learn stress management. The combination of behavioral medicine techniques plus preventive pharmacological treatment has been showed to be more efficacious than either treatment alone. (Holroyd KA, et al. Effect of preventive (β blocker) treatment, behavioural migraine management, or their combination on outcomes of optimised acute treatment in frequent migraine: randomised controlled trial. BMJ. 2010;1-12)

CBT to treat insomnia has also been shown to reverse many chronic migraine sufferers back to episodic migraine. (Smitherman TA, et al. Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Insomnia to Reduce Chronic Migraine: A Sequential Bayesian Analysis. Headache 2018;58:1052-1059)
 

Dr. Rapoport: How do you identify a patient who may benefit from behavioral therapy over acute medication, and what is the first step that you suggest?
 

Dr. Baskin: Behavioral therapies for migraine management are typically preventive therapies that can and should be combined with medications to control acute attacks. There are behavioral principles that can maximize adherence to abortive agents in order to optimize acute care.
 

Dr. Rapoport: Which tends to work the best for migraine?
 

Dr. Baskin: What works best is to first do a good behavioral assessment of the frequency, duration, intensity, and disability level of their headaches as well as current stress levels, history, and adherence to drug and nondrug therapies, and psychiatric comorbidities. A program should then be developed that includes some combination of pharmacological and behavioral interventions to address these issues. It is important to increase self-efficacy: patients’ belief in the ability to control the headache, belief in the ability to manage emotional reactivity to pain, and belief that they can achieve functionality in the presence of a significant headache disorder.
 

Dr. Rapoport: Who should not have biofeedback therapy?
 

Dr. Baskin: Biofeedback has shown to be effective in treating migraine and TTHA. It has not been shown to be effective in treating trigeminal autonomic cephalgias (TACs) such as cluster headache. Like pharmacological therapies, it is less effective in chronic migraine that is daily and constant. A patient with severe psychiatric disorder should be treated for their psychiatric disorder before beginning biofeedback therapy.
 

Dr. Rapoport: Some doctors see patients twice per week for several months. What is your typical routine for behavioral therapy?
 

Dr. Baskin: We have a variety of programs. For complicated patients, we tend to see them weekly and have a very systematic program of biofeedback and CBT for approximately 12 to 15 sessions. This may include treating psychiatric comorbidities. We see many other patients for 1 or 2 sessions of biofeedback to try to effect physiological learning and for 1 or 2 sessions of CBT to help them manage stressors and learn coping skills that they can use to help manage migraines and life stress.
 

Dr. Rapoport: Does behavioral medicine work best in conjunction with preventive medications, or on its own?

 

 

 

Dr. Baskin: Many patients do well with a behavioral treatment as a preventive therapy and a pharmacologic agent to optimize acute care. I believe that many patients with higher frequency migraine with psychological issues or ongoing stressors do best with a combination of preventive pharmacologic therapy and behavior therapy. Any migraine patient with sleep issues should learn CBT for insomnia. 

 

Dr. Rapoport: Is there evidence that suggests behavioral therapy can help patients at various ages manage their migraines?

 

Dr. Baskin: There is both adult and child data on behavioral therapy for migraine.  An excellent study was done in children and adolescents by Powers et al. It showed that adding 10 sessions of CBT to preventive amitriptyline therapy, compared to adding headache education, significantly reduced the number of headache days, level of disability, and kids with a better than 50% decrease in days of headache compared to amitriptyline, plus headache education control in chronic migraine patients.  (Powers SW et al. Cognitive Behavioral Therapy Plus Amitriptyline for Chronic Migraine in Children and Adolescents: A Randomized Clinical Trial. JAMA 2013;310(24):2622-2630)

 

Dr. Rapoport: A recent MedPage Today article noted that “anxiety may complicate migraine more than depression with greater long-term persistence, greater headache-related disability, and reduced satisfaction with acute therapies.” Could you please elaborate on why this may be the case? 

 

Dr. Baskin: Anxiety disorders are often based on feeling threat. They are always associated with avoidance behaviors. Headache sufferers with significant anxiety tend to overestimate the probability of danger (migraine) and perceive it as more unmanageable and threatening than objective reality. They are often very sensitive to medication side effects and benign somatic sensations. They sometimes take medications pre-emptively, because of their fear of getting a migraine, which may lead to medication misuse or overuse. The lifetime prevalence of anxiety disorders in migraineurs (ranging from 51-58%) is almost twice that of major depression.

 

Please write to us at Neurology Reviews Migraine Resource Center ([email protected]) with your opinions.

 

Alan M. Rapoport, M.D.

Editor-in-Chief

Migraine Resource Center

 

Clinical Professor of Neurology

The David Geffen School of Medicine at UCLA

Los Angeles, California

Publications
Topics
Sections
An Interview with Steven M. Baskin, PhD
An Interview with Steven M. Baskin, PhD

Steven M. Baskin, PhD, a clinical psychologist at the New England Institute for Neurology and Headache in Stamford, Connecticut, recently answered the Migraine Resource Center’s questions about the benefits of behavioral therapy in the treatment of migraine and tension-type headache.
 

Alan M. Rapoport, MD: Could you please give a brief description of the 5 best modalities of behavioral therapy for migraine and tension-type headache? 
 

Steven M. Baskin, PhD: The most researched modalities that have a good evidence base for both migraine and tension-type headache (TTHA) are relaxation therapies that often combine abdominal breathing with some form of progressive relaxation, electromyography (EMG) biofeedback therapy where headache patients learn to decrease scalp and neck muscle tension utilizing muscular biofeedback, thermal biofeedback where migraine sufferers learn a way to warm their hands which often creates a low arousal state that may reduce brain hyperexcitability, and cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) techniques to learn stress management. The combination of behavioral medicine techniques plus preventive pharmacological treatment has been showed to be more efficacious than either treatment alone. (Holroyd KA, et al. Effect of preventive (β blocker) treatment, behavioural migraine management, or their combination on outcomes of optimised acute treatment in frequent migraine: randomised controlled trial. BMJ. 2010;1-12)

CBT to treat insomnia has also been shown to reverse many chronic migraine sufferers back to episodic migraine. (Smitherman TA, et al. Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Insomnia to Reduce Chronic Migraine: A Sequential Bayesian Analysis. Headache 2018;58:1052-1059)
 

Dr. Rapoport: How do you identify a patient who may benefit from behavioral therapy over acute medication, and what is the first step that you suggest?
 

Dr. Baskin: Behavioral therapies for migraine management are typically preventive therapies that can and should be combined with medications to control acute attacks. There are behavioral principles that can maximize adherence to abortive agents in order to optimize acute care.
 

Dr. Rapoport: Which tends to work the best for migraine?
 

Dr. Baskin: What works best is to first do a good behavioral assessment of the frequency, duration, intensity, and disability level of their headaches as well as current stress levels, history, and adherence to drug and nondrug therapies, and psychiatric comorbidities. A program should then be developed that includes some combination of pharmacological and behavioral interventions to address these issues. It is important to increase self-efficacy: patients’ belief in the ability to control the headache, belief in the ability to manage emotional reactivity to pain, and belief that they can achieve functionality in the presence of a significant headache disorder.
 

Dr. Rapoport: Who should not have biofeedback therapy?
 

Dr. Baskin: Biofeedback has shown to be effective in treating migraine and TTHA. It has not been shown to be effective in treating trigeminal autonomic cephalgias (TACs) such as cluster headache. Like pharmacological therapies, it is less effective in chronic migraine that is daily and constant. A patient with severe psychiatric disorder should be treated for their psychiatric disorder before beginning biofeedback therapy.
 

Dr. Rapoport: Some doctors see patients twice per week for several months. What is your typical routine for behavioral therapy?
 

Dr. Baskin: We have a variety of programs. For complicated patients, we tend to see them weekly and have a very systematic program of biofeedback and CBT for approximately 12 to 15 sessions. This may include treating psychiatric comorbidities. We see many other patients for 1 or 2 sessions of biofeedback to try to effect physiological learning and for 1 or 2 sessions of CBT to help them manage stressors and learn coping skills that they can use to help manage migraines and life stress.
 

Dr. Rapoport: Does behavioral medicine work best in conjunction with preventive medications, or on its own?

 

 

 

Dr. Baskin: Many patients do well with a behavioral treatment as a preventive therapy and a pharmacologic agent to optimize acute care. I believe that many patients with higher frequency migraine with psychological issues or ongoing stressors do best with a combination of preventive pharmacologic therapy and behavior therapy. Any migraine patient with sleep issues should learn CBT for insomnia. 

 

Dr. Rapoport: Is there evidence that suggests behavioral therapy can help patients at various ages manage their migraines?

 

Dr. Baskin: There is both adult and child data on behavioral therapy for migraine.  An excellent study was done in children and adolescents by Powers et al. It showed that adding 10 sessions of CBT to preventive amitriptyline therapy, compared to adding headache education, significantly reduced the number of headache days, level of disability, and kids with a better than 50% decrease in days of headache compared to amitriptyline, plus headache education control in chronic migraine patients.  (Powers SW et al. Cognitive Behavioral Therapy Plus Amitriptyline for Chronic Migraine in Children and Adolescents: A Randomized Clinical Trial. JAMA 2013;310(24):2622-2630)

 

Dr. Rapoport: A recent MedPage Today article noted that “anxiety may complicate migraine more than depression with greater long-term persistence, greater headache-related disability, and reduced satisfaction with acute therapies.” Could you please elaborate on why this may be the case? 

 

Dr. Baskin: Anxiety disorders are often based on feeling threat. They are always associated with avoidance behaviors. Headache sufferers with significant anxiety tend to overestimate the probability of danger (migraine) and perceive it as more unmanageable and threatening than objective reality. They are often very sensitive to medication side effects and benign somatic sensations. They sometimes take medications pre-emptively, because of their fear of getting a migraine, which may lead to medication misuse or overuse. The lifetime prevalence of anxiety disorders in migraineurs (ranging from 51-58%) is almost twice that of major depression.

 

Please write to us at Neurology Reviews Migraine Resource Center ([email protected]) with your opinions.

 

Alan M. Rapoport, M.D.

Editor-in-Chief

Migraine Resource Center

 

Clinical Professor of Neurology

The David Geffen School of Medicine at UCLA

Los Angeles, California

Steven M. Baskin, PhD, a clinical psychologist at the New England Institute for Neurology and Headache in Stamford, Connecticut, recently answered the Migraine Resource Center’s questions about the benefits of behavioral therapy in the treatment of migraine and tension-type headache.
 

Alan M. Rapoport, MD: Could you please give a brief description of the 5 best modalities of behavioral therapy for migraine and tension-type headache? 
 

Steven M. Baskin, PhD: The most researched modalities that have a good evidence base for both migraine and tension-type headache (TTHA) are relaxation therapies that often combine abdominal breathing with some form of progressive relaxation, electromyography (EMG) biofeedback therapy where headache patients learn to decrease scalp and neck muscle tension utilizing muscular biofeedback, thermal biofeedback where migraine sufferers learn a way to warm their hands which often creates a low arousal state that may reduce brain hyperexcitability, and cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) techniques to learn stress management. The combination of behavioral medicine techniques plus preventive pharmacological treatment has been showed to be more efficacious than either treatment alone. (Holroyd KA, et al. Effect of preventive (β blocker) treatment, behavioural migraine management, or their combination on outcomes of optimised acute treatment in frequent migraine: randomised controlled trial. BMJ. 2010;1-12)

CBT to treat insomnia has also been shown to reverse many chronic migraine sufferers back to episodic migraine. (Smitherman TA, et al. Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Insomnia to Reduce Chronic Migraine: A Sequential Bayesian Analysis. Headache 2018;58:1052-1059)
 

Dr. Rapoport: How do you identify a patient who may benefit from behavioral therapy over acute medication, and what is the first step that you suggest?
 

Dr. Baskin: Behavioral therapies for migraine management are typically preventive therapies that can and should be combined with medications to control acute attacks. There are behavioral principles that can maximize adherence to abortive agents in order to optimize acute care.
 

Dr. Rapoport: Which tends to work the best for migraine?
 

Dr. Baskin: What works best is to first do a good behavioral assessment of the frequency, duration, intensity, and disability level of their headaches as well as current stress levels, history, and adherence to drug and nondrug therapies, and psychiatric comorbidities. A program should then be developed that includes some combination of pharmacological and behavioral interventions to address these issues. It is important to increase self-efficacy: patients’ belief in the ability to control the headache, belief in the ability to manage emotional reactivity to pain, and belief that they can achieve functionality in the presence of a significant headache disorder.
 

Dr. Rapoport: Who should not have biofeedback therapy?
 

Dr. Baskin: Biofeedback has shown to be effective in treating migraine and TTHA. It has not been shown to be effective in treating trigeminal autonomic cephalgias (TACs) such as cluster headache. Like pharmacological therapies, it is less effective in chronic migraine that is daily and constant. A patient with severe psychiatric disorder should be treated for their psychiatric disorder before beginning biofeedback therapy.
 

Dr. Rapoport: Some doctors see patients twice per week for several months. What is your typical routine for behavioral therapy?
 

Dr. Baskin: We have a variety of programs. For complicated patients, we tend to see them weekly and have a very systematic program of biofeedback and CBT for approximately 12 to 15 sessions. This may include treating psychiatric comorbidities. We see many other patients for 1 or 2 sessions of biofeedback to try to effect physiological learning and for 1 or 2 sessions of CBT to help them manage stressors and learn coping skills that they can use to help manage migraines and life stress.
 

Dr. Rapoport: Does behavioral medicine work best in conjunction with preventive medications, or on its own?

 

 

 

Dr. Baskin: Many patients do well with a behavioral treatment as a preventive therapy and a pharmacologic agent to optimize acute care. I believe that many patients with higher frequency migraine with psychological issues or ongoing stressors do best with a combination of preventive pharmacologic therapy and behavior therapy. Any migraine patient with sleep issues should learn CBT for insomnia. 

 

Dr. Rapoport: Is there evidence that suggests behavioral therapy can help patients at various ages manage their migraines?

 

Dr. Baskin: There is both adult and child data on behavioral therapy for migraine.  An excellent study was done in children and adolescents by Powers et al. It showed that adding 10 sessions of CBT to preventive amitriptyline therapy, compared to adding headache education, significantly reduced the number of headache days, level of disability, and kids with a better than 50% decrease in days of headache compared to amitriptyline, plus headache education control in chronic migraine patients.  (Powers SW et al. Cognitive Behavioral Therapy Plus Amitriptyline for Chronic Migraine in Children and Adolescents: A Randomized Clinical Trial. JAMA 2013;310(24):2622-2630)

 

Dr. Rapoport: A recent MedPage Today article noted that “anxiety may complicate migraine more than depression with greater long-term persistence, greater headache-related disability, and reduced satisfaction with acute therapies.” Could you please elaborate on why this may be the case? 

 

Dr. Baskin: Anxiety disorders are often based on feeling threat. They are always associated with avoidance behaviors. Headache sufferers with significant anxiety tend to overestimate the probability of danger (migraine) and perceive it as more unmanageable and threatening than objective reality. They are often very sensitive to medication side effects and benign somatic sensations. They sometimes take medications pre-emptively, because of their fear of getting a migraine, which may lead to medication misuse or overuse. The lifetime prevalence of anxiety disorders in migraineurs (ranging from 51-58%) is almost twice that of major depression.

 

Please write to us at Neurology Reviews Migraine Resource Center ([email protected]) with your opinions.

 

Alan M. Rapoport, M.D.

Editor-in-Chief

Migraine Resource Center

 

Clinical Professor of Neurology

The David Geffen School of Medicine at UCLA

Los Angeles, California

Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Behavioral Therapy for Migraine and Tension-Type Headache
Display Headline
Behavioral Therapy for Migraine and Tension-Type Headache
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Thu, 01/03/2019 - 09:15
Un-Gate On Date
Thu, 01/03/2019 - 09:15
Use ProPublica
CFC Schedule Remove Status
Thu, 01/03/2019 - 09:15

Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: A primary care guide

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 01/03/2019 - 09:34
Display Headline
Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: A primary care guide

Diagnostic criteria for MGUS, smoldering multiple myeloma, and active multiple myeloma
The monoclonal gammopathies encompass a number of disorders characterized by the production of a monoclonal protein (M protein) by an abnormal clone of plasma cells or other lymphoid cells. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS) is the most common of these disorders. The diagnostic criteria for MGUS are listed in Table 1.

Monoclonal gammopathies
Figure 1.
Its clinical relevance lies in the inherent risk of progression to hematologic malignancies such as multiple myeloma or other lymphoproliferative disorders, or of organ dysfunction due to the toxic effects of the M protein. An M protein may consist of an intact immunoglobubin (Ig) molecule—ie, 2 light chains and 2 heavy chains (most commonly IgG type followed by IgA and IgM)—or a light chain only (kappa or lambda) (Figure 1).

MGUS is present in 3% to 4% of the population over age 50 and is more common in older men, African Americans, and Africans.1–6

The overall risk of progression to myeloma and related disorders is less than or equal to 1% per year depending on the subtype of the M protein (higher risk with IgM than non-IgM and light-chain MGUS).7,8 While the risk of malignant transformation is low, multiple myeloma is almost always preceded by the presence of an asymptomatic and often unrecognized monoclonal protein.

WHEN SHOULD WE LOOK FOR AN M PROTEIN?

An M protein is typically an incidental finding when a patient is being assessed for any of a number of presenting symptoms or conditions. A large retrospective study9 found that screening for MGUS was mostly performed by internal medicine physicians. The indications for testing were anemia, bone-related issues, elevated creatinine, elevated erythrocyte sedimentation rate, and neuropathy.

Indications for testing for monoclonal gammopathy
Routine screening for an M protein in the absence of clinical suspicion is not recommended, given the low risk of malignant progression, lack of effect on patient outcomes, the accompanying emotional burden, and lack of treatment options.5,10 Evaluation for monoclonal gammopathy may be considered as part of the workup of associated clinical symptoms and signs and laboratory and imaging findings (Table 2).2,10,11

A low anion gap is not a major indicator of an M protein unless in a high concentration, in which case other manifestations would be present, such as renal failure, which would guide the diagnosis. Polyclonal hypergammaglobulinemia as a cause of low anion gap is far more common than MGUS.

HOW SHOULD WE SCREEN FOR AN M PROTEIN?

Serum protein electrophoresis from a patient with monoclonal gammopathy
Figure 2. Serum protein electrophoresis from a patient with monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (right) shows an abnormal band of gamma globulin (labeled M) that is not present in a normal study (left).

Serum protein electrophoresis is an initial test used to identify an M protein and has a key role in quantifying it (Figure 2). An M protein appears as a narrow spike on the agarose gel and should be distinguished from the broad band seen in polyclonal gammopathies associated with cirrhosis and chronic infectious and inflammatory conditions, among others.12 A major disadvantage of serum protein electrophoresis is that it cannot detect an M protein in very low concentrations or determine its identity.

Serum immunofixation is more sensitive than serum protein electrophoresis and should always be ordered in conjunction with it, mostly to ensure detecting tiny amounts of M protein and to identify the type of its heavy chain and light-chain components.13

The serum free light-chain assay is also considered an essential part of the screening process to detect light-chain MGUS and light-chain myeloma. As many as 16% of myeloma patients secrete only light chains, which may not be identified on serum immunofixation.3,6,7,10,14,15 In general, a low kappa-lambda ratio (< 0.26) indicates the overproduction of lambda light chains, and a high ratio (> 1.65) indicates the overproduction of kappa light chains.

The serum free light-chain assay helps detect abnormal secretion of monoclonal light chains before they appear in the urine once the kidney tubules become saturated and unable to reabsorb them.

Of note, the free light-chain ratio can be abnormal (< 0.26 or > 1.65) in chronic kidney disease. Thus, it may be challenging to discern whether an abnormal light-chain ratio is related to impaired light-chain clearance by the kidneys or to MGUS. In general, kappa light chains are more elevated than lambda light chains in chronic kidney disease, but the ratio should not be considerably skewed. A kappa-lambda ratio below 0.37 or above 3 is rarely seen in chronic kidney disease and should prompt workup for MGUS.16

Tests in combination. The sensitivity of screening for M proteins ranges from 82% with serum protein electrophoresis alone to 93% with the addition of serum immunofixation and to 98% with the serum free light-chain assay.15 The latter can replace urine protein electrophoresis and immunofixation when screening for M protein, given its higher sensitivity.15,17 An important caveat is that urine dipstick testing does not detect urine light chains.

Initial laboratory tests in MGUS
Once an M protein is found, immunoglobulin quantification, a complete blood cell count, and serum creatinine and calcium measurements are also recommended to look for anemia, renal failure, and hypercalcemia, which can be associated with symptomatic myeloma.3,5,6,18–22

Table 3 lists the initial laboratory tests required in patients with MGUS.

 

 

WHAT IS THE DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS OF MONOCLONAL GAMMOPATHIES?

Monoclonal gammopathy: Differential diagnosis
MGUS should be differentiated from other plasma-cell and lymphoproliferative disorders
that feature an M protein and would otherwise require treatment (Table 4). The differential diagnosis includes smoldering multiple myeloma, symptomatic multiple myeloma, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, light-chain amyloidosis, low-grade B-cell lymphoproliferative disorders, a variety of monoclonal protein-related kidney disorders, and plasmacytomas.10,14

MGUS

Based on the International Myeloma Working Group consensus, a formal diagnosis of MGUS is established when a serum M protein is detected and measured at a concentration less than 3 g/dL on serum protein electrophoresis along with less than 10% clonal plasma cells in the bone marrow.1–6,14,18,19 Nevertheless, bone marrow biopsy can be omitted in certain patients as discussed below. The absence of myeloma-related organ damage—particularly osteolytic bone lesions, anemia, otherwise unexplained renal failure, and hypercalcemia—is fundamental and necessary for a diagnosis of MGUS.

Smoldering multiple myeloma

Compared with patients with MGUS, patients with smoldering multiple myeloma have higher M protein concentrations (≥ 3 g/dL) or 10% or more clonal plasma cells in the marrow or both, and are at higher risk of progression to symptomatic multiple myeloma. Nevertheless, like patients with MGUS, they have no myeloma symptoms or evidence of end-organ damage.

Symptomatic multiple myeloma

By definition, patients with multiple myeloma develop organ damage related to their malignancy and need therapy to halt disease progression. Multiple myeloma causes clinical manifestations through cellular infiltration of the bone and bone marrow (anemia, osteolysis, and hypercalcemia) and light chain-induced toxicity (renal tubular damage and cast nephropathy).

In 2014, the definition of multiple myeloma was updated to include 3 new myeloma-defining events that herald a significantly higher risk of progression from smoldering to symptomatic multiple myeloma, and now constitute an integral part of the diagnosis of symptomatic multiple myeloma. These are:

  • Focal lesions (> 1 lesion larger than 5 mm) visible on magnetic resonance imaging
  • ≥ 60% clonal plasma cells on bone marrow biopsy
  • Ratio of involved to uninvolved serum free light chains ≥ 100 (the involved light chain is the one detected on serum protein electrophoresis and immunofixation).14

Bone pain, symptoms of anemia, and decreased urine output may suggest myeloma, but are not diagnostic. Although the “CRAB” criteria (elevated calcium, renal failure, anemia, and bone lesions) define multiple myeloma, the presence of anemia, hypercalcemia, or renal dysfunction do not by themselves mark transformation from MGUS to multiple myeloma. Thus, other causes need to be considered, since the risk of transformation is so low. Importantly, hyperparathyroidism must be ruled out if hypercalcemia is present in a patient with MGUS.10

Waldenström macroglobulinemia

Waldenström macroglobulinemia, also called lymphoplasmacytic lymphoma, is an indolent non-Hodgkin B-cell lymphoma that can invade the marrow, liver, spleen, and lymph nodes, leading to anemia and organomegaly. It features a monoclonal IgM protein that can be associated with increased blood viscosity, cold agglutinin disease, peripheral neuropathy, and cryoglobulinemia.

Waldenström macroglobulinemia should be suspected in any patient with IgM type M protein and symptoms related to hyperviscosity (headache, blurry vision, lightheadedness, shortness of breath, unexplained epistaxis,  gum bleeding); systemic symptoms (fever, weight loss, and night sweats); and abdominal pain (due to organomegaly).23

Monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance

Monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance (MGRS) is a newly recognized entity defined by kidney dysfunction associated with an M protein without evidence of myeloma or other lymphoid disorders.24 Multiple disorders have been included in this category with different underlying mechanisms of kidney injury. This entity is beyond the scope of this discussion.

Light-chain amyloidosis

Misfolded light-chain deposition leading to organ dysfunction is the hallmark of light-chain amyloidosis, which constitutes a subset of MGRS. An abnormal light-chain ratio, especially if skewed toward lambda should trigger an investigation for light-chain amyloidosis.10

Abnormal light chains may infiltrate any organ or tissue, but of greatest concern is infiltration of the myocardium with ensuing heart failure manifestations. N-terminal pro-B-type natriuretic peptide (NT-proBNP) is a sensitive marker for cardiac amyloidosis in the presence of suggestive features on transthoracic echocardiography (eg, left ventricular hypertrophy) but is not specific as it can be elevated in heart failure regardless of the underlying cause.10

Glomerular injury with nephrotic syndrome may also point toward renal involvement by light-chain amyloidosis and establishes a key distinctive factor from myeloma in which tubular injury is the main mechanism of kidney dysfunction.

Clinical clues for light-chain amyloidosis include heart failure symptoms, neuropathy, and macroglossia. If any of these symptoms and signs is present, we recommend electrocardiography (look for low voltage in limb leads), transthoracic echocardiography, measuring the NT-proBNP level, and urinalysis to look for albuminuria. Notably, carpal tunnel syndrome may be a very early clinical manifestation of amyloidosis, but by itself it is nonspecific. Light-chain amyloidosis is a common cause of macroglossia in adults.10,25

Neuropathy associated with M proteins is a clinical entity related to a multitude of disorders that may necessitate treating the underlying cellular clone responsible for the secretion of the toxic M protein. These disorders include light-chain amyloidosis, POEMS (polyneuropathy, organomegaly, endocrinopathy, M protein, and skin changes or sclerotic bone lesions) syndrome, and IgM-related neuropathies with anti-myelin-associated glycoprotein antibodies.3,10,11,14

Notably, weight loss and fatigue in a patient with MGUS may be the first signs of light-chain amyloidosis or Waldenström macroglobulinemia and should prompt further evaluation.25

 

 

HOW ARE PATIENTS WITH MGUS RISK-STRATIFIED AND FOLLOWED?

Research has helped to refine the diagnostic workup and recognize subsets of patients with MGUS at different risks of progression to myeloma and related disorders. Factors predicting progression are 1,6,7,26,27:

  • The amount of the M protein
  • The type of M protein (IgG vs non-IgG)
  • An abnormal free light-chain ratio.

Risk factors for progression in MGUS
Based on these predictors, MGUS can be classified into 4 risk categories: low, low-intermediate, high-intermediate, and high (Table 5).

Half of patients with MGUS fall into the low-risk category, which is defined by IgG-type serum M protein in a concentration less than 1.5 g/dL and a normal serum free light-chain ratio (kappa-lambda 0.26–1.65).5,27 The absolute risk of progression at 20 years is only 5% for patients with low-risk MGUS, compared with 58% in patients with high-risk MGUS (positive for all 3 risk factors).5

The presence of less than 10% plasma cells in the bone marrow is required to satisfy the definition of MGUS, but bone marrow biopsy can be omitted for patients with low-risk MGUS, given the slim chance of finding a significant percentage of clonal plasma cells in the marrow and the inherently low risk of progression.5,10 Skeletal surveys are often deferred for low-risk MGUS, but we obtain them in all our patients to ensure the absence of plasmacytomas, which need to be treated (typically with radiotherapy). Importantly, patients with unexplained bone pain (mostly in long bones, ribs, and spine, whereas joints are not typically involved) and a normal skeletal survey should undergo advanced imaging (whole-body magnetic resonance imaging or whole-body positron emission tomography and computed tomography) to detect bone lesions otherwise missed on plain radiography.28,29

Most of the recommendations regarding follow-up are based on expert opinion, given the lack of randomized data. Most experts agree that all patients should be reevaluated 6 months after an M protein is detected, with laboratory surveillance tests (complete blood cell count, serum creatinine, serum calcium level, serum protein electrophoresis, and serum free light chains). Low-risk patients with a stable M protein level can be followed every 2 to 3 years.

Suspect malignant progression if the serum M protein level increases by 50% or more (with an absolute increase of ≥ 0.5 g/dL); the serum M protein level is 3 g/dL or higher; the serum free light-chain ratio is more than 100; or the patient has unexplained anemia, elevated creatinine, bone pain, fracture, or hypercalcemia.

Patients at intermediate or high risk should be followed annually after the initial 6-month visit.5,7,10

A recent study highlighted the importance of risk stratification in reducing the costs associated with an overzealous diagnostic workup of patients with low-risk MGUS.30 These savings are in addition to a reduction in patient anticipation and anxiety that universally occur before invasive procedures.

THE ROLE OF THE PRIMARY CARE PROVIDER AND THE HEMATOLOGIST

Once an M protein is identified, a comprehensive history, physical examination, and laboratory tests (serum protein electrophoresis to quantify the protein, serum immunofixation, serum free light chains, complete blood cell count, calcium, and creatinine) should be done, taking into consideration the differential diagnosis of monoclonal gammopathies discussed above. After MGUS is confirmed, the patient should be risk-stratified to determine the need for bone marrow biopsy and to predict the risk of progression to more serious conditions.

Referral to a hematologist is warranted for patients with intermediate- and high-risk MGUS, patients with abnormal serum free light-chain ratios, and those who show evidence of malignant progression. Patients with intermediate- and high-risk MGUS could be referred for bone marrow biopsy before assessment by a hematologist. The primary care provider may continue to follow patients with low-risk MGUS who do not display clinical or laboratory evidence of myeloma or related disorders.

MGUS: When to refer patients to a hematologist
When light-chain amyloidosis, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, or another M protein-related disorder is suspected, referral to subspecialists is advised to better define the correlation between the M protein and the patient’s symptoms and signs (Table 6).

The importance of educating patients to report any new worrisome symptom (eg, fatigue, neuropathy, weight loss, night sweats, bone pain) cannot be overemphasized, as some patients may progress to myeloma or other disorders between follow-up visits.

References
  1. van de Donk NW, Palumbo A, Johnsen HE, et al; European Myeloma Network. The clinical relevance and management of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance and related disorders: recommendations from the European Myeloma Network. Haematologica 2014; 99(6):984–996. doi:10.3324/haematol.2013.100552
  2. International Myeloma Working Group. Criteria for the classification of monoclonal gammopathies, multiple myeloma and related disorders: a report of the International Myeloma Working Group. Br J Haematol 2003; 121(5):749–757. pmid:12780789
  3. Rajan AM, Rajkumar SV. Diagnostic evaluation of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. Eur J Haematol 2013; 91(6):561–562. doi:10.1111/ejh.12198
  4. Kyle RA, Rajkumar SV. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. Br J Haematol 2006; 134(6):573–589. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2141.2006.06235.x
  5. Kyle RA, Durie BG, Rajkumar SV, et al; International Myeloma Working Group. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS) and smoldering (asymptomatic) multiple myeloma: IMWG consensus perspectives risk factors for progression and guidelines for monitoring and management. Leukemia 2010; 24(6):1121–1127. doi:10.1038/leu.2010.60
  6. Bird J, Behrens J, Westin J, et al; Haemato-oncology Task Force of the British Committee for Standards in Haematology, UK Myeloma Forum and Nordic Myeloma Study Group. UK Myeloma Forum (UKMF) and Nordic Myeloma Study Group (NMSG): guidelines for the investigation of newly detected M-proteins and the management of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS). Br J Haematol 2009; 147(1):22–42. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2141.2009.07807.x
  7. Rajkumar SV, Kyle RA, Buadi FK. Advances in the diagnosis, classification, risk stratification, and management of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: implications for recategorizing disease entities in the presence of evolving scientific evidence. Mayo Clin Proc 2010; 85(10):945–948. doi:10.4065/mcp.2010.0520
  8. Kyle RA, Therneau TM, Rajkumar SV, et al. A long-term study of prognosis in monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. N Engl J Med 2002; 346(8):564–569. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa01133202
  9. Doyle LM, Gundrum JD, Farnen JP, Wright LJ, Kranig JAI, Go RS. Determining why and which clinicians order serum protein electrophoresis (SPEP), subsequent diagnoses based on indications, and clinical significance of routine follow-up: a study of patients with monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS). Blood 2009; 114(22):Abstr 4883. www.bloodjournal.org/content/114/22/4883. Accessed December 4, 2018.
  10. Merlini G, Palladini G. Differential diagnosis of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. Hematology Am Soc Hematol Educ Program 2012; 2012:595–603. doi:10.1182/asheducation-2012.1.595
  11. Glavey SV, Leung N. Monoclonal gammopathy: the good, the bad and the ugly. Blood Rev 2016; 30(3):223–231. doi:10.1016/j.blre.2015.12.001
  12. Dispenzieri A, Gertz MA, Therneau TM, Kyle RA. Retrospective cohort study of 148 patients with polyclonal gammopathy. Mayo Clin Proc 2001; 76(5):476–487. doi:10.4065/76.5.476
  13. Merlini G, Stone MJ. Dangerous small B-cell clones. Blood 2006; 108(8):2520–2530. doi:10.1182/blood-2006-03-001164
  14. Rajkumar SV, Dimopoulos MA, Palumbo A, et al. International Myeloma Working Group updated criteria for the diagnosis of multiple myeloma. Lancet Oncol 2014; 15(12):e538–e548. doi:10.1016/S1470-2045(14)70442-5
  15. Kyle RA, Gertz MA, Witzig TE, et al. Review of 1027 patients with newly diagnosed multiple myeloma. Mayo Clin Proc 2003; 78(1):21–33. doi:10.4065/78.1.21
  16. Hutchison CA, Harding S, Hewins P, et al. Quantitative assessment of serum and urinary polyclonal free light chains in patients with chronic kidney disease. Clin J Am Soc Nephrol 2008; 3(6):1684–1690. doi:10.2215/CJN.02290508
  17. Katzmann JA, Dispenzieri A, Kyle RA, et al. Elimination of the need for urine studies in the screening algorithm for monoclonal gammopathies by using serum immunofixation and free light chain assays. Mayo Clin Proc 2006; 81(12):1575–1578. doi:10.4065/81.12.1575
  18. Berenson JR, Anderson KC, Audell RA, et al. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: a consensus statement. Br J Haematol 2010; 150(1):28–38. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2141.2010.08207.x
  19. Mangiacavalli S, Cocito F, Pochintesta L, et al. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: a new proposal of workup. Eur J Haematol 2013; 91(4):356–360. doi:10.1111/ejh.12172
  20. Bianchi G, Kyle RA, Colby CL, et al. Impact of optimal follow-up of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance on early diagnosis and prevention of myeloma-related complications. Blood 2010;116:2019–2025. doi:10.1182/blood-2010-04-277566
  21. Rosiñol L, Cibeira MT, Montoto S, et al. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: predictors of malignant transformation and recognition of an evolving type characterized by a progressive increase in M protein size. Mayo Clin Proc 2007; 82(4):428–434. doi:10.4065/82.4.428
  22. Vanderschueren S, Mylle M, Dierickx D, et al. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: significant beyond hematology. Mayo Clin Proc 2009; 84(9):842–845. doi:10.4065/84.9.842
  23. Kyle RA, Rajkumar SV. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance and smouldering multiple myeloma: emphasis on risk factors for progression. Br J Haematol 2007; 139(5):730–743. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2141.2007.06873.x
  24. Leung N, Bridoux F, Hutchison CA, et al; International Kidney and Monoclonal Gammopathy Research Group. Monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance: when MGUS is no longer undetermined or insignificant. Blood. 2012; 120(22):4292–4295. doi:10.1182/blood-2012-07-445304
  25. Merlini G, Wechalekar AD, Palladini G. Systemic light chain amyloidosis: an update for treating physicians. Blood 2013; 121(26):5124–5130. doi:10.1182/blood-2013-01-453001
  26. Dispenzieri A, Katzmann JA, Kyle RA, et al. Prevalence and risk of progression of light-chain monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: a retrospective population-based cohort study. Lancet 2010; 375(9727):1721–1728. doi:10.1016/S0140-6736(10)60482-5
  27. Rajkumar SV, Kyle RA, Therneau TM, et al. Serum free light chain ratio is an independent risk factor for progression in monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. Blood 2005; 106(3):812–817. doi:10.1182/blood-2005-03-1038
  28. Dimopoulos MA, Hillengass J, Usmani S, et al. Role of magnetic resonance imaging in the management of patients with multiple myeloma: a consensus statement. J Clin Oncol 2015; 33(6):657–664. doi:10.1200/JCO.2014.57.9961
  29. Dimopoulos M, Kyle R, Fermand JP, et al. Consensus recommendations for standard investigative workup: report of the International Myeloma Workshop Consensus Panel 3. Blood 2011; 117(18):4701–4705. doi:10.1182/blood-2010-10-299529
  30. Pompa T, Maddox M, Woodard A, et al. Cost effectiveness in low risk MGUS patients. Blood 2016; 128:2360. http://www.bloodjournal.org/content/128/22/2360. Accessed December 4, 2018.
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Jack Khouri, MD
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Christy Samaras, DO
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Clinical Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Jason Valent, MD
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Clinical Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Alex Mejia Garcia, MD
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Beth Faiman, PhD, CNP
Department of Hematologic Oncology and Blood Disorders, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Saveta Mathur, CNP
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Kim Hamilton, CNP
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Megan Nakashima, MD
Department of Clinical Pathology, Cleveland Clinic; Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Matt Kalaycio, MD
Chairman, Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Bone Marrow Transplant Program; Transplantation Center, and Department of Cancer Biology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Address: Jack Khouri, MD, Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, CA-60, Cleveland Clinic, 10201 Carnegie Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; [email protected]

Dr. Valent has disclosed teaching and speaking for Amgen, Celgene, and Takeda.

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
39-46
Legacy Keywords
monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance, MGUS, multiple myeloma, monoclonal protein, M pro-tein, immunoglobulin, serum protein electrophoresis, light-chain amyloidosis, Waldenstrom macroglobulinemia, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, POEMS syndrome, monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance, MGRS, plasmacytoma, Jack Khouri, Christy Samaras, Jason Valent, Alex Garcia, Beth Faiman, Saveta Mathur, Kim Hamilton, Megan Nakashima, Matt Kalaycio
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Jack Khouri, MD
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Christy Samaras, DO
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Clinical Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Jason Valent, MD
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Clinical Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Alex Mejia Garcia, MD
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Beth Faiman, PhD, CNP
Department of Hematologic Oncology and Blood Disorders, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Saveta Mathur, CNP
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Kim Hamilton, CNP
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Megan Nakashima, MD
Department of Clinical Pathology, Cleveland Clinic; Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Matt Kalaycio, MD
Chairman, Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Bone Marrow Transplant Program; Transplantation Center, and Department of Cancer Biology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Address: Jack Khouri, MD, Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, CA-60, Cleveland Clinic, 10201 Carnegie Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; [email protected]

Dr. Valent has disclosed teaching and speaking for Amgen, Celgene, and Takeda.

Author and Disclosure Information

Jack Khouri, MD
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Christy Samaras, DO
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Clinical Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Jason Valent, MD
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Clinical Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Alex Mejia Garcia, MD
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Beth Faiman, PhD, CNP
Department of Hematologic Oncology and Blood Disorders, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Saveta Mathur, CNP
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Kim Hamilton, CNP
Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Megan Nakashima, MD
Department of Clinical Pathology, Cleveland Clinic; Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Matt Kalaycio, MD
Chairman, Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Bone Marrow Transplant Program; Transplantation Center, and Department of Cancer Biology, Taussig Cancer Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Address: Jack Khouri, MD, Department of Hematology and Medical Oncology, Taussig Cancer Institute, CA-60, Cleveland Clinic, 10201 Carnegie Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; [email protected]

Dr. Valent has disclosed teaching and speaking for Amgen, Celgene, and Takeda.

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Diagnostic criteria for MGUS, smoldering multiple myeloma, and active multiple myeloma
The monoclonal gammopathies encompass a number of disorders characterized by the production of a monoclonal protein (M protein) by an abnormal clone of plasma cells or other lymphoid cells. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS) is the most common of these disorders. The diagnostic criteria for MGUS are listed in Table 1.

Monoclonal gammopathies
Figure 1.
Its clinical relevance lies in the inherent risk of progression to hematologic malignancies such as multiple myeloma or other lymphoproliferative disorders, or of organ dysfunction due to the toxic effects of the M protein. An M protein may consist of an intact immunoglobubin (Ig) molecule—ie, 2 light chains and 2 heavy chains (most commonly IgG type followed by IgA and IgM)—or a light chain only (kappa or lambda) (Figure 1).

MGUS is present in 3% to 4% of the population over age 50 and is more common in older men, African Americans, and Africans.1–6

The overall risk of progression to myeloma and related disorders is less than or equal to 1% per year depending on the subtype of the M protein (higher risk with IgM than non-IgM and light-chain MGUS).7,8 While the risk of malignant transformation is low, multiple myeloma is almost always preceded by the presence of an asymptomatic and often unrecognized monoclonal protein.

WHEN SHOULD WE LOOK FOR AN M PROTEIN?

An M protein is typically an incidental finding when a patient is being assessed for any of a number of presenting symptoms or conditions. A large retrospective study9 found that screening for MGUS was mostly performed by internal medicine physicians. The indications for testing were anemia, bone-related issues, elevated creatinine, elevated erythrocyte sedimentation rate, and neuropathy.

Indications for testing for monoclonal gammopathy
Routine screening for an M protein in the absence of clinical suspicion is not recommended, given the low risk of malignant progression, lack of effect on patient outcomes, the accompanying emotional burden, and lack of treatment options.5,10 Evaluation for monoclonal gammopathy may be considered as part of the workup of associated clinical symptoms and signs and laboratory and imaging findings (Table 2).2,10,11

A low anion gap is not a major indicator of an M protein unless in a high concentration, in which case other manifestations would be present, such as renal failure, which would guide the diagnosis. Polyclonal hypergammaglobulinemia as a cause of low anion gap is far more common than MGUS.

HOW SHOULD WE SCREEN FOR AN M PROTEIN?

Serum protein electrophoresis from a patient with monoclonal gammopathy
Figure 2. Serum protein electrophoresis from a patient with monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (right) shows an abnormal band of gamma globulin (labeled M) that is not present in a normal study (left).

Serum protein electrophoresis is an initial test used to identify an M protein and has a key role in quantifying it (Figure 2). An M protein appears as a narrow spike on the agarose gel and should be distinguished from the broad band seen in polyclonal gammopathies associated with cirrhosis and chronic infectious and inflammatory conditions, among others.12 A major disadvantage of serum protein electrophoresis is that it cannot detect an M protein in very low concentrations or determine its identity.

Serum immunofixation is more sensitive than serum protein electrophoresis and should always be ordered in conjunction with it, mostly to ensure detecting tiny amounts of M protein and to identify the type of its heavy chain and light-chain components.13

The serum free light-chain assay is also considered an essential part of the screening process to detect light-chain MGUS and light-chain myeloma. As many as 16% of myeloma patients secrete only light chains, which may not be identified on serum immunofixation.3,6,7,10,14,15 In general, a low kappa-lambda ratio (< 0.26) indicates the overproduction of lambda light chains, and a high ratio (> 1.65) indicates the overproduction of kappa light chains.

The serum free light-chain assay helps detect abnormal secretion of monoclonal light chains before they appear in the urine once the kidney tubules become saturated and unable to reabsorb them.

Of note, the free light-chain ratio can be abnormal (< 0.26 or > 1.65) in chronic kidney disease. Thus, it may be challenging to discern whether an abnormal light-chain ratio is related to impaired light-chain clearance by the kidneys or to MGUS. In general, kappa light chains are more elevated than lambda light chains in chronic kidney disease, but the ratio should not be considerably skewed. A kappa-lambda ratio below 0.37 or above 3 is rarely seen in chronic kidney disease and should prompt workup for MGUS.16

Tests in combination. The sensitivity of screening for M proteins ranges from 82% with serum protein electrophoresis alone to 93% with the addition of serum immunofixation and to 98% with the serum free light-chain assay.15 The latter can replace urine protein electrophoresis and immunofixation when screening for M protein, given its higher sensitivity.15,17 An important caveat is that urine dipstick testing does not detect urine light chains.

Initial laboratory tests in MGUS
Once an M protein is found, immunoglobulin quantification, a complete blood cell count, and serum creatinine and calcium measurements are also recommended to look for anemia, renal failure, and hypercalcemia, which can be associated with symptomatic myeloma.3,5,6,18–22

Table 3 lists the initial laboratory tests required in patients with MGUS.

 

 

WHAT IS THE DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS OF MONOCLONAL GAMMOPATHIES?

Monoclonal gammopathy: Differential diagnosis
MGUS should be differentiated from other plasma-cell and lymphoproliferative disorders
that feature an M protein and would otherwise require treatment (Table 4). The differential diagnosis includes smoldering multiple myeloma, symptomatic multiple myeloma, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, light-chain amyloidosis, low-grade B-cell lymphoproliferative disorders, a variety of monoclonal protein-related kidney disorders, and plasmacytomas.10,14

MGUS

Based on the International Myeloma Working Group consensus, a formal diagnosis of MGUS is established when a serum M protein is detected and measured at a concentration less than 3 g/dL on serum protein electrophoresis along with less than 10% clonal plasma cells in the bone marrow.1–6,14,18,19 Nevertheless, bone marrow biopsy can be omitted in certain patients as discussed below. The absence of myeloma-related organ damage—particularly osteolytic bone lesions, anemia, otherwise unexplained renal failure, and hypercalcemia—is fundamental and necessary for a diagnosis of MGUS.

Smoldering multiple myeloma

Compared with patients with MGUS, patients with smoldering multiple myeloma have higher M protein concentrations (≥ 3 g/dL) or 10% or more clonal plasma cells in the marrow or both, and are at higher risk of progression to symptomatic multiple myeloma. Nevertheless, like patients with MGUS, they have no myeloma symptoms or evidence of end-organ damage.

Symptomatic multiple myeloma

By definition, patients with multiple myeloma develop organ damage related to their malignancy and need therapy to halt disease progression. Multiple myeloma causes clinical manifestations through cellular infiltration of the bone and bone marrow (anemia, osteolysis, and hypercalcemia) and light chain-induced toxicity (renal tubular damage and cast nephropathy).

In 2014, the definition of multiple myeloma was updated to include 3 new myeloma-defining events that herald a significantly higher risk of progression from smoldering to symptomatic multiple myeloma, and now constitute an integral part of the diagnosis of symptomatic multiple myeloma. These are:

  • Focal lesions (> 1 lesion larger than 5 mm) visible on magnetic resonance imaging
  • ≥ 60% clonal plasma cells on bone marrow biopsy
  • Ratio of involved to uninvolved serum free light chains ≥ 100 (the involved light chain is the one detected on serum protein electrophoresis and immunofixation).14

Bone pain, symptoms of anemia, and decreased urine output may suggest myeloma, but are not diagnostic. Although the “CRAB” criteria (elevated calcium, renal failure, anemia, and bone lesions) define multiple myeloma, the presence of anemia, hypercalcemia, or renal dysfunction do not by themselves mark transformation from MGUS to multiple myeloma. Thus, other causes need to be considered, since the risk of transformation is so low. Importantly, hyperparathyroidism must be ruled out if hypercalcemia is present in a patient with MGUS.10

Waldenström macroglobulinemia

Waldenström macroglobulinemia, also called lymphoplasmacytic lymphoma, is an indolent non-Hodgkin B-cell lymphoma that can invade the marrow, liver, spleen, and lymph nodes, leading to anemia and organomegaly. It features a monoclonal IgM protein that can be associated with increased blood viscosity, cold agglutinin disease, peripheral neuropathy, and cryoglobulinemia.

Waldenström macroglobulinemia should be suspected in any patient with IgM type M protein and symptoms related to hyperviscosity (headache, blurry vision, lightheadedness, shortness of breath, unexplained epistaxis,  gum bleeding); systemic symptoms (fever, weight loss, and night sweats); and abdominal pain (due to organomegaly).23

Monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance

Monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance (MGRS) is a newly recognized entity defined by kidney dysfunction associated with an M protein without evidence of myeloma or other lymphoid disorders.24 Multiple disorders have been included in this category with different underlying mechanisms of kidney injury. This entity is beyond the scope of this discussion.

Light-chain amyloidosis

Misfolded light-chain deposition leading to organ dysfunction is the hallmark of light-chain amyloidosis, which constitutes a subset of MGRS. An abnormal light-chain ratio, especially if skewed toward lambda should trigger an investigation for light-chain amyloidosis.10

Abnormal light chains may infiltrate any organ or tissue, but of greatest concern is infiltration of the myocardium with ensuing heart failure manifestations. N-terminal pro-B-type natriuretic peptide (NT-proBNP) is a sensitive marker for cardiac amyloidosis in the presence of suggestive features on transthoracic echocardiography (eg, left ventricular hypertrophy) but is not specific as it can be elevated in heart failure regardless of the underlying cause.10

Glomerular injury with nephrotic syndrome may also point toward renal involvement by light-chain amyloidosis and establishes a key distinctive factor from myeloma in which tubular injury is the main mechanism of kidney dysfunction.

Clinical clues for light-chain amyloidosis include heart failure symptoms, neuropathy, and macroglossia. If any of these symptoms and signs is present, we recommend electrocardiography (look for low voltage in limb leads), transthoracic echocardiography, measuring the NT-proBNP level, and urinalysis to look for albuminuria. Notably, carpal tunnel syndrome may be a very early clinical manifestation of amyloidosis, but by itself it is nonspecific. Light-chain amyloidosis is a common cause of macroglossia in adults.10,25

Neuropathy associated with M proteins is a clinical entity related to a multitude of disorders that may necessitate treating the underlying cellular clone responsible for the secretion of the toxic M protein. These disorders include light-chain amyloidosis, POEMS (polyneuropathy, organomegaly, endocrinopathy, M protein, and skin changes or sclerotic bone lesions) syndrome, and IgM-related neuropathies with anti-myelin-associated glycoprotein antibodies.3,10,11,14

Notably, weight loss and fatigue in a patient with MGUS may be the first signs of light-chain amyloidosis or Waldenström macroglobulinemia and should prompt further evaluation.25

 

 

HOW ARE PATIENTS WITH MGUS RISK-STRATIFIED AND FOLLOWED?

Research has helped to refine the diagnostic workup and recognize subsets of patients with MGUS at different risks of progression to myeloma and related disorders. Factors predicting progression are 1,6,7,26,27:

  • The amount of the M protein
  • The type of M protein (IgG vs non-IgG)
  • An abnormal free light-chain ratio.

Risk factors for progression in MGUS
Based on these predictors, MGUS can be classified into 4 risk categories: low, low-intermediate, high-intermediate, and high (Table 5).

Half of patients with MGUS fall into the low-risk category, which is defined by IgG-type serum M protein in a concentration less than 1.5 g/dL and a normal serum free light-chain ratio (kappa-lambda 0.26–1.65).5,27 The absolute risk of progression at 20 years is only 5% for patients with low-risk MGUS, compared with 58% in patients with high-risk MGUS (positive for all 3 risk factors).5

The presence of less than 10% plasma cells in the bone marrow is required to satisfy the definition of MGUS, but bone marrow biopsy can be omitted for patients with low-risk MGUS, given the slim chance of finding a significant percentage of clonal plasma cells in the marrow and the inherently low risk of progression.5,10 Skeletal surveys are often deferred for low-risk MGUS, but we obtain them in all our patients to ensure the absence of plasmacytomas, which need to be treated (typically with radiotherapy). Importantly, patients with unexplained bone pain (mostly in long bones, ribs, and spine, whereas joints are not typically involved) and a normal skeletal survey should undergo advanced imaging (whole-body magnetic resonance imaging or whole-body positron emission tomography and computed tomography) to detect bone lesions otherwise missed on plain radiography.28,29

Most of the recommendations regarding follow-up are based on expert opinion, given the lack of randomized data. Most experts agree that all patients should be reevaluated 6 months after an M protein is detected, with laboratory surveillance tests (complete blood cell count, serum creatinine, serum calcium level, serum protein electrophoresis, and serum free light chains). Low-risk patients with a stable M protein level can be followed every 2 to 3 years.

Suspect malignant progression if the serum M protein level increases by 50% or more (with an absolute increase of ≥ 0.5 g/dL); the serum M protein level is 3 g/dL or higher; the serum free light-chain ratio is more than 100; or the patient has unexplained anemia, elevated creatinine, bone pain, fracture, or hypercalcemia.

Patients at intermediate or high risk should be followed annually after the initial 6-month visit.5,7,10

A recent study highlighted the importance of risk stratification in reducing the costs associated with an overzealous diagnostic workup of patients with low-risk MGUS.30 These savings are in addition to a reduction in patient anticipation and anxiety that universally occur before invasive procedures.

THE ROLE OF THE PRIMARY CARE PROVIDER AND THE HEMATOLOGIST

Once an M protein is identified, a comprehensive history, physical examination, and laboratory tests (serum protein electrophoresis to quantify the protein, serum immunofixation, serum free light chains, complete blood cell count, calcium, and creatinine) should be done, taking into consideration the differential diagnosis of monoclonal gammopathies discussed above. After MGUS is confirmed, the patient should be risk-stratified to determine the need for bone marrow biopsy and to predict the risk of progression to more serious conditions.

Referral to a hematologist is warranted for patients with intermediate- and high-risk MGUS, patients with abnormal serum free light-chain ratios, and those who show evidence of malignant progression. Patients with intermediate- and high-risk MGUS could be referred for bone marrow biopsy before assessment by a hematologist. The primary care provider may continue to follow patients with low-risk MGUS who do not display clinical or laboratory evidence of myeloma or related disorders.

MGUS: When to refer patients to a hematologist
When light-chain amyloidosis, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, or another M protein-related disorder is suspected, referral to subspecialists is advised to better define the correlation between the M protein and the patient’s symptoms and signs (Table 6).

The importance of educating patients to report any new worrisome symptom (eg, fatigue, neuropathy, weight loss, night sweats, bone pain) cannot be overemphasized, as some patients may progress to myeloma or other disorders between follow-up visits.

Diagnostic criteria for MGUS, smoldering multiple myeloma, and active multiple myeloma
The monoclonal gammopathies encompass a number of disorders characterized by the production of a monoclonal protein (M protein) by an abnormal clone of plasma cells or other lymphoid cells. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS) is the most common of these disorders. The diagnostic criteria for MGUS are listed in Table 1.

Monoclonal gammopathies
Figure 1.
Its clinical relevance lies in the inherent risk of progression to hematologic malignancies such as multiple myeloma or other lymphoproliferative disorders, or of organ dysfunction due to the toxic effects of the M protein. An M protein may consist of an intact immunoglobubin (Ig) molecule—ie, 2 light chains and 2 heavy chains (most commonly IgG type followed by IgA and IgM)—or a light chain only (kappa or lambda) (Figure 1).

MGUS is present in 3% to 4% of the population over age 50 and is more common in older men, African Americans, and Africans.1–6

The overall risk of progression to myeloma and related disorders is less than or equal to 1% per year depending on the subtype of the M protein (higher risk with IgM than non-IgM and light-chain MGUS).7,8 While the risk of malignant transformation is low, multiple myeloma is almost always preceded by the presence of an asymptomatic and often unrecognized monoclonal protein.

WHEN SHOULD WE LOOK FOR AN M PROTEIN?

An M protein is typically an incidental finding when a patient is being assessed for any of a number of presenting symptoms or conditions. A large retrospective study9 found that screening for MGUS was mostly performed by internal medicine physicians. The indications for testing were anemia, bone-related issues, elevated creatinine, elevated erythrocyte sedimentation rate, and neuropathy.

Indications for testing for monoclonal gammopathy
Routine screening for an M protein in the absence of clinical suspicion is not recommended, given the low risk of malignant progression, lack of effect on patient outcomes, the accompanying emotional burden, and lack of treatment options.5,10 Evaluation for monoclonal gammopathy may be considered as part of the workup of associated clinical symptoms and signs and laboratory and imaging findings (Table 2).2,10,11

A low anion gap is not a major indicator of an M protein unless in a high concentration, in which case other manifestations would be present, such as renal failure, which would guide the diagnosis. Polyclonal hypergammaglobulinemia as a cause of low anion gap is far more common than MGUS.

HOW SHOULD WE SCREEN FOR AN M PROTEIN?

Serum protein electrophoresis from a patient with monoclonal gammopathy
Figure 2. Serum protein electrophoresis from a patient with monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (right) shows an abnormal band of gamma globulin (labeled M) that is not present in a normal study (left).

Serum protein electrophoresis is an initial test used to identify an M protein and has a key role in quantifying it (Figure 2). An M protein appears as a narrow spike on the agarose gel and should be distinguished from the broad band seen in polyclonal gammopathies associated with cirrhosis and chronic infectious and inflammatory conditions, among others.12 A major disadvantage of serum protein electrophoresis is that it cannot detect an M protein in very low concentrations or determine its identity.

Serum immunofixation is more sensitive than serum protein electrophoresis and should always be ordered in conjunction with it, mostly to ensure detecting tiny amounts of M protein and to identify the type of its heavy chain and light-chain components.13

The serum free light-chain assay is also considered an essential part of the screening process to detect light-chain MGUS and light-chain myeloma. As many as 16% of myeloma patients secrete only light chains, which may not be identified on serum immunofixation.3,6,7,10,14,15 In general, a low kappa-lambda ratio (< 0.26) indicates the overproduction of lambda light chains, and a high ratio (> 1.65) indicates the overproduction of kappa light chains.

The serum free light-chain assay helps detect abnormal secretion of monoclonal light chains before they appear in the urine once the kidney tubules become saturated and unable to reabsorb them.

Of note, the free light-chain ratio can be abnormal (< 0.26 or > 1.65) in chronic kidney disease. Thus, it may be challenging to discern whether an abnormal light-chain ratio is related to impaired light-chain clearance by the kidneys or to MGUS. In general, kappa light chains are more elevated than lambda light chains in chronic kidney disease, but the ratio should not be considerably skewed. A kappa-lambda ratio below 0.37 or above 3 is rarely seen in chronic kidney disease and should prompt workup for MGUS.16

Tests in combination. The sensitivity of screening for M proteins ranges from 82% with serum protein electrophoresis alone to 93% with the addition of serum immunofixation and to 98% with the serum free light-chain assay.15 The latter can replace urine protein electrophoresis and immunofixation when screening for M protein, given its higher sensitivity.15,17 An important caveat is that urine dipstick testing does not detect urine light chains.

Initial laboratory tests in MGUS
Once an M protein is found, immunoglobulin quantification, a complete blood cell count, and serum creatinine and calcium measurements are also recommended to look for anemia, renal failure, and hypercalcemia, which can be associated with symptomatic myeloma.3,5,6,18–22

Table 3 lists the initial laboratory tests required in patients with MGUS.

 

 

WHAT IS THE DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS OF MONOCLONAL GAMMOPATHIES?

Monoclonal gammopathy: Differential diagnosis
MGUS should be differentiated from other plasma-cell and lymphoproliferative disorders
that feature an M protein and would otherwise require treatment (Table 4). The differential diagnosis includes smoldering multiple myeloma, symptomatic multiple myeloma, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, light-chain amyloidosis, low-grade B-cell lymphoproliferative disorders, a variety of monoclonal protein-related kidney disorders, and plasmacytomas.10,14

MGUS

Based on the International Myeloma Working Group consensus, a formal diagnosis of MGUS is established when a serum M protein is detected and measured at a concentration less than 3 g/dL on serum protein electrophoresis along with less than 10% clonal plasma cells in the bone marrow.1–6,14,18,19 Nevertheless, bone marrow biopsy can be omitted in certain patients as discussed below. The absence of myeloma-related organ damage—particularly osteolytic bone lesions, anemia, otherwise unexplained renal failure, and hypercalcemia—is fundamental and necessary for a diagnosis of MGUS.

Smoldering multiple myeloma

Compared with patients with MGUS, patients with smoldering multiple myeloma have higher M protein concentrations (≥ 3 g/dL) or 10% or more clonal plasma cells in the marrow or both, and are at higher risk of progression to symptomatic multiple myeloma. Nevertheless, like patients with MGUS, they have no myeloma symptoms or evidence of end-organ damage.

Symptomatic multiple myeloma

By definition, patients with multiple myeloma develop organ damage related to their malignancy and need therapy to halt disease progression. Multiple myeloma causes clinical manifestations through cellular infiltration of the bone and bone marrow (anemia, osteolysis, and hypercalcemia) and light chain-induced toxicity (renal tubular damage and cast nephropathy).

In 2014, the definition of multiple myeloma was updated to include 3 new myeloma-defining events that herald a significantly higher risk of progression from smoldering to symptomatic multiple myeloma, and now constitute an integral part of the diagnosis of symptomatic multiple myeloma. These are:

  • Focal lesions (> 1 lesion larger than 5 mm) visible on magnetic resonance imaging
  • ≥ 60% clonal plasma cells on bone marrow biopsy
  • Ratio of involved to uninvolved serum free light chains ≥ 100 (the involved light chain is the one detected on serum protein electrophoresis and immunofixation).14

Bone pain, symptoms of anemia, and decreased urine output may suggest myeloma, but are not diagnostic. Although the “CRAB” criteria (elevated calcium, renal failure, anemia, and bone lesions) define multiple myeloma, the presence of anemia, hypercalcemia, or renal dysfunction do not by themselves mark transformation from MGUS to multiple myeloma. Thus, other causes need to be considered, since the risk of transformation is so low. Importantly, hyperparathyroidism must be ruled out if hypercalcemia is present in a patient with MGUS.10

Waldenström macroglobulinemia

Waldenström macroglobulinemia, also called lymphoplasmacytic lymphoma, is an indolent non-Hodgkin B-cell lymphoma that can invade the marrow, liver, spleen, and lymph nodes, leading to anemia and organomegaly. It features a monoclonal IgM protein that can be associated with increased blood viscosity, cold agglutinin disease, peripheral neuropathy, and cryoglobulinemia.

Waldenström macroglobulinemia should be suspected in any patient with IgM type M protein and symptoms related to hyperviscosity (headache, blurry vision, lightheadedness, shortness of breath, unexplained epistaxis,  gum bleeding); systemic symptoms (fever, weight loss, and night sweats); and abdominal pain (due to organomegaly).23

Monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance

Monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance (MGRS) is a newly recognized entity defined by kidney dysfunction associated with an M protein without evidence of myeloma or other lymphoid disorders.24 Multiple disorders have been included in this category with different underlying mechanisms of kidney injury. This entity is beyond the scope of this discussion.

Light-chain amyloidosis

Misfolded light-chain deposition leading to organ dysfunction is the hallmark of light-chain amyloidosis, which constitutes a subset of MGRS. An abnormal light-chain ratio, especially if skewed toward lambda should trigger an investigation for light-chain amyloidosis.10

Abnormal light chains may infiltrate any organ or tissue, but of greatest concern is infiltration of the myocardium with ensuing heart failure manifestations. N-terminal pro-B-type natriuretic peptide (NT-proBNP) is a sensitive marker for cardiac amyloidosis in the presence of suggestive features on transthoracic echocardiography (eg, left ventricular hypertrophy) but is not specific as it can be elevated in heart failure regardless of the underlying cause.10

Glomerular injury with nephrotic syndrome may also point toward renal involvement by light-chain amyloidosis and establishes a key distinctive factor from myeloma in which tubular injury is the main mechanism of kidney dysfunction.

Clinical clues for light-chain amyloidosis include heart failure symptoms, neuropathy, and macroglossia. If any of these symptoms and signs is present, we recommend electrocardiography (look for low voltage in limb leads), transthoracic echocardiography, measuring the NT-proBNP level, and urinalysis to look for albuminuria. Notably, carpal tunnel syndrome may be a very early clinical manifestation of amyloidosis, but by itself it is nonspecific. Light-chain amyloidosis is a common cause of macroglossia in adults.10,25

Neuropathy associated with M proteins is a clinical entity related to a multitude of disorders that may necessitate treating the underlying cellular clone responsible for the secretion of the toxic M protein. These disorders include light-chain amyloidosis, POEMS (polyneuropathy, organomegaly, endocrinopathy, M protein, and skin changes or sclerotic bone lesions) syndrome, and IgM-related neuropathies with anti-myelin-associated glycoprotein antibodies.3,10,11,14

Notably, weight loss and fatigue in a patient with MGUS may be the first signs of light-chain amyloidosis or Waldenström macroglobulinemia and should prompt further evaluation.25

 

 

HOW ARE PATIENTS WITH MGUS RISK-STRATIFIED AND FOLLOWED?

Research has helped to refine the diagnostic workup and recognize subsets of patients with MGUS at different risks of progression to myeloma and related disorders. Factors predicting progression are 1,6,7,26,27:

  • The amount of the M protein
  • The type of M protein (IgG vs non-IgG)
  • An abnormal free light-chain ratio.

Risk factors for progression in MGUS
Based on these predictors, MGUS can be classified into 4 risk categories: low, low-intermediate, high-intermediate, and high (Table 5).

Half of patients with MGUS fall into the low-risk category, which is defined by IgG-type serum M protein in a concentration less than 1.5 g/dL and a normal serum free light-chain ratio (kappa-lambda 0.26–1.65).5,27 The absolute risk of progression at 20 years is only 5% for patients with low-risk MGUS, compared with 58% in patients with high-risk MGUS (positive for all 3 risk factors).5

The presence of less than 10% plasma cells in the bone marrow is required to satisfy the definition of MGUS, but bone marrow biopsy can be omitted for patients with low-risk MGUS, given the slim chance of finding a significant percentage of clonal plasma cells in the marrow and the inherently low risk of progression.5,10 Skeletal surveys are often deferred for low-risk MGUS, but we obtain them in all our patients to ensure the absence of plasmacytomas, which need to be treated (typically with radiotherapy). Importantly, patients with unexplained bone pain (mostly in long bones, ribs, and spine, whereas joints are not typically involved) and a normal skeletal survey should undergo advanced imaging (whole-body magnetic resonance imaging or whole-body positron emission tomography and computed tomography) to detect bone lesions otherwise missed on plain radiography.28,29

Most of the recommendations regarding follow-up are based on expert opinion, given the lack of randomized data. Most experts agree that all patients should be reevaluated 6 months after an M protein is detected, with laboratory surveillance tests (complete blood cell count, serum creatinine, serum calcium level, serum protein electrophoresis, and serum free light chains). Low-risk patients with a stable M protein level can be followed every 2 to 3 years.

Suspect malignant progression if the serum M protein level increases by 50% or more (with an absolute increase of ≥ 0.5 g/dL); the serum M protein level is 3 g/dL or higher; the serum free light-chain ratio is more than 100; or the patient has unexplained anemia, elevated creatinine, bone pain, fracture, or hypercalcemia.

Patients at intermediate or high risk should be followed annually after the initial 6-month visit.5,7,10

A recent study highlighted the importance of risk stratification in reducing the costs associated with an overzealous diagnostic workup of patients with low-risk MGUS.30 These savings are in addition to a reduction in patient anticipation and anxiety that universally occur before invasive procedures.

THE ROLE OF THE PRIMARY CARE PROVIDER AND THE HEMATOLOGIST

Once an M protein is identified, a comprehensive history, physical examination, and laboratory tests (serum protein electrophoresis to quantify the protein, serum immunofixation, serum free light chains, complete blood cell count, calcium, and creatinine) should be done, taking into consideration the differential diagnosis of monoclonal gammopathies discussed above. After MGUS is confirmed, the patient should be risk-stratified to determine the need for bone marrow biopsy and to predict the risk of progression to more serious conditions.

Referral to a hematologist is warranted for patients with intermediate- and high-risk MGUS, patients with abnormal serum free light-chain ratios, and those who show evidence of malignant progression. Patients with intermediate- and high-risk MGUS could be referred for bone marrow biopsy before assessment by a hematologist. The primary care provider may continue to follow patients with low-risk MGUS who do not display clinical or laboratory evidence of myeloma or related disorders.

MGUS: When to refer patients to a hematologist
When light-chain amyloidosis, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, or another M protein-related disorder is suspected, referral to subspecialists is advised to better define the correlation between the M protein and the patient’s symptoms and signs (Table 6).

The importance of educating patients to report any new worrisome symptom (eg, fatigue, neuropathy, weight loss, night sweats, bone pain) cannot be overemphasized, as some patients may progress to myeloma or other disorders between follow-up visits.

References
  1. van de Donk NW, Palumbo A, Johnsen HE, et al; European Myeloma Network. The clinical relevance and management of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance and related disorders: recommendations from the European Myeloma Network. Haematologica 2014; 99(6):984–996. doi:10.3324/haematol.2013.100552
  2. International Myeloma Working Group. Criteria for the classification of monoclonal gammopathies, multiple myeloma and related disorders: a report of the International Myeloma Working Group. Br J Haematol 2003; 121(5):749–757. pmid:12780789
  3. Rajan AM, Rajkumar SV. Diagnostic evaluation of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. Eur J Haematol 2013; 91(6):561–562. doi:10.1111/ejh.12198
  4. Kyle RA, Rajkumar SV. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. Br J Haematol 2006; 134(6):573–589. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2141.2006.06235.x
  5. Kyle RA, Durie BG, Rajkumar SV, et al; International Myeloma Working Group. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS) and smoldering (asymptomatic) multiple myeloma: IMWG consensus perspectives risk factors for progression and guidelines for monitoring and management. Leukemia 2010; 24(6):1121–1127. doi:10.1038/leu.2010.60
  6. Bird J, Behrens J, Westin J, et al; Haemato-oncology Task Force of the British Committee for Standards in Haematology, UK Myeloma Forum and Nordic Myeloma Study Group. UK Myeloma Forum (UKMF) and Nordic Myeloma Study Group (NMSG): guidelines for the investigation of newly detected M-proteins and the management of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS). Br J Haematol 2009; 147(1):22–42. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2141.2009.07807.x
  7. Rajkumar SV, Kyle RA, Buadi FK. Advances in the diagnosis, classification, risk stratification, and management of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: implications for recategorizing disease entities in the presence of evolving scientific evidence. Mayo Clin Proc 2010; 85(10):945–948. doi:10.4065/mcp.2010.0520
  8. Kyle RA, Therneau TM, Rajkumar SV, et al. A long-term study of prognosis in monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. N Engl J Med 2002; 346(8):564–569. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa01133202
  9. Doyle LM, Gundrum JD, Farnen JP, Wright LJ, Kranig JAI, Go RS. Determining why and which clinicians order serum protein electrophoresis (SPEP), subsequent diagnoses based on indications, and clinical significance of routine follow-up: a study of patients with monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS). Blood 2009; 114(22):Abstr 4883. www.bloodjournal.org/content/114/22/4883. Accessed December 4, 2018.
  10. Merlini G, Palladini G. Differential diagnosis of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. Hematology Am Soc Hematol Educ Program 2012; 2012:595–603. doi:10.1182/asheducation-2012.1.595
  11. Glavey SV, Leung N. Monoclonal gammopathy: the good, the bad and the ugly. Blood Rev 2016; 30(3):223–231. doi:10.1016/j.blre.2015.12.001
  12. Dispenzieri A, Gertz MA, Therneau TM, Kyle RA. Retrospective cohort study of 148 patients with polyclonal gammopathy. Mayo Clin Proc 2001; 76(5):476–487. doi:10.4065/76.5.476
  13. Merlini G, Stone MJ. Dangerous small B-cell clones. Blood 2006; 108(8):2520–2530. doi:10.1182/blood-2006-03-001164
  14. Rajkumar SV, Dimopoulos MA, Palumbo A, et al. International Myeloma Working Group updated criteria for the diagnosis of multiple myeloma. Lancet Oncol 2014; 15(12):e538–e548. doi:10.1016/S1470-2045(14)70442-5
  15. Kyle RA, Gertz MA, Witzig TE, et al. Review of 1027 patients with newly diagnosed multiple myeloma. Mayo Clin Proc 2003; 78(1):21–33. doi:10.4065/78.1.21
  16. Hutchison CA, Harding S, Hewins P, et al. Quantitative assessment of serum and urinary polyclonal free light chains in patients with chronic kidney disease. Clin J Am Soc Nephrol 2008; 3(6):1684–1690. doi:10.2215/CJN.02290508
  17. Katzmann JA, Dispenzieri A, Kyle RA, et al. Elimination of the need for urine studies in the screening algorithm for monoclonal gammopathies by using serum immunofixation and free light chain assays. Mayo Clin Proc 2006; 81(12):1575–1578. doi:10.4065/81.12.1575
  18. Berenson JR, Anderson KC, Audell RA, et al. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: a consensus statement. Br J Haematol 2010; 150(1):28–38. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2141.2010.08207.x
  19. Mangiacavalli S, Cocito F, Pochintesta L, et al. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: a new proposal of workup. Eur J Haematol 2013; 91(4):356–360. doi:10.1111/ejh.12172
  20. Bianchi G, Kyle RA, Colby CL, et al. Impact of optimal follow-up of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance on early diagnosis and prevention of myeloma-related complications. Blood 2010;116:2019–2025. doi:10.1182/blood-2010-04-277566
  21. Rosiñol L, Cibeira MT, Montoto S, et al. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: predictors of malignant transformation and recognition of an evolving type characterized by a progressive increase in M protein size. Mayo Clin Proc 2007; 82(4):428–434. doi:10.4065/82.4.428
  22. Vanderschueren S, Mylle M, Dierickx D, et al. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: significant beyond hematology. Mayo Clin Proc 2009; 84(9):842–845. doi:10.4065/84.9.842
  23. Kyle RA, Rajkumar SV. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance and smouldering multiple myeloma: emphasis on risk factors for progression. Br J Haematol 2007; 139(5):730–743. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2141.2007.06873.x
  24. Leung N, Bridoux F, Hutchison CA, et al; International Kidney and Monoclonal Gammopathy Research Group. Monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance: when MGUS is no longer undetermined or insignificant. Blood. 2012; 120(22):4292–4295. doi:10.1182/blood-2012-07-445304
  25. Merlini G, Wechalekar AD, Palladini G. Systemic light chain amyloidosis: an update for treating physicians. Blood 2013; 121(26):5124–5130. doi:10.1182/blood-2013-01-453001
  26. Dispenzieri A, Katzmann JA, Kyle RA, et al. Prevalence and risk of progression of light-chain monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: a retrospective population-based cohort study. Lancet 2010; 375(9727):1721–1728. doi:10.1016/S0140-6736(10)60482-5
  27. Rajkumar SV, Kyle RA, Therneau TM, et al. Serum free light chain ratio is an independent risk factor for progression in monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. Blood 2005; 106(3):812–817. doi:10.1182/blood-2005-03-1038
  28. Dimopoulos MA, Hillengass J, Usmani S, et al. Role of magnetic resonance imaging in the management of patients with multiple myeloma: a consensus statement. J Clin Oncol 2015; 33(6):657–664. doi:10.1200/JCO.2014.57.9961
  29. Dimopoulos M, Kyle R, Fermand JP, et al. Consensus recommendations for standard investigative workup: report of the International Myeloma Workshop Consensus Panel 3. Blood 2011; 117(18):4701–4705. doi:10.1182/blood-2010-10-299529
  30. Pompa T, Maddox M, Woodard A, et al. Cost effectiveness in low risk MGUS patients. Blood 2016; 128:2360. http://www.bloodjournal.org/content/128/22/2360. Accessed December 4, 2018.
References
  1. van de Donk NW, Palumbo A, Johnsen HE, et al; European Myeloma Network. The clinical relevance and management of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance and related disorders: recommendations from the European Myeloma Network. Haematologica 2014; 99(6):984–996. doi:10.3324/haematol.2013.100552
  2. International Myeloma Working Group. Criteria for the classification of monoclonal gammopathies, multiple myeloma and related disorders: a report of the International Myeloma Working Group. Br J Haematol 2003; 121(5):749–757. pmid:12780789
  3. Rajan AM, Rajkumar SV. Diagnostic evaluation of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. Eur J Haematol 2013; 91(6):561–562. doi:10.1111/ejh.12198
  4. Kyle RA, Rajkumar SV. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. Br J Haematol 2006; 134(6):573–589. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2141.2006.06235.x
  5. Kyle RA, Durie BG, Rajkumar SV, et al; International Myeloma Working Group. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS) and smoldering (asymptomatic) multiple myeloma: IMWG consensus perspectives risk factors for progression and guidelines for monitoring and management. Leukemia 2010; 24(6):1121–1127. doi:10.1038/leu.2010.60
  6. Bird J, Behrens J, Westin J, et al; Haemato-oncology Task Force of the British Committee for Standards in Haematology, UK Myeloma Forum and Nordic Myeloma Study Group. UK Myeloma Forum (UKMF) and Nordic Myeloma Study Group (NMSG): guidelines for the investigation of newly detected M-proteins and the management of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS). Br J Haematol 2009; 147(1):22–42. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2141.2009.07807.x
  7. Rajkumar SV, Kyle RA, Buadi FK. Advances in the diagnosis, classification, risk stratification, and management of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: implications for recategorizing disease entities in the presence of evolving scientific evidence. Mayo Clin Proc 2010; 85(10):945–948. doi:10.4065/mcp.2010.0520
  8. Kyle RA, Therneau TM, Rajkumar SV, et al. A long-term study of prognosis in monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. N Engl J Med 2002; 346(8):564–569. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa01133202
  9. Doyle LM, Gundrum JD, Farnen JP, Wright LJ, Kranig JAI, Go RS. Determining why and which clinicians order serum protein electrophoresis (SPEP), subsequent diagnoses based on indications, and clinical significance of routine follow-up: a study of patients with monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS). Blood 2009; 114(22):Abstr 4883. www.bloodjournal.org/content/114/22/4883. Accessed December 4, 2018.
  10. Merlini G, Palladini G. Differential diagnosis of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. Hematology Am Soc Hematol Educ Program 2012; 2012:595–603. doi:10.1182/asheducation-2012.1.595
  11. Glavey SV, Leung N. Monoclonal gammopathy: the good, the bad and the ugly. Blood Rev 2016; 30(3):223–231. doi:10.1016/j.blre.2015.12.001
  12. Dispenzieri A, Gertz MA, Therneau TM, Kyle RA. Retrospective cohort study of 148 patients with polyclonal gammopathy. Mayo Clin Proc 2001; 76(5):476–487. doi:10.4065/76.5.476
  13. Merlini G, Stone MJ. Dangerous small B-cell clones. Blood 2006; 108(8):2520–2530. doi:10.1182/blood-2006-03-001164
  14. Rajkumar SV, Dimopoulos MA, Palumbo A, et al. International Myeloma Working Group updated criteria for the diagnosis of multiple myeloma. Lancet Oncol 2014; 15(12):e538–e548. doi:10.1016/S1470-2045(14)70442-5
  15. Kyle RA, Gertz MA, Witzig TE, et al. Review of 1027 patients with newly diagnosed multiple myeloma. Mayo Clin Proc 2003; 78(1):21–33. doi:10.4065/78.1.21
  16. Hutchison CA, Harding S, Hewins P, et al. Quantitative assessment of serum and urinary polyclonal free light chains in patients with chronic kidney disease. Clin J Am Soc Nephrol 2008; 3(6):1684–1690. doi:10.2215/CJN.02290508
  17. Katzmann JA, Dispenzieri A, Kyle RA, et al. Elimination of the need for urine studies in the screening algorithm for monoclonal gammopathies by using serum immunofixation and free light chain assays. Mayo Clin Proc 2006; 81(12):1575–1578. doi:10.4065/81.12.1575
  18. Berenson JR, Anderson KC, Audell RA, et al. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: a consensus statement. Br J Haematol 2010; 150(1):28–38. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2141.2010.08207.x
  19. Mangiacavalli S, Cocito F, Pochintesta L, et al. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: a new proposal of workup. Eur J Haematol 2013; 91(4):356–360. doi:10.1111/ejh.12172
  20. Bianchi G, Kyle RA, Colby CL, et al. Impact of optimal follow-up of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance on early diagnosis and prevention of myeloma-related complications. Blood 2010;116:2019–2025. doi:10.1182/blood-2010-04-277566
  21. Rosiñol L, Cibeira MT, Montoto S, et al. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: predictors of malignant transformation and recognition of an evolving type characterized by a progressive increase in M protein size. Mayo Clin Proc 2007; 82(4):428–434. doi:10.4065/82.4.428
  22. Vanderschueren S, Mylle M, Dierickx D, et al. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: significant beyond hematology. Mayo Clin Proc 2009; 84(9):842–845. doi:10.4065/84.9.842
  23. Kyle RA, Rajkumar SV. Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance and smouldering multiple myeloma: emphasis on risk factors for progression. Br J Haematol 2007; 139(5):730–743. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2141.2007.06873.x
  24. Leung N, Bridoux F, Hutchison CA, et al; International Kidney and Monoclonal Gammopathy Research Group. Monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance: when MGUS is no longer undetermined or insignificant. Blood. 2012; 120(22):4292–4295. doi:10.1182/blood-2012-07-445304
  25. Merlini G, Wechalekar AD, Palladini G. Systemic light chain amyloidosis: an update for treating physicians. Blood 2013; 121(26):5124–5130. doi:10.1182/blood-2013-01-453001
  26. Dispenzieri A, Katzmann JA, Kyle RA, et al. Prevalence and risk of progression of light-chain monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: a retrospective population-based cohort study. Lancet 2010; 375(9727):1721–1728. doi:10.1016/S0140-6736(10)60482-5
  27. Rajkumar SV, Kyle RA, Therneau TM, et al. Serum free light chain ratio is an independent risk factor for progression in monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance. Blood 2005; 106(3):812–817. doi:10.1182/blood-2005-03-1038
  28. Dimopoulos MA, Hillengass J, Usmani S, et al. Role of magnetic resonance imaging in the management of patients with multiple myeloma: a consensus statement. J Clin Oncol 2015; 33(6):657–664. doi:10.1200/JCO.2014.57.9961
  29. Dimopoulos M, Kyle R, Fermand JP, et al. Consensus recommendations for standard investigative workup: report of the International Myeloma Workshop Consensus Panel 3. Blood 2011; 117(18):4701–4705. doi:10.1182/blood-2010-10-299529
  30. Pompa T, Maddox M, Woodard A, et al. Cost effectiveness in low risk MGUS patients. Blood 2016; 128:2360. http://www.bloodjournal.org/content/128/22/2360. Accessed December 4, 2018.
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Page Number
39-46
Page Number
39-46
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: A primary care guide
Display Headline
Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance: A primary care guide
Legacy Keywords
monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance, MGUS, multiple myeloma, monoclonal protein, M pro-tein, immunoglobulin, serum protein electrophoresis, light-chain amyloidosis, Waldenstrom macroglobulinemia, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, POEMS syndrome, monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance, MGRS, plasmacytoma, Jack Khouri, Christy Samaras, Jason Valent, Alex Garcia, Beth Faiman, Saveta Mathur, Kim Hamilton, Megan Nakashima, Matt Kalaycio
Legacy Keywords
monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance, MGUS, multiple myeloma, monoclonal protein, M pro-tein, immunoglobulin, serum protein electrophoresis, light-chain amyloidosis, Waldenstrom macroglobulinemia, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, POEMS syndrome, monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance, MGRS, plasmacytoma, Jack Khouri, Christy Samaras, Jason Valent, Alex Garcia, Beth Faiman, Saveta Mathur, Kim Hamilton, Megan Nakashima, Matt Kalaycio
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • MGUS is the most common of the monoclonal gammopathies.
  • The overall risk of MGUS progressing to myeloma and other lymphoproliferative disorders is 1% per year.
  • Low-risk MGUS is defined by an immunoglobulin G monoclonal protein at a concentration less than 1.5 g/dL and a normal serum free light-chain ratio.
  • Low-risk MGUS carries a much lower risk of progression than intermediate- and high-risk MGUS, may not require subspecialty referral, and can be followed by the outpatient provider.
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Fri, 12/28/2018 - 09:00
Un-Gate On Date
Fri, 12/28/2018 - 09:00
Use ProPublica
CFC Schedule Remove Status
Fri, 12/28/2018 - 09:00
Article PDF Media

Hypertension guidelines: Treat patients, not numbers

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 02/28/2019 - 12:02
Display Headline
Hypertension guidelines: Treat patients, not numbers

When treating high blood pressure, how low should we try to go? Debate continues about optimal blood pressure goals after publication of guidelines from the American College of Cardiology and American Heart Association (ACC/AHA) in 2017 that set or permitted a treatment goal of less than 130 mm Hg, depending on the population.1

In this article, we summarize the evolution of hypertension guidelines and the evidence behind them.

HOW THE GOALS EVOLVED

JNC 7, 2003: 140/90 or 130/80

The seventh report of the Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure (JNC 7),2 published in 2003, specified treatment goals of:

  • < 140/90 mm Hg for most patients
  • < 130/80 mm Hg for those with diabetes or chronic kidney disease.

Blood pressure guidelines, 2003–2017
JNC 7 defined hypertension as 140/90 mm Hg or higher, and introduced the classification of prehypertension for patients with a systolic blood pressure of 120 to 139 mm Hg or a diastolic blood pressure of 80 to 89 mm Hg. It advocated managing systolic hypertension in patients over age 50. It also recommended lifestyle changes such as the Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension (DASH) diet, moderate alcohol consumption, weight loss, and a physical activity plan.

JNC 7 provided much-needed clarity and uniformity to managing hypertension. Since then, various scientific groups have published their own guidelines (Table 1).1–9

ACC/AHA/CDC 2014: 140/90

In 2014, the ACC, AHA, and US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) published an evidence-based algorithm for hypertension management.3 As in JNC 7, they suggested a blood pressure goal of less than 140/90 mm Hg, lifestyle modification, and polytherapy, eg, a thiazide diuretic for stage 1 hypertension (< 160/100 mm Hg) and combination therapy with a thiazide diuretic and an angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitor, angiotensin II receptor blocker (ARB), or calcium channel blocker for stage 2 hypertension (≥ 160/100 mm Hg).

JNC 8 2014: 140/90 or 150/90

Soon after, the much-anticipated report of the panel members appointed to the eighth JNC (JNC 8) was published.4 Previous JNC reports were written and published under the auspices of the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, but while the JNC 8 report was being prepared, this government body announced it would no longer publish guidelines.

In contrast to JNC 7, the JNC 8 panel based its recommendations on a systematic review of randomized clinical trials. However, the process and methodology were controversial, especially as the panel excluded some important clinical trials from the analysis.

JNC 8 relaxed the targets in several subgroups, such as patients over age 60 and those with diabetes and chronic kidney disease, due to a lack of definitive evidence on the impact of blood pressure targets lower than 140/90 mm Hg in these groups. Thus, their goals were:

  • < 140/90 mm Hg for patients under age 60
  • < 150/90 mm Hg for patients age 60 and older.

JNC 7 and JNC 8 guidelines compared
Table 2 shows the differences in recommendations between JNC 7 and JNC 8.

Of note, a minority of the JNC 8 panel disagreed with the new targets and provided evidence for keeping the systolic blood pressure target below 140 mm Hg for patients 60 and older.5 Further, the JNC 8 report was not endorsed by several important societies, ie, the AHA, ACC, National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, and American Society of Hypertension (ASH). These issues compromised the acceptance and applicability of the guidelines.

ASH/ISH 2014: 140/90 or 150/90

Also in 2014, the ASH and the International Society of Hypertension released their own report.6 Their goals:

  • < 140/90 mm Hg for most patients
  • < 150/90 mm Hg for patients age 80 and older.

AHA/ACC/ASH 2015: Goals in subgroups

In 2015, the AHA, ACC, and ASH released a joint scientific statement outlining hypertension goals for specific patient populations7:

  • < 150/90 mm Hg for those age 80 and older
  • < 140/90 mm Hg for those with coronary artery disease
  • < 130/80 mm Hg for those with comorbidities such as diabetes and cardiovascular disease.

ADA 2016: Goals for patients with diabetes

In 2016, the American Diabetes Association (ADA) set the following blood pressure goals for patients with diabetes8:

  • < 140/90 mm Hg for adults with diabetes
  • < 130/80 mm Hg for younger adults with diabetes and adults with a high risk of cardiovascular disease
  • 120–160/80–105 mm Hg for pregnant patients with diabetes and preexisting hypertension who are treated with antihypertensive therapy.

 

 

ACP/AAFP 2017: Systolic 150 or 130

In 2017, the American College of Physicians (ACP) and the American Academy of Family Physicians (AAFP) recommended a relaxed systolic blood pressure target, ie, below 150 mm Hg, for adults over age 60, but a tighter goal of less than 140 mm Hg for the same age group if they have transient ischemic attack, stroke, or high cardiovascular risk.9

ACC/AHA 2017: 130/80

The 2017 ACC/AHA guidelines recommended a more aggressive goal of below 130/80 for all, including patients age 65 and older.1

This is a class I (strong) recommendation for patients with known cardiovascular disease or a 10-year risk of a cardiovascular event of 10% or higher, with a B-R level of evidence for the systolic goal (ie, moderate-quality, based on systematic review of randomized controlled trials) and a C-EO level of evidence for the diastolic goal (ie, based on expert opinion).

For patients who do not have cardiovascular disease and who are at lower risk of it, this is a class IIb (weak) recommendation, ie, it “may be reasonable,” with a B-NR level of evidence (moderate-quality, based on nonrandomized studies) for the systolic goal and C-EO (expert opinion) for the diastolic goal.

For many patients, this involves drug treatment. For those with known cardiovascular disease or a 10-year risk of an atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease event of 10% or higher, the ACC/AHA guidelines say that drug treatment “is recommended” if their average blood pressure is 130/80 mm Hg or higher (class I recommendation, based on strong evidence for the systolic threshold and expert option for the diastolic). For those without cardiovascular disease and at lower risk, drug treatment is recommended if their average blood pressure is 140/90 mm Hg or higher (also class I, but based on limited data).

EVERYONE AGREES ON LIFESTYLE

Although the guidelines differ in their blood pressure targets, they consistently recommend lifestyle modifications.

Lifestyle modifications, first described in JNC 7, included weight loss, sodium restriction, and the DASH diet, which is rich in fruits, vegetables, low-fat dairy products, whole grains, poultry, and fish, and low in red meat, sweets, cholesterol, and total and saturated fat.2

These recommendations were based on results from 3 large randomized controlled trials in patients with and without hypertension.10–12 In patients with no history of hypertension, interventions to promote weight loss and sodium restriction significantly reduced blood pressure and the incidence of hypertension (the latter by as much as 77%) compared with usual care.10,11

In patients with and without hypertension, lowering sodium intake in conjunction with the DASH diet was associated with substantially larger reductions in systolic blood pressure.12

The recommendation to lower sodium intake has not changed in the guideline revisions. Meanwhile, other modifications have been added, such as incorporating both aerobic and resistance exercise and moderating alcohol intake. These recommendations have a class I level of evidence (ie, strongest level) in the 2017 ACC/AHA guidelines.1

HYPERTENSION BEGINS AT 130/80

The definition of hypertension changed in the 2017 ACC/AHA guidelines1: previously set at 140/90 mm Hg or higher, it is now 130/80 mm Hg or higher for all age groups. Adults with systolic blood pressure of 130 to 139 mm Hg or diastolic blood pressure of 80 to 89 mm Hg are now classified as having stage 1 hypertension.

Under the new definition, the number of US adults who have hypertension expanded to 45.6% of the general population,13 up from 31.9% under the JNC 7 definition. Thus, overall, 103.3 million US adults now have hypertension, compared with 72.2 million under the JNC 7 criteria.

In addition, the new guidelines expanded the population of adults for whom antihypertensive drug treatment is recommended to 36.2% (81.9 million). However, this represents only a 1.9% absolute increase over the JNC 7 recommendations (34.3%) and a 5.1% absolute increase over the JNC 8 recommendations.14

SPRINT: INTENSIVE TREATMENT IS BENEFICIAL

The new ACC/AHA guidelines1 were based on evidence from several trials, including the Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial (SPRINT).15

This multicenter trial investigated the effect of intensive blood pressure treatment on cardiovascular disease risk.16 The primary outcome was a composite of myocardial infarction, acute coronary syndrome, stroke, and heart failure.

The trial enrolled 9,361 participants at least 50 years of age with systolic blood pressure 130 mm Hg or higher and at least 1 additional risk factor for cardiovascular disease. It excluded anyone with a history of diabetes mellitus, stroke, symptomatic heart failure, or end-stage renal disease.

Two interventions were compared: 

  • Intensive treatment, with a systolic blood pressure goal of less than 120 mm Hg: the protocol called for polytherapy, even for participants who were 75 or older if their blood pressure was 140 mm Hg or higher
  • Standard treatment, with a systolic blood pressure goal of less than 140 mm Hg: it used polytherapy for patients whose systolic blood pressure was 160 mm Hg or higher.

The trial was intended to last 5 years but was stopped early at a median of 3.26 years owing to a significantly lower rate of the primary composite outcome in the intensive-treatment group: 1.65% per year vs 2.19%, a 25% relative risk reduction (P < .001) or a 0.54% absolute risk reduction. We calculate the number needed to treat (NNT) for 1 year to prevent 1 event as 185, and over the 3.26 years of the trial, the investigators calculated the NNT as 61. Similarly, the rate of death from any cause was also lower with intensive treatment, 1.03% per year vs 1.40% per year, a 27% relative risk reduction (P = .003) or a 0.37% absolute risk reduction, NNT 270.

Using these findings, Bress et al16 estimated that implementing intensive blood pressure goals could prevent 107,500 deaths annually.

The downside is adverse effects. In SPRINT,15 the intensive-treatment group experienced significantly higher rates of serious adverse effects than the standard-treatment group, ie:

  • Hypotension 2.4% vs 1.4%, P = .001
  • Syncope 2.3% vs 1.7%, P = .05
  • Electrolyte abnormalities 3.1% vs 2.3%, P = .02)
  • Acute kidney injury or kidney failure 4.1% vs 2.5%, P < .001
  • Any treatment-related adverse event 4.7% vs 2.5%, P = .001.

Thus, Bress et al16 estimated that fully implementing the intensive-treatment goals could cause an additional 56,100 episodes of hypotension per year, 34,400 cases of syncope, 43,400 serious electrolyte disorders, and 88,700 cases of acute kidney injury. All told, about 3 million Americans could suffer a serious adverse effect under the intensive-treatment goals.

 

 

SPRINT caveats and limitations

SPRINT15 was stopped early, after 3.26 years instead of the planned 5 years. The true risk-benefit ratio may have been different if the trial had been extended longer.

In addition, SPRINT used automated office blood pressure measurements in which patients were seated alone and a device (Model 907, Omron Healthcare) took 3 blood pressure measurements at 1-minute intervals after 5 minutes of quiet rest. This was designed to reduce elevated blood pressure readings in the presence of a healthcare professional in a medical setting (ie, “white coat” hypertension).

Many physicians are still taking blood pressure manually, which tends to give higher readings. Therefore, if they aim for a lower goal, they may risk overtreating the patient.

About 50% of patients did not achieve the target systolic blood pressure (< 120 mm Hg) despite receiving an average of 2.8 antihypertensive medications in the intensive-treatment group and 1.8 in the standard-treatment group. The use of antihypertensive medications, however, was not a controlled variable in the trial, and practitioners chose the appropriate drugs for their patients.

Diastolic pressure, which can be markedly lower in older hypertensive patients, was largely ignored, although lower diastolic pressure may have contributed to higher syncope rates in response to alpha blockers and calcium blockers.

Moreover, the trial excluded those with significant comorbidities and those younger than 50 (the mean age was 67.9), which limits the generalizability of the results.

JNC 8 VS SPRINT GOALS: WHAT'S THE EFFECT ON OUTCOMES?

JNC 84 recommended a relaxed target of less than 140/90 mm Hg for adults younger than 60, including those with chronic kidney disease or diabetes, and less than 150/90 mm Hg for adults 60 and older. The SPRINT findings upended those recommendations, showing that intensive treatment in adults age 75 or older significantly improved the composite cardiovascular disease outcome (2.59 vs 3.85 events per year; P < .001) and all-cause mortality (1.78 vs 2.63 events per year; P < .05) compared with standard treatment.17 Also, a subset review of SPRINT trial data found no difference in benefit based on chronic kidney disease status.18

A meta-analysis of 74 clinical trials (N = 306,273) offers a compromise between the SPRINT findings and the JNC 8 recommendations.19 It found that the beneficial effect of blood pressure treatment depended on the patient’s baseline systolic blood pressure. In those with a baseline systolic pressure of 160 mm Hg or higher, treatment reduced cardiovascular mortality by about 15% (relative risk [RR] 0.85; 95% confidence interval [CI] 0.77–0.95). In patients with systolic pressure below 140 mm Hg, treatment effects were neutral (RR 1.03, 95% CI 0.87–1.20) and not associated with any benefit as primary prevention, although data suggest it may reduce the risk of adverse outcomes in patients with coronary heart disease.

OTHER TRIALS THAT INFLUENCED THE GUIDELINES

Important clinical trials that influenced revised blood pressure guidelines
SPRINT was important for refining the appropriate targets for blood pressure treatment, but several other trials also influenced the ACC/AHA guidelines (Table 3).20–24

SHEP and HYVET (the Systolic Hypertension in the Elderly Program20 and the Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial)21 supported intensive blood pressure treatment for older patients by reporting a reduction in fatal and nonfatal stroke risks for those with a systolic blood pressure above 160 mm Hg.

FEVER (the Felodipine Event Reduction study)22 found that treatment with a calcium channel blocker in even a low dose can significantly decrease cardiovascular events, cardiovascular disease, and heart failure compared with no treatment.

JATOS and VALISH (the Japanese Trial to Assess Optimal Systolic Blood Pressure in Elderly Hypertensive Patients23 and the Valsartan in Elderly Isolated Systolic Hypertension study)24 found that outcomes were similar with intensive vs standard treatment.

Ettehad et al25 performed a meta-analysis of 123 studies with more than 600,000 participants that provided strong evidence supporting blood pressure treatment goals below 130/90 mm Hg, in line with the SPRINT trial results.

BLOOD PRESSURE ISN’T EVERYTHING

Other trials remind us that although blood pressure is important, it is not the only factor affecting cardiovascular risk.

HOPE (the Heart Outcomes Prevention Evaluation)26 investigated the use of ramipril (an ACE inhibitor) in preventing myocardial infarction, stroke, or cardiovascular death in patients at high risk of cardiovascular events. The study included 9,297 participants over age 55 (mean age 66) with a baseline blood pressure 139/79 mm Hg. Follow-up was 4.5 years.

Ramipril was better than placebo, with significantly fewer patients experiencing adverse end points in the ramipril group compared with the placebo group:

  • Myocardial infarction 9.9% vs 12.3%, RR 0.80, P < .001
  • Cardiovascular death 6.1% vs 8.1%, RR  0.74, P < .001
  • Stroke 3.4% vs 4.9%, RR = .68, P < .001
  • The composite end point 14.0% vs 17.8%, RR 0.78, P < .001).

Results were even better in the subset of patients who had diabetes.27 However, the decrease in blood pressure attributable to anti­hypertensive therapy with ramipril was minimal (3–4 mm Hg systolic and 1–2 mm Hg diastolic). This slight change should not have been enough to produce significant differences in clinical outcomes, a major limitation of this trial. The investigators speculated that the positive results may be due to a class effect of ACE inhibitors.26

HOPE 328–30 explored the effect of blood pressure- and cholesterol-controlling drugs on the same primary end points but in patients at intermediate risk of major cardiovascular events. Investigators randomized the 12,705 patients to 4 treatment groups:

  • Blood pressure control with candesartan (an ARB) plus hydrochlorothiazide (a thiazide diuretic)
  • Cholesterol control with rosuvastatin (a statin)
  • Blood pressure plus cholesterol control
  • Placebo.

Therapy was started at a systolic blood pressure above 140 mm Hg.

Compared with placebo, the rate of composite events was significantly reduced in the rosuvastatin group (3.7% vs 4.8%, HR 0.76, P = .002)28 and the candesartan-hydrochlorothiazide-rosuvastatin group (3.6% vs 5.0%, HR 0.71; P = .005)29 but not in the candesartan-hydrochlorothiazide group (4.1% vs 4.4%; HR 0.93; P = .40).30

In addition, a subgroup analysis comparing active treatment vs placebo found a significant reduction in major cardiovascular events for treated patients whose baseline systolic blood pressure was in the upper third (> 143.5 mm Hg, mean 154.1 mm Hg), while treated patients in the lower middle and lower thirds had no significant reduction.30

These results suggest that intensive treatment to achieve a systolic blood pressure below 140 mm Hg in patients at intermediate risk may not be helpful. Nevertheless, there seems to be agreement that intensive treatment generally leads to a reduction in cardiovascular events. The results also show the benefit of lowering cholesterol.

Bundy et al31 performed a meta-analysis that provides support for intensive antihypertensive treatment. Reviewing 42 clinical trials in more than 144,000 patients, they found that treating to reach a target systolic blood pressure of 120 to 124 mm Hg can reduce cardiovascular events and all-cause mortality.

The trade-off is a minimal increase in the risk of adverse events. Also, the risk-benefit ratio of intensive treatment seems to vary in different patient subgroups.

 

 

WHAT ABOUT PATIENTS WITH COMORBIDITIES?

The debate over intensive vs standard treatment in blood pressure management extends beyond hypertension and includes important comorbidities such as diabetes, stroke, and renal disease. Patients with a history of stroke or end-stage renal disease have only a minimal mention in the AHA/ACC guidelines.

Diabetes

Emdin et al,32 in a meta-analysis of 40 trials that included more than 100,000 patients with diabetes, concluded that a 10-mm Hg lowering of systolic blood pressure significantly reduces the rates of all-cause mortality, cardiovascular disease, coronary heart disease, stroke, albuminuria, and retinopathy. Stratifying the results according to the systolic blood pressure achieved (≥ 130 or < 130 mm Hg), the relative risks of mortality, coronary heart disease, cardiovascular disease, heart failure, and albuminuria were actually lower in the higher stratum than in the lower.

ACCORD (the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes)33 study provides contrary results. It examined intensive and standard blood pressure control targets in patients with type 2 diabetes at high risk of cardiovascular events, using primary outcome measures similar to those in SPRINT. It found no significant difference in fatal and nonfatal cardiovascular events between the intensive and standard blood pressure target arms.

Despite those results, the ACC/AHA guidelines still advocate for more intensive treatment (goal < 130/80 mm Hg) in all patients, including those with diabetes.1

The ADA position statement (September 2017) recommended a target below 140/90 mm Hg in patients with diabetes and hypertension.8 However, they also noted that lower systolic and diastolic blood pressure targets, such as below 130/80 mm Hg, may be appropriate for patients at high risk of cardiovascular disease “if they can be achieved without undue treatment burden.”8 Thus, it is not clear which blood pressure targets in patients with diabetes are the best.

Stroke

In patients with stroke, AHA/ACC guidelines1 recommend treatment if the blood pressure is 140/90 mm Hg or higher because antihypertensive therapy has been associated with a decrease in the recurrence of transient ischemic attack and stroke. The ideal target blood pressure is not known, but a goal of less than 130/80 mm Hg may be reasonable.

In the Secondary Prevention of Small Subcortical Strokes (SPS3) trial, a retrospective open-label trial, a target blood pressure below 130/80 mm Hg in patients with a history of lacunar stroke was associated with a lower risk of intracranial hemorrhage, but the difference was not statistically significant.34 For this reason, the ACC/AHA guidelines consider it reasonable to aim for a systolic blood pressure below 130 mm Hg in these patients.1

Renal disease

The ACC/AHA guidelines do not address how to manage hypertension in patients with end-stage renal disease, but for patients with chronic kidney disease they recommend a blood pressure target below 130/80 mm Hg.1 This recommendation is derived from the SPRINT trial,15 in which patients with stage 3 or 4 chronic kidney disease accounted for 28% of the study population. In that subgroup, intensive blood pressure control seemed to provide the same benefits for reduction in cardiovascular death and all-cause mortality.

TREAT PATIENTS, NOT NUMBERS

Blood pressure targets should be applied in the appropriate clinical context and on a patient-by-patient basis. In clinical practice, one size does not always fit all, as special cases exist.

For example, blood pressure can oscillate widely in patients with autonomic nerve disorders, making it difficult to strive for a specific target, especially an intensive one. Thus, it may be necessary to allow higher systolic blood pressure in these patients. Similarly, patients with diabetes or chronic kidney disease may be at higher risk of kidney injury with more intensive blood pressure management.

Treating numbers rather than patients may result in unbalanced patient care. The optimal approach to blood pressure management relies on a comprehensive risk factor assessment and shared decision-making with the patient before setting specific blood pressure targets.

OUR APPROACH

We aim for a blood pressure goal below 130/80 mm Hg for all patients with cardiovascular disease, according to the AHA/ACC guidelines. We aim for that same target in patients without cardiovascular disease but who have an elevated estimated cardiovascular risk (> 10%) over the next 10 years.

We recognize, however, that the benefits of aggressive blood pressure reduction may not be as clear in all patients, such as those with diabetes. We also recognize that some patient subgroups are at high risk of adverse events, including those with low diastolic pressure, chronic kidney disease, a history of falls, and older age. In those patients, we are extremely judicious when titrating antihypertensive medications. We often make smaller titrations, at longer intervals, and with more frequent laboratory testing and in-office follow-up.

Our process of managing hypertension through intensive blood pressure control to achieve lower systolic blood pressure targets requires a concerted effort among healthcare providers at all levels. It especially requires more involvement and investment from primary care providers to individualize treatment in their patients. This process has helped us to reach our treatment goals while limiting adverse effects of lower blood pressure targets.

MOVING FORWARD

Hypertension is a major risk factor for cardiovascular disease, and intensive blood pressure control has the potential to significantly reduce rates of morbidity and death associated with cardiovascular disease. Thus, a general consensus on the definition of hypertension and treatment goals is essential to reduce the risk of cardiovascular events in this large patient population.

Intensive blood pressure treatment has shown efficacy, but it has a small accompanying risk of adverse events, which varies in patient subgroups and affects the benefit-risk ratio of this therapy. For example, the cardiovascular benefit of intensive treatment is less clear in diabetic patients, and the risk of adverse events may be higher in older patients with chronic kidney disease.

Moving forward, more research is needed into the effects of intensive and standard treatment on patients of all ages, those with common comorbid conditions, and those with other important factors such as diastolic hypertension.

Finally, the various medical societies should collaborate on hypertension guideline development. This would require considerable planning and coordination but would ultimately be useful in creating a generalizable approach to hypertension management.

References
  1. Whelton PK, Carey RM, Aronow WS, et al. 2017 ACC/AHA/AAPA/ABC/ACPM/AGS/APhA/ASH/ASPC/NMA/PCNA guideline for the prevention, detection, evaluation, and management of high blood pressure in adults: a report of the American College of Cardiology/American Heart Association Task Force on Clinical Practice Guidelines. J Am Coll Cardiol 2018; 71(19):e127–e248. doi:10.1016/j.jacc.2017.11.006
  2. Chobanian AV, Bakris GL, Black HR, et al. The seventh report of the Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure: the JNC 7 report. JAMA 2003; 289(19):2560–2572. doi:10.1001/jama.289.19.2560
  3. Go AS, Bauman MA, King SM, et al. An effective approach to high blood pressure control: a science advisory from the American Heart Association, the American College of Cardiology, and the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Hypertension 2014; 63(4):878–885. doi:10.1161/HYP.0000000000000003
  4. James PA, Oparil S, Carter BL, et al. 2014 evidence-based guideline for the management of high blood pressure in adults: report from the panel members appointed to the Eighth Joint National Committee (JNC 8). JAMA 2014; 311(5):507–520. doi:10.1001/jama.2013.284427
  5. Wright JT Jr, Fine LJ, Lackland DT, Ogedegbe G, Dennison Himmelfarb CR. Evidence supporting a systolic blood pressure goal of less than 150 mm Hg in patients aged 60 years or older: the minority view. Ann Intern Med 2014; 160(7):499–503. doi:10.7326/M13-2981
  6. Weber MA, Schiffrin EL, White WB, et al. Notice of duplicate publication [duplicate publication of Weber MA, Schiffrin EL, White WB, et al. Clinical practice guidelines for the management of hypertension in the community: a statement by the American Society of Hypertension and the International Society of Hypertension. J Clin Hypertens 2014; 16(1):14–26. doi:10.1111/jch.12237] J Hypertens 2014; 32(1):3–15. doi:10.1097/HJH.0000000000000065 
  7. Rosendorff C, Lackland DT, Allison M, et al. Treatment of hypertension in patients with coronary artery disease: a scientific statement from the American Heart Association, American College of Cardiology, and American Society of Hypertension. J Am Soc Hypertens 2015; 9(6):453–498. doi:10.1016/j.jash.2015.03.002
  8. de Boer IH, Bangalore S, Benetos A, et al. Diabetes and hypertension: a position statement by the American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Care 2017; 40(9):1273–1284. doi:10.2337/dci17-0026
  9. Qaseem A, Wilt TJ, Rich R, Humphrey LL, Frost J, Forciea MA. Pharmacologic treatment of hypertension in adults aged 60 years or older to higher versus lower blood pressure targets: a clinical practice guideline from the American College of Physicians and the American Academy of Family Physicians. Ann Intern Med 2017; 166(6):430–437. doi:10.7326/M16-1785
  10. The Trials of Hypertension Prevention Collaborative Research Group. Effects of weight loss and sodium reduction intervention on blood pressure and hypertension incidence in over-weight people with high normal blood pressure: the Trials of Hypertension Prevention, phase II. Arch Intern Med 1997; 157(6):657–667. pmid:9080920
  11. He J, Whelton PK, Appel LJ, Charleston J, Klag MJ. Long-term effects of weight loss and dietary sodium reduction on incidence of hypertension. Hypertension 2000; 35(2):544–549. pmid:10679495
  12. Sacks FM, Svetkey LP, Vollmer WM, et al. Effects on blood pressure of reduced dietary sodium and the Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension (DASH) diet. N Engl J Med 2001; 344(1):3–10. doi:10.1056/NEJM200101043440101
  13. Blackwell DL, Lucas JW, Clarke TC. Summary health statistics for US adults: National Health Interview Survey, 2012. National Center for Health Statistics. Vital Health Stat 10; 2014(260):1–161. pmid:24819891
  14. Muntner P, Carey RM, Gidding S, et al. Potential US population impact of the 2017 ACC/AHA high blood pressure guideline. J Am Coll Cardiol 2018; 71(2):109–118. doi:10.1016/j.jacc.2017.10.073
  15. SPRINT Research Group; Wright JT Jr, Williamson JD, Whelton PK, et al. A randomized trial of intensive versus standard blood-pressure control. N Engl J Med 2015; 373(22):2103–2116. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1511939
  16. Bress AP, Kramer H, Khatib R, et al. Potential deaths averted and serious adverse events incurred from adoption of the SPRINT (Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial) intensive blood pressure regimen in the United States: Projections from NHANES (National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey). Circulation 2017; 135(17):1617–1628. doi:10.1161/CIRCULATIONAHA.116.025322
  17. Williamson JD, Supiano MA, Applegate WB, et al. Intensive vs standard blood pressure control and cardiovascular disease outcomes in adults aged ≥ 75 years: a randomized clinical trial. JAMA 2016; 315(24):2673–2682. doi:10.1001/jama.2016.7050
  18. Beddhu S, Rocco MV, Toto R, et al. Effects of intensive systolic blood pressure control on kidney and cardiovascular outcomes in persons without kidney disease: a secondary analysis of a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2017; 167(6):375–383. doi:10.7326/M16-2966
  19. Brunström M, Carlberg B. Association of blood pressure lowering with mortality and cardiovascular disease across blood pressure levels: a systematic review and meta-analysis. JAMA Intern Med 2018; 178(1):28–36. doi:10.1001/jamainternmed.2017.6015
  20. Prevention of stroke by antihypertensive drug treatment in older persons with isolated systolic hypertension. Final results of the Systolic Hypertension in the Elderly Program (SHEP). SHEP Cooperative Research Group. JAMA 1991; 265(24):3255–3264. pmid:2046107
  21. Bulpitt CJ, Beckett NS, Cooke J, et al. Results of the pilot study for the Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial. J Hypertens 2003; 21(12):2409–2417. doi:10.1097/01.hjh.0000084782.15238.a2
  22. Liu L, Zhang Y, Liu G, et al. The Felodipine Event Reduction (FEVER) study: a randomized long-term placebo-controlled trial in Chinese hypertensive patients. J Hypertens 2005; 23(12):2157–2172. pmid:16269957
  23. JATOS Study Group. Principal results of the Japanese trial to assess optimal systolic blood pressure in elderly hypertensive patients (JATOS). Hypertens Res 2008; 31(12):2115–2127. doi:10.1291/hypres.31.2115
  24. Ogihara T, Saruta T, Rakugi H, et al. Target blood pressure for treatment of isolated systolic hypertension in the elderly: valsartan in elderly isolated systolic hypertension study. Hypertension 2010; 56(2):196–202. doi:10.1161/HYPERTENSIONAHA.109.146035
  25. Ettehad D, Emdin CA, Kiran A, et al. Blood pressure lowering for prevention of cardiovascular disease and death: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Lancet 2016; 387(10022):957–967. doi:10.1016/S0140-6736(15)01225-8
  26. Sleight P. The HOPE study (Heart Outcomes Prevention Evaluation). J Renin Angiotensin Aldosterone Syst 2000; 1(1):18–20. doi:10.3317/jraas.2000.002
  27. Effects of ramipril on cardiovascular and microvascular outcomes in people with diabetes mellitus: results of the HOPE study and MICRO-HOPE substudy. Heart Outcomes Prevention Evaluation Study Investigators. Lancet 2000; 355(9200):253–259. pmid:10675071
  28. Yusuf S, Bosch J, Dagenais G, et al. Cholesterol lowering in intermediate-risk persons without cardiovascular disease. N Engl J Med 2016; 374(21):2021–2031. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1600176
  29. Yusuf S, Lonn E, Pais P, et al. Blood-pressure and cholesterol lowering in persons without cardiovascular disease. N Engl J Med 2016; 374(21):2032–2043. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1600177
  30. Lonn EM, Bosch J, López-Jaramillo P, et al. Blood-pressure lowering in intermediate-risk persons without cardiovascular disease. N Engl J Med 2016; 374(21):2009–2020. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1600175
  31. Bundy JD, Li C, Stuchlik P, et al. Systolic blood pressure reduction and risk of cardiovascular disease and mortality: a systematic review and network meta-analysis. JAMA Cardiol 2017; 2(7):775–781. doi:10.1001/jamacardio.2017.1421
  32. Emdin CA, Rahimi K, Neal B, Callender T, Perkovic V, Patel A. Blood pressure lowering in type 2 diabetes: a systematic review and meta-analysis. JAMA 2015; 313(6):603–615. doi:10.1001/jama.2014.18574
  33. ACCORD Study Group; Cushman WC, Evans GW, Byington RP, et al. Effects of intensive blood-pressure control in type 2 diabetes mellitus. N Engl J Med 2010; 362(17):1575–1585. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1001286
  34. SPS3 Study Group; Benavente OR, Coffey CS, Conwit R, et al. Blood-pressure targets in patients with recent lacunar stroke: the SPS3 randomised trial. Lancet 2013; 382(9891):507–515. doi:10.1016/S0140-6736(13)60852-1
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Wesam Aleyadeh, MD
Ministry of Health, Amman, Jordan

Erika Hutt-Centeno, MD
Department of Internal Medicine, Cleveland Clinic; Clinical Instructor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Haitham M. Ahmed, MD, MPH
Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Sydell and Arnold Miller Family Heart and Vascular Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Nishant P. Shah, MD
Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Sydell and Arnold Miller Family Heart and Vascular Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Address: Nishant Shah, MD, J3-6, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; [email protected]

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
47-56
Legacy Keywords
hypertension, high blood pressure, guidelines, American College of Cardiology, American Heart Association, 130/80, goals, target, Joint National Committee, JNC 7, JNC 8, Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial, SPRINT, Felodipine Event Reduction Study, FEVER, Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial, HYVET, Japanese Trial to Assess Optimal Systolic Blood Pressure in Elderly Hypertensive Patients, JATOS, Systolic Hypertension in the Elderly Program, SHEP, Valsartan in Elderly Isolated Systolic Hypertension Study, VALISH, ACCORD, Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes, Wesam Aleyadeh, Erika Hutt-Centeno, Nishant Shah
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Wesam Aleyadeh, MD
Ministry of Health, Amman, Jordan

Erika Hutt-Centeno, MD
Department of Internal Medicine, Cleveland Clinic; Clinical Instructor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Haitham M. Ahmed, MD, MPH
Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Sydell and Arnold Miller Family Heart and Vascular Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Nishant P. Shah, MD
Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Sydell and Arnold Miller Family Heart and Vascular Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Address: Nishant Shah, MD, J3-6, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; [email protected]

Author and Disclosure Information

Wesam Aleyadeh, MD
Ministry of Health, Amman, Jordan

Erika Hutt-Centeno, MD
Department of Internal Medicine, Cleveland Clinic; Clinical Instructor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Haitham M. Ahmed, MD, MPH
Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Sydell and Arnold Miller Family Heart and Vascular Institute, Cleveland Clinic; Assistant Professor, Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine of Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH

Nishant P. Shah, MD
Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Sydell and Arnold Miller Family Heart and Vascular Institute, Cleveland Clinic

Address: Nishant Shah, MD, J3-6, Cleveland Clinic, 9500 Euclid Avenue, Cleveland, OH 44195; [email protected]

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

When treating high blood pressure, how low should we try to go? Debate continues about optimal blood pressure goals after publication of guidelines from the American College of Cardiology and American Heart Association (ACC/AHA) in 2017 that set or permitted a treatment goal of less than 130 mm Hg, depending on the population.1

In this article, we summarize the evolution of hypertension guidelines and the evidence behind them.

HOW THE GOALS EVOLVED

JNC 7, 2003: 140/90 or 130/80

The seventh report of the Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure (JNC 7),2 published in 2003, specified treatment goals of:

  • < 140/90 mm Hg for most patients
  • < 130/80 mm Hg for those with diabetes or chronic kidney disease.

Blood pressure guidelines, 2003–2017
JNC 7 defined hypertension as 140/90 mm Hg or higher, and introduced the classification of prehypertension for patients with a systolic blood pressure of 120 to 139 mm Hg or a diastolic blood pressure of 80 to 89 mm Hg. It advocated managing systolic hypertension in patients over age 50. It also recommended lifestyle changes such as the Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension (DASH) diet, moderate alcohol consumption, weight loss, and a physical activity plan.

JNC 7 provided much-needed clarity and uniformity to managing hypertension. Since then, various scientific groups have published their own guidelines (Table 1).1–9

ACC/AHA/CDC 2014: 140/90

In 2014, the ACC, AHA, and US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) published an evidence-based algorithm for hypertension management.3 As in JNC 7, they suggested a blood pressure goal of less than 140/90 mm Hg, lifestyle modification, and polytherapy, eg, a thiazide diuretic for stage 1 hypertension (< 160/100 mm Hg) and combination therapy with a thiazide diuretic and an angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitor, angiotensin II receptor blocker (ARB), or calcium channel blocker for stage 2 hypertension (≥ 160/100 mm Hg).

JNC 8 2014: 140/90 or 150/90

Soon after, the much-anticipated report of the panel members appointed to the eighth JNC (JNC 8) was published.4 Previous JNC reports were written and published under the auspices of the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, but while the JNC 8 report was being prepared, this government body announced it would no longer publish guidelines.

In contrast to JNC 7, the JNC 8 panel based its recommendations on a systematic review of randomized clinical trials. However, the process and methodology were controversial, especially as the panel excluded some important clinical trials from the analysis.

JNC 8 relaxed the targets in several subgroups, such as patients over age 60 and those with diabetes and chronic kidney disease, due to a lack of definitive evidence on the impact of blood pressure targets lower than 140/90 mm Hg in these groups. Thus, their goals were:

  • < 140/90 mm Hg for patients under age 60
  • < 150/90 mm Hg for patients age 60 and older.

JNC 7 and JNC 8 guidelines compared
Table 2 shows the differences in recommendations between JNC 7 and JNC 8.

Of note, a minority of the JNC 8 panel disagreed with the new targets and provided evidence for keeping the systolic blood pressure target below 140 mm Hg for patients 60 and older.5 Further, the JNC 8 report was not endorsed by several important societies, ie, the AHA, ACC, National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, and American Society of Hypertension (ASH). These issues compromised the acceptance and applicability of the guidelines.

ASH/ISH 2014: 140/90 or 150/90

Also in 2014, the ASH and the International Society of Hypertension released their own report.6 Their goals:

  • < 140/90 mm Hg for most patients
  • < 150/90 mm Hg for patients age 80 and older.

AHA/ACC/ASH 2015: Goals in subgroups

In 2015, the AHA, ACC, and ASH released a joint scientific statement outlining hypertension goals for specific patient populations7:

  • < 150/90 mm Hg for those age 80 and older
  • < 140/90 mm Hg for those with coronary artery disease
  • < 130/80 mm Hg for those with comorbidities such as diabetes and cardiovascular disease.

ADA 2016: Goals for patients with diabetes

In 2016, the American Diabetes Association (ADA) set the following blood pressure goals for patients with diabetes8:

  • < 140/90 mm Hg for adults with diabetes
  • < 130/80 mm Hg for younger adults with diabetes and adults with a high risk of cardiovascular disease
  • 120–160/80–105 mm Hg for pregnant patients with diabetes and preexisting hypertension who are treated with antihypertensive therapy.

 

 

ACP/AAFP 2017: Systolic 150 or 130

In 2017, the American College of Physicians (ACP) and the American Academy of Family Physicians (AAFP) recommended a relaxed systolic blood pressure target, ie, below 150 mm Hg, for adults over age 60, but a tighter goal of less than 140 mm Hg for the same age group if they have transient ischemic attack, stroke, or high cardiovascular risk.9

ACC/AHA 2017: 130/80

The 2017 ACC/AHA guidelines recommended a more aggressive goal of below 130/80 for all, including patients age 65 and older.1

This is a class I (strong) recommendation for patients with known cardiovascular disease or a 10-year risk of a cardiovascular event of 10% or higher, with a B-R level of evidence for the systolic goal (ie, moderate-quality, based on systematic review of randomized controlled trials) and a C-EO level of evidence for the diastolic goal (ie, based on expert opinion).

For patients who do not have cardiovascular disease and who are at lower risk of it, this is a class IIb (weak) recommendation, ie, it “may be reasonable,” with a B-NR level of evidence (moderate-quality, based on nonrandomized studies) for the systolic goal and C-EO (expert opinion) for the diastolic goal.

For many patients, this involves drug treatment. For those with known cardiovascular disease or a 10-year risk of an atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease event of 10% or higher, the ACC/AHA guidelines say that drug treatment “is recommended” if their average blood pressure is 130/80 mm Hg or higher (class I recommendation, based on strong evidence for the systolic threshold and expert option for the diastolic). For those without cardiovascular disease and at lower risk, drug treatment is recommended if their average blood pressure is 140/90 mm Hg or higher (also class I, but based on limited data).

EVERYONE AGREES ON LIFESTYLE

Although the guidelines differ in their blood pressure targets, they consistently recommend lifestyle modifications.

Lifestyle modifications, first described in JNC 7, included weight loss, sodium restriction, and the DASH diet, which is rich in fruits, vegetables, low-fat dairy products, whole grains, poultry, and fish, and low in red meat, sweets, cholesterol, and total and saturated fat.2

These recommendations were based on results from 3 large randomized controlled trials in patients with and without hypertension.10–12 In patients with no history of hypertension, interventions to promote weight loss and sodium restriction significantly reduced blood pressure and the incidence of hypertension (the latter by as much as 77%) compared with usual care.10,11

In patients with and without hypertension, lowering sodium intake in conjunction with the DASH diet was associated with substantially larger reductions in systolic blood pressure.12

The recommendation to lower sodium intake has not changed in the guideline revisions. Meanwhile, other modifications have been added, such as incorporating both aerobic and resistance exercise and moderating alcohol intake. These recommendations have a class I level of evidence (ie, strongest level) in the 2017 ACC/AHA guidelines.1

HYPERTENSION BEGINS AT 130/80

The definition of hypertension changed in the 2017 ACC/AHA guidelines1: previously set at 140/90 mm Hg or higher, it is now 130/80 mm Hg or higher for all age groups. Adults with systolic blood pressure of 130 to 139 mm Hg or diastolic blood pressure of 80 to 89 mm Hg are now classified as having stage 1 hypertension.

Under the new definition, the number of US adults who have hypertension expanded to 45.6% of the general population,13 up from 31.9% under the JNC 7 definition. Thus, overall, 103.3 million US adults now have hypertension, compared with 72.2 million under the JNC 7 criteria.

In addition, the new guidelines expanded the population of adults for whom antihypertensive drug treatment is recommended to 36.2% (81.9 million). However, this represents only a 1.9% absolute increase over the JNC 7 recommendations (34.3%) and a 5.1% absolute increase over the JNC 8 recommendations.14

SPRINT: INTENSIVE TREATMENT IS BENEFICIAL

The new ACC/AHA guidelines1 were based on evidence from several trials, including the Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial (SPRINT).15

This multicenter trial investigated the effect of intensive blood pressure treatment on cardiovascular disease risk.16 The primary outcome was a composite of myocardial infarction, acute coronary syndrome, stroke, and heart failure.

The trial enrolled 9,361 participants at least 50 years of age with systolic blood pressure 130 mm Hg or higher and at least 1 additional risk factor for cardiovascular disease. It excluded anyone with a history of diabetes mellitus, stroke, symptomatic heart failure, or end-stage renal disease.

Two interventions were compared: 

  • Intensive treatment, with a systolic blood pressure goal of less than 120 mm Hg: the protocol called for polytherapy, even for participants who were 75 or older if their blood pressure was 140 mm Hg or higher
  • Standard treatment, with a systolic blood pressure goal of less than 140 mm Hg: it used polytherapy for patients whose systolic blood pressure was 160 mm Hg or higher.

The trial was intended to last 5 years but was stopped early at a median of 3.26 years owing to a significantly lower rate of the primary composite outcome in the intensive-treatment group: 1.65% per year vs 2.19%, a 25% relative risk reduction (P < .001) or a 0.54% absolute risk reduction. We calculate the number needed to treat (NNT) for 1 year to prevent 1 event as 185, and over the 3.26 years of the trial, the investigators calculated the NNT as 61. Similarly, the rate of death from any cause was also lower with intensive treatment, 1.03% per year vs 1.40% per year, a 27% relative risk reduction (P = .003) or a 0.37% absolute risk reduction, NNT 270.

Using these findings, Bress et al16 estimated that implementing intensive blood pressure goals could prevent 107,500 deaths annually.

The downside is adverse effects. In SPRINT,15 the intensive-treatment group experienced significantly higher rates of serious adverse effects than the standard-treatment group, ie:

  • Hypotension 2.4% vs 1.4%, P = .001
  • Syncope 2.3% vs 1.7%, P = .05
  • Electrolyte abnormalities 3.1% vs 2.3%, P = .02)
  • Acute kidney injury or kidney failure 4.1% vs 2.5%, P < .001
  • Any treatment-related adverse event 4.7% vs 2.5%, P = .001.

Thus, Bress et al16 estimated that fully implementing the intensive-treatment goals could cause an additional 56,100 episodes of hypotension per year, 34,400 cases of syncope, 43,400 serious electrolyte disorders, and 88,700 cases of acute kidney injury. All told, about 3 million Americans could suffer a serious adverse effect under the intensive-treatment goals.

 

 

SPRINT caveats and limitations

SPRINT15 was stopped early, after 3.26 years instead of the planned 5 years. The true risk-benefit ratio may have been different if the trial had been extended longer.

In addition, SPRINT used automated office blood pressure measurements in which patients were seated alone and a device (Model 907, Omron Healthcare) took 3 blood pressure measurements at 1-minute intervals after 5 minutes of quiet rest. This was designed to reduce elevated blood pressure readings in the presence of a healthcare professional in a medical setting (ie, “white coat” hypertension).

Many physicians are still taking blood pressure manually, which tends to give higher readings. Therefore, if they aim for a lower goal, they may risk overtreating the patient.

About 50% of patients did not achieve the target systolic blood pressure (< 120 mm Hg) despite receiving an average of 2.8 antihypertensive medications in the intensive-treatment group and 1.8 in the standard-treatment group. The use of antihypertensive medications, however, was not a controlled variable in the trial, and practitioners chose the appropriate drugs for their patients.

Diastolic pressure, which can be markedly lower in older hypertensive patients, was largely ignored, although lower diastolic pressure may have contributed to higher syncope rates in response to alpha blockers and calcium blockers.

Moreover, the trial excluded those with significant comorbidities and those younger than 50 (the mean age was 67.9), which limits the generalizability of the results.

JNC 8 VS SPRINT GOALS: WHAT'S THE EFFECT ON OUTCOMES?

JNC 84 recommended a relaxed target of less than 140/90 mm Hg for adults younger than 60, including those with chronic kidney disease or diabetes, and less than 150/90 mm Hg for adults 60 and older. The SPRINT findings upended those recommendations, showing that intensive treatment in adults age 75 or older significantly improved the composite cardiovascular disease outcome (2.59 vs 3.85 events per year; P < .001) and all-cause mortality (1.78 vs 2.63 events per year; P < .05) compared with standard treatment.17 Also, a subset review of SPRINT trial data found no difference in benefit based on chronic kidney disease status.18

A meta-analysis of 74 clinical trials (N = 306,273) offers a compromise between the SPRINT findings and the JNC 8 recommendations.19 It found that the beneficial effect of blood pressure treatment depended on the patient’s baseline systolic blood pressure. In those with a baseline systolic pressure of 160 mm Hg or higher, treatment reduced cardiovascular mortality by about 15% (relative risk [RR] 0.85; 95% confidence interval [CI] 0.77–0.95). In patients with systolic pressure below 140 mm Hg, treatment effects were neutral (RR 1.03, 95% CI 0.87–1.20) and not associated with any benefit as primary prevention, although data suggest it may reduce the risk of adverse outcomes in patients with coronary heart disease.

OTHER TRIALS THAT INFLUENCED THE GUIDELINES

Important clinical trials that influenced revised blood pressure guidelines
SPRINT was important for refining the appropriate targets for blood pressure treatment, but several other trials also influenced the ACC/AHA guidelines (Table 3).20–24

SHEP and HYVET (the Systolic Hypertension in the Elderly Program20 and the Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial)21 supported intensive blood pressure treatment for older patients by reporting a reduction in fatal and nonfatal stroke risks for those with a systolic blood pressure above 160 mm Hg.

FEVER (the Felodipine Event Reduction study)22 found that treatment with a calcium channel blocker in even a low dose can significantly decrease cardiovascular events, cardiovascular disease, and heart failure compared with no treatment.

JATOS and VALISH (the Japanese Trial to Assess Optimal Systolic Blood Pressure in Elderly Hypertensive Patients23 and the Valsartan in Elderly Isolated Systolic Hypertension study)24 found that outcomes were similar with intensive vs standard treatment.

Ettehad et al25 performed a meta-analysis of 123 studies with more than 600,000 participants that provided strong evidence supporting blood pressure treatment goals below 130/90 mm Hg, in line with the SPRINT trial results.

BLOOD PRESSURE ISN’T EVERYTHING

Other trials remind us that although blood pressure is important, it is not the only factor affecting cardiovascular risk.

HOPE (the Heart Outcomes Prevention Evaluation)26 investigated the use of ramipril (an ACE inhibitor) in preventing myocardial infarction, stroke, or cardiovascular death in patients at high risk of cardiovascular events. The study included 9,297 participants over age 55 (mean age 66) with a baseline blood pressure 139/79 mm Hg. Follow-up was 4.5 years.

Ramipril was better than placebo, with significantly fewer patients experiencing adverse end points in the ramipril group compared with the placebo group:

  • Myocardial infarction 9.9% vs 12.3%, RR 0.80, P < .001
  • Cardiovascular death 6.1% vs 8.1%, RR  0.74, P < .001
  • Stroke 3.4% vs 4.9%, RR = .68, P < .001
  • The composite end point 14.0% vs 17.8%, RR 0.78, P < .001).

Results were even better in the subset of patients who had diabetes.27 However, the decrease in blood pressure attributable to anti­hypertensive therapy with ramipril was minimal (3–4 mm Hg systolic and 1–2 mm Hg diastolic). This slight change should not have been enough to produce significant differences in clinical outcomes, a major limitation of this trial. The investigators speculated that the positive results may be due to a class effect of ACE inhibitors.26

HOPE 328–30 explored the effect of blood pressure- and cholesterol-controlling drugs on the same primary end points but in patients at intermediate risk of major cardiovascular events. Investigators randomized the 12,705 patients to 4 treatment groups:

  • Blood pressure control with candesartan (an ARB) plus hydrochlorothiazide (a thiazide diuretic)
  • Cholesterol control with rosuvastatin (a statin)
  • Blood pressure plus cholesterol control
  • Placebo.

Therapy was started at a systolic blood pressure above 140 mm Hg.

Compared with placebo, the rate of composite events was significantly reduced in the rosuvastatin group (3.7% vs 4.8%, HR 0.76, P = .002)28 and the candesartan-hydrochlorothiazide-rosuvastatin group (3.6% vs 5.0%, HR 0.71; P = .005)29 but not in the candesartan-hydrochlorothiazide group (4.1% vs 4.4%; HR 0.93; P = .40).30

In addition, a subgroup analysis comparing active treatment vs placebo found a significant reduction in major cardiovascular events for treated patients whose baseline systolic blood pressure was in the upper third (> 143.5 mm Hg, mean 154.1 mm Hg), while treated patients in the lower middle and lower thirds had no significant reduction.30

These results suggest that intensive treatment to achieve a systolic blood pressure below 140 mm Hg in patients at intermediate risk may not be helpful. Nevertheless, there seems to be agreement that intensive treatment generally leads to a reduction in cardiovascular events. The results also show the benefit of lowering cholesterol.

Bundy et al31 performed a meta-analysis that provides support for intensive antihypertensive treatment. Reviewing 42 clinical trials in more than 144,000 patients, they found that treating to reach a target systolic blood pressure of 120 to 124 mm Hg can reduce cardiovascular events and all-cause mortality.

The trade-off is a minimal increase in the risk of adverse events. Also, the risk-benefit ratio of intensive treatment seems to vary in different patient subgroups.

 

 

WHAT ABOUT PATIENTS WITH COMORBIDITIES?

The debate over intensive vs standard treatment in blood pressure management extends beyond hypertension and includes important comorbidities such as diabetes, stroke, and renal disease. Patients with a history of stroke or end-stage renal disease have only a minimal mention in the AHA/ACC guidelines.

Diabetes

Emdin et al,32 in a meta-analysis of 40 trials that included more than 100,000 patients with diabetes, concluded that a 10-mm Hg lowering of systolic blood pressure significantly reduces the rates of all-cause mortality, cardiovascular disease, coronary heart disease, stroke, albuminuria, and retinopathy. Stratifying the results according to the systolic blood pressure achieved (≥ 130 or < 130 mm Hg), the relative risks of mortality, coronary heart disease, cardiovascular disease, heart failure, and albuminuria were actually lower in the higher stratum than in the lower.

ACCORD (the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes)33 study provides contrary results. It examined intensive and standard blood pressure control targets in patients with type 2 diabetes at high risk of cardiovascular events, using primary outcome measures similar to those in SPRINT. It found no significant difference in fatal and nonfatal cardiovascular events between the intensive and standard blood pressure target arms.

Despite those results, the ACC/AHA guidelines still advocate for more intensive treatment (goal < 130/80 mm Hg) in all patients, including those with diabetes.1

The ADA position statement (September 2017) recommended a target below 140/90 mm Hg in patients with diabetes and hypertension.8 However, they also noted that lower systolic and diastolic blood pressure targets, such as below 130/80 mm Hg, may be appropriate for patients at high risk of cardiovascular disease “if they can be achieved without undue treatment burden.”8 Thus, it is not clear which blood pressure targets in patients with diabetes are the best.

Stroke

In patients with stroke, AHA/ACC guidelines1 recommend treatment if the blood pressure is 140/90 mm Hg or higher because antihypertensive therapy has been associated with a decrease in the recurrence of transient ischemic attack and stroke. The ideal target blood pressure is not known, but a goal of less than 130/80 mm Hg may be reasonable.

In the Secondary Prevention of Small Subcortical Strokes (SPS3) trial, a retrospective open-label trial, a target blood pressure below 130/80 mm Hg in patients with a history of lacunar stroke was associated with a lower risk of intracranial hemorrhage, but the difference was not statistically significant.34 For this reason, the ACC/AHA guidelines consider it reasonable to aim for a systolic blood pressure below 130 mm Hg in these patients.1

Renal disease

The ACC/AHA guidelines do not address how to manage hypertension in patients with end-stage renal disease, but for patients with chronic kidney disease they recommend a blood pressure target below 130/80 mm Hg.1 This recommendation is derived from the SPRINT trial,15 in which patients with stage 3 or 4 chronic kidney disease accounted for 28% of the study population. In that subgroup, intensive blood pressure control seemed to provide the same benefits for reduction in cardiovascular death and all-cause mortality.

TREAT PATIENTS, NOT NUMBERS

Blood pressure targets should be applied in the appropriate clinical context and on a patient-by-patient basis. In clinical practice, one size does not always fit all, as special cases exist.

For example, blood pressure can oscillate widely in patients with autonomic nerve disorders, making it difficult to strive for a specific target, especially an intensive one. Thus, it may be necessary to allow higher systolic blood pressure in these patients. Similarly, patients with diabetes or chronic kidney disease may be at higher risk of kidney injury with more intensive blood pressure management.

Treating numbers rather than patients may result in unbalanced patient care. The optimal approach to blood pressure management relies on a comprehensive risk factor assessment and shared decision-making with the patient before setting specific blood pressure targets.

OUR APPROACH

We aim for a blood pressure goal below 130/80 mm Hg for all patients with cardiovascular disease, according to the AHA/ACC guidelines. We aim for that same target in patients without cardiovascular disease but who have an elevated estimated cardiovascular risk (> 10%) over the next 10 years.

We recognize, however, that the benefits of aggressive blood pressure reduction may not be as clear in all patients, such as those with diabetes. We also recognize that some patient subgroups are at high risk of adverse events, including those with low diastolic pressure, chronic kidney disease, a history of falls, and older age. In those patients, we are extremely judicious when titrating antihypertensive medications. We often make smaller titrations, at longer intervals, and with more frequent laboratory testing and in-office follow-up.

Our process of managing hypertension through intensive blood pressure control to achieve lower systolic blood pressure targets requires a concerted effort among healthcare providers at all levels. It especially requires more involvement and investment from primary care providers to individualize treatment in their patients. This process has helped us to reach our treatment goals while limiting adverse effects of lower blood pressure targets.

MOVING FORWARD

Hypertension is a major risk factor for cardiovascular disease, and intensive blood pressure control has the potential to significantly reduce rates of morbidity and death associated with cardiovascular disease. Thus, a general consensus on the definition of hypertension and treatment goals is essential to reduce the risk of cardiovascular events in this large patient population.

Intensive blood pressure treatment has shown efficacy, but it has a small accompanying risk of adverse events, which varies in patient subgroups and affects the benefit-risk ratio of this therapy. For example, the cardiovascular benefit of intensive treatment is less clear in diabetic patients, and the risk of adverse events may be higher in older patients with chronic kidney disease.

Moving forward, more research is needed into the effects of intensive and standard treatment on patients of all ages, those with common comorbid conditions, and those with other important factors such as diastolic hypertension.

Finally, the various medical societies should collaborate on hypertension guideline development. This would require considerable planning and coordination but would ultimately be useful in creating a generalizable approach to hypertension management.

When treating high blood pressure, how low should we try to go? Debate continues about optimal blood pressure goals after publication of guidelines from the American College of Cardiology and American Heart Association (ACC/AHA) in 2017 that set or permitted a treatment goal of less than 130 mm Hg, depending on the population.1

In this article, we summarize the evolution of hypertension guidelines and the evidence behind them.

HOW THE GOALS EVOLVED

JNC 7, 2003: 140/90 or 130/80

The seventh report of the Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure (JNC 7),2 published in 2003, specified treatment goals of:

  • < 140/90 mm Hg for most patients
  • < 130/80 mm Hg for those with diabetes or chronic kidney disease.

Blood pressure guidelines, 2003–2017
JNC 7 defined hypertension as 140/90 mm Hg or higher, and introduced the classification of prehypertension for patients with a systolic blood pressure of 120 to 139 mm Hg or a diastolic blood pressure of 80 to 89 mm Hg. It advocated managing systolic hypertension in patients over age 50. It also recommended lifestyle changes such as the Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension (DASH) diet, moderate alcohol consumption, weight loss, and a physical activity plan.

JNC 7 provided much-needed clarity and uniformity to managing hypertension. Since then, various scientific groups have published their own guidelines (Table 1).1–9

ACC/AHA/CDC 2014: 140/90

In 2014, the ACC, AHA, and US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) published an evidence-based algorithm for hypertension management.3 As in JNC 7, they suggested a blood pressure goal of less than 140/90 mm Hg, lifestyle modification, and polytherapy, eg, a thiazide diuretic for stage 1 hypertension (< 160/100 mm Hg) and combination therapy with a thiazide diuretic and an angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitor, angiotensin II receptor blocker (ARB), or calcium channel blocker for stage 2 hypertension (≥ 160/100 mm Hg).

JNC 8 2014: 140/90 or 150/90

Soon after, the much-anticipated report of the panel members appointed to the eighth JNC (JNC 8) was published.4 Previous JNC reports were written and published under the auspices of the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, but while the JNC 8 report was being prepared, this government body announced it would no longer publish guidelines.

In contrast to JNC 7, the JNC 8 panel based its recommendations on a systematic review of randomized clinical trials. However, the process and methodology were controversial, especially as the panel excluded some important clinical trials from the analysis.

JNC 8 relaxed the targets in several subgroups, such as patients over age 60 and those with diabetes and chronic kidney disease, due to a lack of definitive evidence on the impact of blood pressure targets lower than 140/90 mm Hg in these groups. Thus, their goals were:

  • < 140/90 mm Hg for patients under age 60
  • < 150/90 mm Hg for patients age 60 and older.

JNC 7 and JNC 8 guidelines compared
Table 2 shows the differences in recommendations between JNC 7 and JNC 8.

Of note, a minority of the JNC 8 panel disagreed with the new targets and provided evidence for keeping the systolic blood pressure target below 140 mm Hg for patients 60 and older.5 Further, the JNC 8 report was not endorsed by several important societies, ie, the AHA, ACC, National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, and American Society of Hypertension (ASH). These issues compromised the acceptance and applicability of the guidelines.

ASH/ISH 2014: 140/90 or 150/90

Also in 2014, the ASH and the International Society of Hypertension released their own report.6 Their goals:

  • < 140/90 mm Hg for most patients
  • < 150/90 mm Hg for patients age 80 and older.

AHA/ACC/ASH 2015: Goals in subgroups

In 2015, the AHA, ACC, and ASH released a joint scientific statement outlining hypertension goals for specific patient populations7:

  • < 150/90 mm Hg for those age 80 and older
  • < 140/90 mm Hg for those with coronary artery disease
  • < 130/80 mm Hg for those with comorbidities such as diabetes and cardiovascular disease.

ADA 2016: Goals for patients with diabetes

In 2016, the American Diabetes Association (ADA) set the following blood pressure goals for patients with diabetes8:

  • < 140/90 mm Hg for adults with diabetes
  • < 130/80 mm Hg for younger adults with diabetes and adults with a high risk of cardiovascular disease
  • 120–160/80–105 mm Hg for pregnant patients with diabetes and preexisting hypertension who are treated with antihypertensive therapy.

 

 

ACP/AAFP 2017: Systolic 150 or 130

In 2017, the American College of Physicians (ACP) and the American Academy of Family Physicians (AAFP) recommended a relaxed systolic blood pressure target, ie, below 150 mm Hg, for adults over age 60, but a tighter goal of less than 140 mm Hg for the same age group if they have transient ischemic attack, stroke, or high cardiovascular risk.9

ACC/AHA 2017: 130/80

The 2017 ACC/AHA guidelines recommended a more aggressive goal of below 130/80 for all, including patients age 65 and older.1

This is a class I (strong) recommendation for patients with known cardiovascular disease or a 10-year risk of a cardiovascular event of 10% or higher, with a B-R level of evidence for the systolic goal (ie, moderate-quality, based on systematic review of randomized controlled trials) and a C-EO level of evidence for the diastolic goal (ie, based on expert opinion).

For patients who do not have cardiovascular disease and who are at lower risk of it, this is a class IIb (weak) recommendation, ie, it “may be reasonable,” with a B-NR level of evidence (moderate-quality, based on nonrandomized studies) for the systolic goal and C-EO (expert opinion) for the diastolic goal.

For many patients, this involves drug treatment. For those with known cardiovascular disease or a 10-year risk of an atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease event of 10% or higher, the ACC/AHA guidelines say that drug treatment “is recommended” if their average blood pressure is 130/80 mm Hg or higher (class I recommendation, based on strong evidence for the systolic threshold and expert option for the diastolic). For those without cardiovascular disease and at lower risk, drug treatment is recommended if their average blood pressure is 140/90 mm Hg or higher (also class I, but based on limited data).

EVERYONE AGREES ON LIFESTYLE

Although the guidelines differ in their blood pressure targets, they consistently recommend lifestyle modifications.

Lifestyle modifications, first described in JNC 7, included weight loss, sodium restriction, and the DASH diet, which is rich in fruits, vegetables, low-fat dairy products, whole grains, poultry, and fish, and low in red meat, sweets, cholesterol, and total and saturated fat.2

These recommendations were based on results from 3 large randomized controlled trials in patients with and without hypertension.10–12 In patients with no history of hypertension, interventions to promote weight loss and sodium restriction significantly reduced blood pressure and the incidence of hypertension (the latter by as much as 77%) compared with usual care.10,11

In patients with and without hypertension, lowering sodium intake in conjunction with the DASH diet was associated with substantially larger reductions in systolic blood pressure.12

The recommendation to lower sodium intake has not changed in the guideline revisions. Meanwhile, other modifications have been added, such as incorporating both aerobic and resistance exercise and moderating alcohol intake. These recommendations have a class I level of evidence (ie, strongest level) in the 2017 ACC/AHA guidelines.1

HYPERTENSION BEGINS AT 130/80

The definition of hypertension changed in the 2017 ACC/AHA guidelines1: previously set at 140/90 mm Hg or higher, it is now 130/80 mm Hg or higher for all age groups. Adults with systolic blood pressure of 130 to 139 mm Hg or diastolic blood pressure of 80 to 89 mm Hg are now classified as having stage 1 hypertension.

Under the new definition, the number of US adults who have hypertension expanded to 45.6% of the general population,13 up from 31.9% under the JNC 7 definition. Thus, overall, 103.3 million US adults now have hypertension, compared with 72.2 million under the JNC 7 criteria.

In addition, the new guidelines expanded the population of adults for whom antihypertensive drug treatment is recommended to 36.2% (81.9 million). However, this represents only a 1.9% absolute increase over the JNC 7 recommendations (34.3%) and a 5.1% absolute increase over the JNC 8 recommendations.14

SPRINT: INTENSIVE TREATMENT IS BENEFICIAL

The new ACC/AHA guidelines1 were based on evidence from several trials, including the Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial (SPRINT).15

This multicenter trial investigated the effect of intensive blood pressure treatment on cardiovascular disease risk.16 The primary outcome was a composite of myocardial infarction, acute coronary syndrome, stroke, and heart failure.

The trial enrolled 9,361 participants at least 50 years of age with systolic blood pressure 130 mm Hg or higher and at least 1 additional risk factor for cardiovascular disease. It excluded anyone with a history of diabetes mellitus, stroke, symptomatic heart failure, or end-stage renal disease.

Two interventions were compared: 

  • Intensive treatment, with a systolic blood pressure goal of less than 120 mm Hg: the protocol called for polytherapy, even for participants who were 75 or older if their blood pressure was 140 mm Hg or higher
  • Standard treatment, with a systolic blood pressure goal of less than 140 mm Hg: it used polytherapy for patients whose systolic blood pressure was 160 mm Hg or higher.

The trial was intended to last 5 years but was stopped early at a median of 3.26 years owing to a significantly lower rate of the primary composite outcome in the intensive-treatment group: 1.65% per year vs 2.19%, a 25% relative risk reduction (P < .001) or a 0.54% absolute risk reduction. We calculate the number needed to treat (NNT) for 1 year to prevent 1 event as 185, and over the 3.26 years of the trial, the investigators calculated the NNT as 61. Similarly, the rate of death from any cause was also lower with intensive treatment, 1.03% per year vs 1.40% per year, a 27% relative risk reduction (P = .003) or a 0.37% absolute risk reduction, NNT 270.

Using these findings, Bress et al16 estimated that implementing intensive blood pressure goals could prevent 107,500 deaths annually.

The downside is adverse effects. In SPRINT,15 the intensive-treatment group experienced significantly higher rates of serious adverse effects than the standard-treatment group, ie:

  • Hypotension 2.4% vs 1.4%, P = .001
  • Syncope 2.3% vs 1.7%, P = .05
  • Electrolyte abnormalities 3.1% vs 2.3%, P = .02)
  • Acute kidney injury or kidney failure 4.1% vs 2.5%, P < .001
  • Any treatment-related adverse event 4.7% vs 2.5%, P = .001.

Thus, Bress et al16 estimated that fully implementing the intensive-treatment goals could cause an additional 56,100 episodes of hypotension per year, 34,400 cases of syncope, 43,400 serious electrolyte disorders, and 88,700 cases of acute kidney injury. All told, about 3 million Americans could suffer a serious adverse effect under the intensive-treatment goals.

 

 

SPRINT caveats and limitations

SPRINT15 was stopped early, after 3.26 years instead of the planned 5 years. The true risk-benefit ratio may have been different if the trial had been extended longer.

In addition, SPRINT used automated office blood pressure measurements in which patients were seated alone and a device (Model 907, Omron Healthcare) took 3 blood pressure measurements at 1-minute intervals after 5 minutes of quiet rest. This was designed to reduce elevated blood pressure readings in the presence of a healthcare professional in a medical setting (ie, “white coat” hypertension).

Many physicians are still taking blood pressure manually, which tends to give higher readings. Therefore, if they aim for a lower goal, they may risk overtreating the patient.

About 50% of patients did not achieve the target systolic blood pressure (< 120 mm Hg) despite receiving an average of 2.8 antihypertensive medications in the intensive-treatment group and 1.8 in the standard-treatment group. The use of antihypertensive medications, however, was not a controlled variable in the trial, and practitioners chose the appropriate drugs for their patients.

Diastolic pressure, which can be markedly lower in older hypertensive patients, was largely ignored, although lower diastolic pressure may have contributed to higher syncope rates in response to alpha blockers and calcium blockers.

Moreover, the trial excluded those with significant comorbidities and those younger than 50 (the mean age was 67.9), which limits the generalizability of the results.

JNC 8 VS SPRINT GOALS: WHAT'S THE EFFECT ON OUTCOMES?

JNC 84 recommended a relaxed target of less than 140/90 mm Hg for adults younger than 60, including those with chronic kidney disease or diabetes, and less than 150/90 mm Hg for adults 60 and older. The SPRINT findings upended those recommendations, showing that intensive treatment in adults age 75 or older significantly improved the composite cardiovascular disease outcome (2.59 vs 3.85 events per year; P < .001) and all-cause mortality (1.78 vs 2.63 events per year; P < .05) compared with standard treatment.17 Also, a subset review of SPRINT trial data found no difference in benefit based on chronic kidney disease status.18

A meta-analysis of 74 clinical trials (N = 306,273) offers a compromise between the SPRINT findings and the JNC 8 recommendations.19 It found that the beneficial effect of blood pressure treatment depended on the patient’s baseline systolic blood pressure. In those with a baseline systolic pressure of 160 mm Hg or higher, treatment reduced cardiovascular mortality by about 15% (relative risk [RR] 0.85; 95% confidence interval [CI] 0.77–0.95). In patients with systolic pressure below 140 mm Hg, treatment effects were neutral (RR 1.03, 95% CI 0.87–1.20) and not associated with any benefit as primary prevention, although data suggest it may reduce the risk of adverse outcomes in patients with coronary heart disease.

OTHER TRIALS THAT INFLUENCED THE GUIDELINES

Important clinical trials that influenced revised blood pressure guidelines
SPRINT was important for refining the appropriate targets for blood pressure treatment, but several other trials also influenced the ACC/AHA guidelines (Table 3).20–24

SHEP and HYVET (the Systolic Hypertension in the Elderly Program20 and the Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial)21 supported intensive blood pressure treatment for older patients by reporting a reduction in fatal and nonfatal stroke risks for those with a systolic blood pressure above 160 mm Hg.

FEVER (the Felodipine Event Reduction study)22 found that treatment with a calcium channel blocker in even a low dose can significantly decrease cardiovascular events, cardiovascular disease, and heart failure compared with no treatment.

JATOS and VALISH (the Japanese Trial to Assess Optimal Systolic Blood Pressure in Elderly Hypertensive Patients23 and the Valsartan in Elderly Isolated Systolic Hypertension study)24 found that outcomes were similar with intensive vs standard treatment.

Ettehad et al25 performed a meta-analysis of 123 studies with more than 600,000 participants that provided strong evidence supporting blood pressure treatment goals below 130/90 mm Hg, in line with the SPRINT trial results.

BLOOD PRESSURE ISN’T EVERYTHING

Other trials remind us that although blood pressure is important, it is not the only factor affecting cardiovascular risk.

HOPE (the Heart Outcomes Prevention Evaluation)26 investigated the use of ramipril (an ACE inhibitor) in preventing myocardial infarction, stroke, or cardiovascular death in patients at high risk of cardiovascular events. The study included 9,297 participants over age 55 (mean age 66) with a baseline blood pressure 139/79 mm Hg. Follow-up was 4.5 years.

Ramipril was better than placebo, with significantly fewer patients experiencing adverse end points in the ramipril group compared with the placebo group:

  • Myocardial infarction 9.9% vs 12.3%, RR 0.80, P < .001
  • Cardiovascular death 6.1% vs 8.1%, RR  0.74, P < .001
  • Stroke 3.4% vs 4.9%, RR = .68, P < .001
  • The composite end point 14.0% vs 17.8%, RR 0.78, P < .001).

Results were even better in the subset of patients who had diabetes.27 However, the decrease in blood pressure attributable to anti­hypertensive therapy with ramipril was minimal (3–4 mm Hg systolic and 1–2 mm Hg diastolic). This slight change should not have been enough to produce significant differences in clinical outcomes, a major limitation of this trial. The investigators speculated that the positive results may be due to a class effect of ACE inhibitors.26

HOPE 328–30 explored the effect of blood pressure- and cholesterol-controlling drugs on the same primary end points but in patients at intermediate risk of major cardiovascular events. Investigators randomized the 12,705 patients to 4 treatment groups:

  • Blood pressure control with candesartan (an ARB) plus hydrochlorothiazide (a thiazide diuretic)
  • Cholesterol control with rosuvastatin (a statin)
  • Blood pressure plus cholesterol control
  • Placebo.

Therapy was started at a systolic blood pressure above 140 mm Hg.

Compared with placebo, the rate of composite events was significantly reduced in the rosuvastatin group (3.7% vs 4.8%, HR 0.76, P = .002)28 and the candesartan-hydrochlorothiazide-rosuvastatin group (3.6% vs 5.0%, HR 0.71; P = .005)29 but not in the candesartan-hydrochlorothiazide group (4.1% vs 4.4%; HR 0.93; P = .40).30

In addition, a subgroup analysis comparing active treatment vs placebo found a significant reduction in major cardiovascular events for treated patients whose baseline systolic blood pressure was in the upper third (> 143.5 mm Hg, mean 154.1 mm Hg), while treated patients in the lower middle and lower thirds had no significant reduction.30

These results suggest that intensive treatment to achieve a systolic blood pressure below 140 mm Hg in patients at intermediate risk may not be helpful. Nevertheless, there seems to be agreement that intensive treatment generally leads to a reduction in cardiovascular events. The results also show the benefit of lowering cholesterol.

Bundy et al31 performed a meta-analysis that provides support for intensive antihypertensive treatment. Reviewing 42 clinical trials in more than 144,000 patients, they found that treating to reach a target systolic blood pressure of 120 to 124 mm Hg can reduce cardiovascular events and all-cause mortality.

The trade-off is a minimal increase in the risk of adverse events. Also, the risk-benefit ratio of intensive treatment seems to vary in different patient subgroups.

 

 

WHAT ABOUT PATIENTS WITH COMORBIDITIES?

The debate over intensive vs standard treatment in blood pressure management extends beyond hypertension and includes important comorbidities such as diabetes, stroke, and renal disease. Patients with a history of stroke or end-stage renal disease have only a minimal mention in the AHA/ACC guidelines.

Diabetes

Emdin et al,32 in a meta-analysis of 40 trials that included more than 100,000 patients with diabetes, concluded that a 10-mm Hg lowering of systolic blood pressure significantly reduces the rates of all-cause mortality, cardiovascular disease, coronary heart disease, stroke, albuminuria, and retinopathy. Stratifying the results according to the systolic blood pressure achieved (≥ 130 or < 130 mm Hg), the relative risks of mortality, coronary heart disease, cardiovascular disease, heart failure, and albuminuria were actually lower in the higher stratum than in the lower.

ACCORD (the Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes)33 study provides contrary results. It examined intensive and standard blood pressure control targets in patients with type 2 diabetes at high risk of cardiovascular events, using primary outcome measures similar to those in SPRINT. It found no significant difference in fatal and nonfatal cardiovascular events between the intensive and standard blood pressure target arms.

Despite those results, the ACC/AHA guidelines still advocate for more intensive treatment (goal < 130/80 mm Hg) in all patients, including those with diabetes.1

The ADA position statement (September 2017) recommended a target below 140/90 mm Hg in patients with diabetes and hypertension.8 However, they also noted that lower systolic and diastolic blood pressure targets, such as below 130/80 mm Hg, may be appropriate for patients at high risk of cardiovascular disease “if they can be achieved without undue treatment burden.”8 Thus, it is not clear which blood pressure targets in patients with diabetes are the best.

Stroke

In patients with stroke, AHA/ACC guidelines1 recommend treatment if the blood pressure is 140/90 mm Hg or higher because antihypertensive therapy has been associated with a decrease in the recurrence of transient ischemic attack and stroke. The ideal target blood pressure is not known, but a goal of less than 130/80 mm Hg may be reasonable.

In the Secondary Prevention of Small Subcortical Strokes (SPS3) trial, a retrospective open-label trial, a target blood pressure below 130/80 mm Hg in patients with a history of lacunar stroke was associated with a lower risk of intracranial hemorrhage, but the difference was not statistically significant.34 For this reason, the ACC/AHA guidelines consider it reasonable to aim for a systolic blood pressure below 130 mm Hg in these patients.1

Renal disease

The ACC/AHA guidelines do not address how to manage hypertension in patients with end-stage renal disease, but for patients with chronic kidney disease they recommend a blood pressure target below 130/80 mm Hg.1 This recommendation is derived from the SPRINT trial,15 in which patients with stage 3 or 4 chronic kidney disease accounted for 28% of the study population. In that subgroup, intensive blood pressure control seemed to provide the same benefits for reduction in cardiovascular death and all-cause mortality.

TREAT PATIENTS, NOT NUMBERS

Blood pressure targets should be applied in the appropriate clinical context and on a patient-by-patient basis. In clinical practice, one size does not always fit all, as special cases exist.

For example, blood pressure can oscillate widely in patients with autonomic nerve disorders, making it difficult to strive for a specific target, especially an intensive one. Thus, it may be necessary to allow higher systolic blood pressure in these patients. Similarly, patients with diabetes or chronic kidney disease may be at higher risk of kidney injury with more intensive blood pressure management.

Treating numbers rather than patients may result in unbalanced patient care. The optimal approach to blood pressure management relies on a comprehensive risk factor assessment and shared decision-making with the patient before setting specific blood pressure targets.

OUR APPROACH

We aim for a blood pressure goal below 130/80 mm Hg for all patients with cardiovascular disease, according to the AHA/ACC guidelines. We aim for that same target in patients without cardiovascular disease but who have an elevated estimated cardiovascular risk (> 10%) over the next 10 years.

We recognize, however, that the benefits of aggressive blood pressure reduction may not be as clear in all patients, such as those with diabetes. We also recognize that some patient subgroups are at high risk of adverse events, including those with low diastolic pressure, chronic kidney disease, a history of falls, and older age. In those patients, we are extremely judicious when titrating antihypertensive medications. We often make smaller titrations, at longer intervals, and with more frequent laboratory testing and in-office follow-up.

Our process of managing hypertension through intensive blood pressure control to achieve lower systolic blood pressure targets requires a concerted effort among healthcare providers at all levels. It especially requires more involvement and investment from primary care providers to individualize treatment in their patients. This process has helped us to reach our treatment goals while limiting adverse effects of lower blood pressure targets.

MOVING FORWARD

Hypertension is a major risk factor for cardiovascular disease, and intensive blood pressure control has the potential to significantly reduce rates of morbidity and death associated with cardiovascular disease. Thus, a general consensus on the definition of hypertension and treatment goals is essential to reduce the risk of cardiovascular events in this large patient population.

Intensive blood pressure treatment has shown efficacy, but it has a small accompanying risk of adverse events, which varies in patient subgroups and affects the benefit-risk ratio of this therapy. For example, the cardiovascular benefit of intensive treatment is less clear in diabetic patients, and the risk of adverse events may be higher in older patients with chronic kidney disease.

Moving forward, more research is needed into the effects of intensive and standard treatment on patients of all ages, those with common comorbid conditions, and those with other important factors such as diastolic hypertension.

Finally, the various medical societies should collaborate on hypertension guideline development. This would require considerable planning and coordination but would ultimately be useful in creating a generalizable approach to hypertension management.

References
  1. Whelton PK, Carey RM, Aronow WS, et al. 2017 ACC/AHA/AAPA/ABC/ACPM/AGS/APhA/ASH/ASPC/NMA/PCNA guideline for the prevention, detection, evaluation, and management of high blood pressure in adults: a report of the American College of Cardiology/American Heart Association Task Force on Clinical Practice Guidelines. J Am Coll Cardiol 2018; 71(19):e127–e248. doi:10.1016/j.jacc.2017.11.006
  2. Chobanian AV, Bakris GL, Black HR, et al. The seventh report of the Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure: the JNC 7 report. JAMA 2003; 289(19):2560–2572. doi:10.1001/jama.289.19.2560
  3. Go AS, Bauman MA, King SM, et al. An effective approach to high blood pressure control: a science advisory from the American Heart Association, the American College of Cardiology, and the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Hypertension 2014; 63(4):878–885. doi:10.1161/HYP.0000000000000003
  4. James PA, Oparil S, Carter BL, et al. 2014 evidence-based guideline for the management of high blood pressure in adults: report from the panel members appointed to the Eighth Joint National Committee (JNC 8). JAMA 2014; 311(5):507–520. doi:10.1001/jama.2013.284427
  5. Wright JT Jr, Fine LJ, Lackland DT, Ogedegbe G, Dennison Himmelfarb CR. Evidence supporting a systolic blood pressure goal of less than 150 mm Hg in patients aged 60 years or older: the minority view. Ann Intern Med 2014; 160(7):499–503. doi:10.7326/M13-2981
  6. Weber MA, Schiffrin EL, White WB, et al. Notice of duplicate publication [duplicate publication of Weber MA, Schiffrin EL, White WB, et al. Clinical practice guidelines for the management of hypertension in the community: a statement by the American Society of Hypertension and the International Society of Hypertension. J Clin Hypertens 2014; 16(1):14–26. doi:10.1111/jch.12237] J Hypertens 2014; 32(1):3–15. doi:10.1097/HJH.0000000000000065 
  7. Rosendorff C, Lackland DT, Allison M, et al. Treatment of hypertension in patients with coronary artery disease: a scientific statement from the American Heart Association, American College of Cardiology, and American Society of Hypertension. J Am Soc Hypertens 2015; 9(6):453–498. doi:10.1016/j.jash.2015.03.002
  8. de Boer IH, Bangalore S, Benetos A, et al. Diabetes and hypertension: a position statement by the American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Care 2017; 40(9):1273–1284. doi:10.2337/dci17-0026
  9. Qaseem A, Wilt TJ, Rich R, Humphrey LL, Frost J, Forciea MA. Pharmacologic treatment of hypertension in adults aged 60 years or older to higher versus lower blood pressure targets: a clinical practice guideline from the American College of Physicians and the American Academy of Family Physicians. Ann Intern Med 2017; 166(6):430–437. doi:10.7326/M16-1785
  10. The Trials of Hypertension Prevention Collaborative Research Group. Effects of weight loss and sodium reduction intervention on blood pressure and hypertension incidence in over-weight people with high normal blood pressure: the Trials of Hypertension Prevention, phase II. Arch Intern Med 1997; 157(6):657–667. pmid:9080920
  11. He J, Whelton PK, Appel LJ, Charleston J, Klag MJ. Long-term effects of weight loss and dietary sodium reduction on incidence of hypertension. Hypertension 2000; 35(2):544–549. pmid:10679495
  12. Sacks FM, Svetkey LP, Vollmer WM, et al. Effects on blood pressure of reduced dietary sodium and the Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension (DASH) diet. N Engl J Med 2001; 344(1):3–10. doi:10.1056/NEJM200101043440101
  13. Blackwell DL, Lucas JW, Clarke TC. Summary health statistics for US adults: National Health Interview Survey, 2012. National Center for Health Statistics. Vital Health Stat 10; 2014(260):1–161. pmid:24819891
  14. Muntner P, Carey RM, Gidding S, et al. Potential US population impact of the 2017 ACC/AHA high blood pressure guideline. J Am Coll Cardiol 2018; 71(2):109–118. doi:10.1016/j.jacc.2017.10.073
  15. SPRINT Research Group; Wright JT Jr, Williamson JD, Whelton PK, et al. A randomized trial of intensive versus standard blood-pressure control. N Engl J Med 2015; 373(22):2103–2116. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1511939
  16. Bress AP, Kramer H, Khatib R, et al. Potential deaths averted and serious adverse events incurred from adoption of the SPRINT (Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial) intensive blood pressure regimen in the United States: Projections from NHANES (National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey). Circulation 2017; 135(17):1617–1628. doi:10.1161/CIRCULATIONAHA.116.025322
  17. Williamson JD, Supiano MA, Applegate WB, et al. Intensive vs standard blood pressure control and cardiovascular disease outcomes in adults aged ≥ 75 years: a randomized clinical trial. JAMA 2016; 315(24):2673–2682. doi:10.1001/jama.2016.7050
  18. Beddhu S, Rocco MV, Toto R, et al. Effects of intensive systolic blood pressure control on kidney and cardiovascular outcomes in persons without kidney disease: a secondary analysis of a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2017; 167(6):375–383. doi:10.7326/M16-2966
  19. Brunström M, Carlberg B. Association of blood pressure lowering with mortality and cardiovascular disease across blood pressure levels: a systematic review and meta-analysis. JAMA Intern Med 2018; 178(1):28–36. doi:10.1001/jamainternmed.2017.6015
  20. Prevention of stroke by antihypertensive drug treatment in older persons with isolated systolic hypertension. Final results of the Systolic Hypertension in the Elderly Program (SHEP). SHEP Cooperative Research Group. JAMA 1991; 265(24):3255–3264. pmid:2046107
  21. Bulpitt CJ, Beckett NS, Cooke J, et al. Results of the pilot study for the Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial. J Hypertens 2003; 21(12):2409–2417. doi:10.1097/01.hjh.0000084782.15238.a2
  22. Liu L, Zhang Y, Liu G, et al. The Felodipine Event Reduction (FEVER) study: a randomized long-term placebo-controlled trial in Chinese hypertensive patients. J Hypertens 2005; 23(12):2157–2172. pmid:16269957
  23. JATOS Study Group. Principal results of the Japanese trial to assess optimal systolic blood pressure in elderly hypertensive patients (JATOS). Hypertens Res 2008; 31(12):2115–2127. doi:10.1291/hypres.31.2115
  24. Ogihara T, Saruta T, Rakugi H, et al. Target blood pressure for treatment of isolated systolic hypertension in the elderly: valsartan in elderly isolated systolic hypertension study. Hypertension 2010; 56(2):196–202. doi:10.1161/HYPERTENSIONAHA.109.146035
  25. Ettehad D, Emdin CA, Kiran A, et al. Blood pressure lowering for prevention of cardiovascular disease and death: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Lancet 2016; 387(10022):957–967. doi:10.1016/S0140-6736(15)01225-8
  26. Sleight P. The HOPE study (Heart Outcomes Prevention Evaluation). J Renin Angiotensin Aldosterone Syst 2000; 1(1):18–20. doi:10.3317/jraas.2000.002
  27. Effects of ramipril on cardiovascular and microvascular outcomes in people with diabetes mellitus: results of the HOPE study and MICRO-HOPE substudy. Heart Outcomes Prevention Evaluation Study Investigators. Lancet 2000; 355(9200):253–259. pmid:10675071
  28. Yusuf S, Bosch J, Dagenais G, et al. Cholesterol lowering in intermediate-risk persons without cardiovascular disease. N Engl J Med 2016; 374(21):2021–2031. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1600176
  29. Yusuf S, Lonn E, Pais P, et al. Blood-pressure and cholesterol lowering in persons without cardiovascular disease. N Engl J Med 2016; 374(21):2032–2043. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1600177
  30. Lonn EM, Bosch J, López-Jaramillo P, et al. Blood-pressure lowering in intermediate-risk persons without cardiovascular disease. N Engl J Med 2016; 374(21):2009–2020. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1600175
  31. Bundy JD, Li C, Stuchlik P, et al. Systolic blood pressure reduction and risk of cardiovascular disease and mortality: a systematic review and network meta-analysis. JAMA Cardiol 2017; 2(7):775–781. doi:10.1001/jamacardio.2017.1421
  32. Emdin CA, Rahimi K, Neal B, Callender T, Perkovic V, Patel A. Blood pressure lowering in type 2 diabetes: a systematic review and meta-analysis. JAMA 2015; 313(6):603–615. doi:10.1001/jama.2014.18574
  33. ACCORD Study Group; Cushman WC, Evans GW, Byington RP, et al. Effects of intensive blood-pressure control in type 2 diabetes mellitus. N Engl J Med 2010; 362(17):1575–1585. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1001286
  34. SPS3 Study Group; Benavente OR, Coffey CS, Conwit R, et al. Blood-pressure targets in patients with recent lacunar stroke: the SPS3 randomised trial. Lancet 2013; 382(9891):507–515. doi:10.1016/S0140-6736(13)60852-1
References
  1. Whelton PK, Carey RM, Aronow WS, et al. 2017 ACC/AHA/AAPA/ABC/ACPM/AGS/APhA/ASH/ASPC/NMA/PCNA guideline for the prevention, detection, evaluation, and management of high blood pressure in adults: a report of the American College of Cardiology/American Heart Association Task Force on Clinical Practice Guidelines. J Am Coll Cardiol 2018; 71(19):e127–e248. doi:10.1016/j.jacc.2017.11.006
  2. Chobanian AV, Bakris GL, Black HR, et al. The seventh report of the Joint National Committee on Prevention, Detection, Evaluation, and Treatment of High Blood Pressure: the JNC 7 report. JAMA 2003; 289(19):2560–2572. doi:10.1001/jama.289.19.2560
  3. Go AS, Bauman MA, King SM, et al. An effective approach to high blood pressure control: a science advisory from the American Heart Association, the American College of Cardiology, and the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Hypertension 2014; 63(4):878–885. doi:10.1161/HYP.0000000000000003
  4. James PA, Oparil S, Carter BL, et al. 2014 evidence-based guideline for the management of high blood pressure in adults: report from the panel members appointed to the Eighth Joint National Committee (JNC 8). JAMA 2014; 311(5):507–520. doi:10.1001/jama.2013.284427
  5. Wright JT Jr, Fine LJ, Lackland DT, Ogedegbe G, Dennison Himmelfarb CR. Evidence supporting a systolic blood pressure goal of less than 150 mm Hg in patients aged 60 years or older: the minority view. Ann Intern Med 2014; 160(7):499–503. doi:10.7326/M13-2981
  6. Weber MA, Schiffrin EL, White WB, et al. Notice of duplicate publication [duplicate publication of Weber MA, Schiffrin EL, White WB, et al. Clinical practice guidelines for the management of hypertension in the community: a statement by the American Society of Hypertension and the International Society of Hypertension. J Clin Hypertens 2014; 16(1):14–26. doi:10.1111/jch.12237] J Hypertens 2014; 32(1):3–15. doi:10.1097/HJH.0000000000000065 
  7. Rosendorff C, Lackland DT, Allison M, et al. Treatment of hypertension in patients with coronary artery disease: a scientific statement from the American Heart Association, American College of Cardiology, and American Society of Hypertension. J Am Soc Hypertens 2015; 9(6):453–498. doi:10.1016/j.jash.2015.03.002
  8. de Boer IH, Bangalore S, Benetos A, et al. Diabetes and hypertension: a position statement by the American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Care 2017; 40(9):1273–1284. doi:10.2337/dci17-0026
  9. Qaseem A, Wilt TJ, Rich R, Humphrey LL, Frost J, Forciea MA. Pharmacologic treatment of hypertension in adults aged 60 years or older to higher versus lower blood pressure targets: a clinical practice guideline from the American College of Physicians and the American Academy of Family Physicians. Ann Intern Med 2017; 166(6):430–437. doi:10.7326/M16-1785
  10. The Trials of Hypertension Prevention Collaborative Research Group. Effects of weight loss and sodium reduction intervention on blood pressure and hypertension incidence in over-weight people with high normal blood pressure: the Trials of Hypertension Prevention, phase II. Arch Intern Med 1997; 157(6):657–667. pmid:9080920
  11. He J, Whelton PK, Appel LJ, Charleston J, Klag MJ. Long-term effects of weight loss and dietary sodium reduction on incidence of hypertension. Hypertension 2000; 35(2):544–549. pmid:10679495
  12. Sacks FM, Svetkey LP, Vollmer WM, et al. Effects on blood pressure of reduced dietary sodium and the Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension (DASH) diet. N Engl J Med 2001; 344(1):3–10. doi:10.1056/NEJM200101043440101
  13. Blackwell DL, Lucas JW, Clarke TC. Summary health statistics for US adults: National Health Interview Survey, 2012. National Center for Health Statistics. Vital Health Stat 10; 2014(260):1–161. pmid:24819891
  14. Muntner P, Carey RM, Gidding S, et al. Potential US population impact of the 2017 ACC/AHA high blood pressure guideline. J Am Coll Cardiol 2018; 71(2):109–118. doi:10.1016/j.jacc.2017.10.073
  15. SPRINT Research Group; Wright JT Jr, Williamson JD, Whelton PK, et al. A randomized trial of intensive versus standard blood-pressure control. N Engl J Med 2015; 373(22):2103–2116. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1511939
  16. Bress AP, Kramer H, Khatib R, et al. Potential deaths averted and serious adverse events incurred from adoption of the SPRINT (Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial) intensive blood pressure regimen in the United States: Projections from NHANES (National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey). Circulation 2017; 135(17):1617–1628. doi:10.1161/CIRCULATIONAHA.116.025322
  17. Williamson JD, Supiano MA, Applegate WB, et al. Intensive vs standard blood pressure control and cardiovascular disease outcomes in adults aged ≥ 75 years: a randomized clinical trial. JAMA 2016; 315(24):2673–2682. doi:10.1001/jama.2016.7050
  18. Beddhu S, Rocco MV, Toto R, et al. Effects of intensive systolic blood pressure control on kidney and cardiovascular outcomes in persons without kidney disease: a secondary analysis of a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2017; 167(6):375–383. doi:10.7326/M16-2966
  19. Brunström M, Carlberg B. Association of blood pressure lowering with mortality and cardiovascular disease across blood pressure levels: a systematic review and meta-analysis. JAMA Intern Med 2018; 178(1):28–36. doi:10.1001/jamainternmed.2017.6015
  20. Prevention of stroke by antihypertensive drug treatment in older persons with isolated systolic hypertension. Final results of the Systolic Hypertension in the Elderly Program (SHEP). SHEP Cooperative Research Group. JAMA 1991; 265(24):3255–3264. pmid:2046107
  21. Bulpitt CJ, Beckett NS, Cooke J, et al. Results of the pilot study for the Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial. J Hypertens 2003; 21(12):2409–2417. doi:10.1097/01.hjh.0000084782.15238.a2
  22. Liu L, Zhang Y, Liu G, et al. The Felodipine Event Reduction (FEVER) study: a randomized long-term placebo-controlled trial in Chinese hypertensive patients. J Hypertens 2005; 23(12):2157–2172. pmid:16269957
  23. JATOS Study Group. Principal results of the Japanese trial to assess optimal systolic blood pressure in elderly hypertensive patients (JATOS). Hypertens Res 2008; 31(12):2115–2127. doi:10.1291/hypres.31.2115
  24. Ogihara T, Saruta T, Rakugi H, et al. Target blood pressure for treatment of isolated systolic hypertension in the elderly: valsartan in elderly isolated systolic hypertension study. Hypertension 2010; 56(2):196–202. doi:10.1161/HYPERTENSIONAHA.109.146035
  25. Ettehad D, Emdin CA, Kiran A, et al. Blood pressure lowering for prevention of cardiovascular disease and death: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Lancet 2016; 387(10022):957–967. doi:10.1016/S0140-6736(15)01225-8
  26. Sleight P. The HOPE study (Heart Outcomes Prevention Evaluation). J Renin Angiotensin Aldosterone Syst 2000; 1(1):18–20. doi:10.3317/jraas.2000.002
  27. Effects of ramipril on cardiovascular and microvascular outcomes in people with diabetes mellitus: results of the HOPE study and MICRO-HOPE substudy. Heart Outcomes Prevention Evaluation Study Investigators. Lancet 2000; 355(9200):253–259. pmid:10675071
  28. Yusuf S, Bosch J, Dagenais G, et al. Cholesterol lowering in intermediate-risk persons without cardiovascular disease. N Engl J Med 2016; 374(21):2021–2031. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1600176
  29. Yusuf S, Lonn E, Pais P, et al. Blood-pressure and cholesterol lowering in persons without cardiovascular disease. N Engl J Med 2016; 374(21):2032–2043. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1600177
  30. Lonn EM, Bosch J, López-Jaramillo P, et al. Blood-pressure lowering in intermediate-risk persons without cardiovascular disease. N Engl J Med 2016; 374(21):2009–2020. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1600175
  31. Bundy JD, Li C, Stuchlik P, et al. Systolic blood pressure reduction and risk of cardiovascular disease and mortality: a systematic review and network meta-analysis. JAMA Cardiol 2017; 2(7):775–781. doi:10.1001/jamacardio.2017.1421
  32. Emdin CA, Rahimi K, Neal B, Callender T, Perkovic V, Patel A. Blood pressure lowering in type 2 diabetes: a systematic review and meta-analysis. JAMA 2015; 313(6):603–615. doi:10.1001/jama.2014.18574
  33. ACCORD Study Group; Cushman WC, Evans GW, Byington RP, et al. Effects of intensive blood-pressure control in type 2 diabetes mellitus. N Engl J Med 2010; 362(17):1575–1585. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1001286
  34. SPS3 Study Group; Benavente OR, Coffey CS, Conwit R, et al. Blood-pressure targets in patients with recent lacunar stroke: the SPS3 randomised trial. Lancet 2013; 382(9891):507–515. doi:10.1016/S0140-6736(13)60852-1
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Page Number
47-56
Page Number
47-56
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Hypertension guidelines: Treat patients, not numbers
Display Headline
Hypertension guidelines: Treat patients, not numbers
Legacy Keywords
hypertension, high blood pressure, guidelines, American College of Cardiology, American Heart Association, 130/80, goals, target, Joint National Committee, JNC 7, JNC 8, Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial, SPRINT, Felodipine Event Reduction Study, FEVER, Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial, HYVET, Japanese Trial to Assess Optimal Systolic Blood Pressure in Elderly Hypertensive Patients, JATOS, Systolic Hypertension in the Elderly Program, SHEP, Valsartan in Elderly Isolated Systolic Hypertension Study, VALISH, ACCORD, Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes, Wesam Aleyadeh, Erika Hutt-Centeno, Nishant Shah
Legacy Keywords
hypertension, high blood pressure, guidelines, American College of Cardiology, American Heart Association, 130/80, goals, target, Joint National Committee, JNC 7, JNC 8, Systolic Blood Pressure Intervention Trial, SPRINT, Felodipine Event Reduction Study, FEVER, Hypertension in the Very Elderly Trial, HYVET, Japanese Trial to Assess Optimal Systolic Blood Pressure in Elderly Hypertensive Patients, JATOS, Systolic Hypertension in the Elderly Program, SHEP, Valsartan in Elderly Isolated Systolic Hypertension Study, VALISH, ACCORD, Action to Control Cardiovascular Risk in Diabetes, Wesam Aleyadeh, Erika Hutt-Centeno, Nishant Shah
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • The 2017 ACC/AHA guidelines lowered the definition of hypertension to 130/80 mm Hg or higher, thereby in-creasing the number of US adults with hypertension from 31.9% to 45.6%.
  • For patients with known cardiovascular disease or a 10-year risk of an atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease event of 10% or higher, drug treatment “is recommended” if the average blood pressure is 130/80 mm Hg or higher. For those without cardiovascular disease and at lower risk, drug treatment is recommended if the aver-age blood pressure is 140/90 mm Hg or higher.
  • A treatment goal of less than 130/80 mm Hg “is recommended” for patients with hypertension and known car-diovascular disease or a 10-year risk of an atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease event of 10% or higher, and “may be reasonable” for those without additional markers of increased cardiovascular risk.
  • Intensive blood pressure control has the potential to significantly reduce rates of morbidity and death associated with cardiovascular disease, at the price of causing more adverse effects.
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Fri, 12/28/2018 - 12:15
Un-Gate On Date
Fri, 12/28/2018 - 12:15
Use ProPublica
CFC Schedule Remove Status
Fri, 12/28/2018 - 12:15
Hide sidebar & use full width
render the right sidebar.
Article PDF Media

Common benign breast concerns for the primary care physician

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 01/03/2019 - 09:37
Display Headline
Common benign breast concerns for the primary care physician

Breast concerns account for approximately 3% of all female visits to a primary care practice.1 The most common symptoms are breast lumps and breast pain.

Benign causes of common breast symptoms

Because breast cancer is the most common malignancy in women in the United States, affecting nearly 1 in 8 women in their lifetime, women with breast problems often fear the worst. However, only about 3.5% of women reporting a concern have cancer; most problems are benign (Table 1).1

Here, we present an evidence-based review of common breast problems in primary care practice and discuss how to evaluate and manage them.

GENERAL APPROACH

The evaluation of a breast concern requires a systematic approach, beginning with a history that documents the onset, severity, and frequency of symptoms. If the concern is a lump or mass, ask whether it becomes more tender or increases in size at any point during the menstrual cycle.

Focus the physical examination on the cervical, supraclavicular, infraclavicular, and axillary lymph nodes and on the breast itself. Assess breast symmetry, note any skin changes such as dimpling, and check the nipples for discharge and inversion. Palpate the breasts for masses.

PALPABLE BREAST MASS: IMAGING NEEDED

If a mass is present, it is more likely to be malignant if any of the following is true:

  • Firm to hard texture or indistinct margins
  • Attached to the underlying deep fascia or skin
  • Associated nipple inversion or skin dimpling.2

Breast masses are more likely benign if they have discrete, well-defined margins, are mobile with a soft to rubbery consistency, and change with the menstrual cycle. However, clinical features are unreliable indicators of cause, and thus additional investigation with breast imaging is warranted.

Mammography remains the diagnostic test of choice for all women age 30 or older who have a palpable breast mass. It is less effective in younger women because they are more likely to have extremely dense fibroglandular tissue that will limit its sensitivity to imaging.

Order diagnostic mammography, which includes additional views focused on the area of concern, rather than screening mammography, which includes only standard cranio­caudal and mediolateral oblique views. A skin marker should be applied over the palpable lump to aid imaging. Because a breast that contains a mass may be denser than the opposite breast or may show asymmetry, both breasts should be imaged. The sensitivity of diagnostic mammography varies from 85% to 90%, so a negative mammogram does not rule out malignancy.2,3

Targeted ultrasonography of the palpable mass helps identify solid masses such as fibroadenomas or malignant tumors, classifies the margins (lobulated, smooth, or irregular), and assesses vascularity. Ultrasonography is particularly useful for characterizing cystic lesions (eg, simple, septated, or clustered cysts) and cysts with internal echoes. It can also identify lipomas or sebaceous cysts.

If the findings on both mammography and ultrasonography are benign, the likelihood of cancer is very low, with an estimated negative predictive value of 97% to 100%.2,3 Additionally, the likelihood of nonmalignant findings on biopsy after benign imaging is approximately 99%.3

Although radiologic imaging can define palpable masses, it is intended as a clinical aid. Suspicious findings on clinical examination should never be ignored even if findings on imaging are reassuring, as studies have documented that about 5% of breast cancers may be detected on clinical breast examination alone.4

Other imaging tests such as magnetic resonance imaging may be considered occasionally if clinical suspicion remains high after negative mammography and ultrasonography, but they cannot confirm a diagnosis of malignancy. In that case, refer the patient to a surgeon for consideration of excisional biopsy.

Patients with an indeterminate lesion can return in 3 to 12 weeks for a follow-up examination and repeat imaging, which helps assess interval clinical stability. The latter option is especially helpful for patients with masses that are of low suspicion or for patients who prefer to avoid invasive tissue biopsy.

Patients with clinical and radiologic findings that suggest a benign cause can return for short-term follow-up in 6 months or in 12 months for their regular mammogram.

 

 

BREAST PAIN: RARELY MALIGNANT

More than 50% of women experience breast pain at some point in their life.5 Of these, 35% report that the pain adversely affects their sleep, and 41% note that the pain detrimentally affects their sexual quality of life. Up to 66% of breast pain correlates directly with the patient’s menstrual cycle.5 Breast pain is rarely associated with malignancy.

Regardless of its severity and the low likelihood of malignancy, breast pain can be a significant source of distress for the patient, primarily because of concerns about underlying malignancy. If the patient has a focal area of pain on examination, order mammography in combination with targeted ultrasonography. The sensitivity and negative predictive value of benign findings on combination mammography and ultrasonography in this setting are as high as 100%. The incidence of underlying cancer in patients with focal breast pain and no palpable mass is approximately 1.2%.6

The long-term prognosis in women with diffuse, often bilateral breast pain (in the absence of additional clinical findings) is excellent. In one study, the incidence of a breast cancer diagnosis was 1.8% after a median of 51 months of follow-up.7 Therefore, patients presenting with diffuse pain, no palpable abnormalities, and benign imaging can be safely reassured. Magnetic resonance imaging is rarely indicated in patients with breast pain unless other clinical findings, such as a mass or skin changes, are noted and the results of mammography and ultrasonography are negative.

Treating breast pain

Treating breast pain remains a challenge. The first step is to reassure the patient about her prognosis and help her make appropriate lifestyle modifications.

A well-fitting bra. Suggest getting a professional bra fitting. Wearing a well-fitted bra that offers lift, support, and compression and reduces excess motion can help improve benign breast pain. A bra fitting is especially important for women with large breasts because it can be difficult for these women to get an accurate size. Wearing a lightly fitted bra at night may also provide comfort if there is nighttime pain with breast tissue movement.

Reducing daily caffeine intake is often advised for pain management, but strong evidence of its efficacy is lacking.

Anti-inflammatory drugs can be beneficial if used short-term, especially if costochondritis is suspected.

Danazol improves pain in more than 70% of patients with cyclical symptoms and in up to 48% of those with noncyclical symptoms.

Bromocriptine is effective in up to 54% of those with cyclical symptoms and in up to 33% of those with noncyclical symptoms.8 However, the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) withdrew approval for this indication because of adverse effects.

Tamoxifen, in contrast, provides relief in 94% of those with cyclical symptoms and in 56% of those with noncyclical symptoms.9

Adverse effects, however, limit the use of danazol, bromocriptine, and tamoxifen, and they should be prescribed only for short-term use (3 to 6 months) and only in women with chronic debilitating pain.

A few small studies have evaluated alternative options.

Toremifene is a triphenylethylene derivative similar to tamoxifen that is also used in the adjuvant treatment of postmenopausal breast cancer (but with fewer adverse effects). It has been documented to have a significant effect on premenstrual breast pain, with a 64% reduction in breast pain scores compared with a 26% reduction with placebo.10 However, the FDA has not approved it for this indication, and it can be cost-prohibitive.

Over-the-counter medications that may provide relief for cyclic breast pain include vitamin E or B6, products containing oil of Vitex agnus castus (chaste tree or chasteberry), and flaxseed.11,12

Acupuncture has been evaluated in patients with noncyclic breast pain and was found to reduce pain by 56% to 67% in one study,13 although it did not affect quality of life.

NIPPLE DISCHARGE

From 5% to 7% of women seek medical attention for nipple discharge.14,15 Breast cancer is found in 5% to 15% of women who undergo surgery for nipple discharge.16,17

Review the patient’s current medications and inquire about health conditions such as thyroid dysfunction or visual field changes that suggest a pituitary mass (which can lead to nipple discharge by causing hormonal dysregulation or hyperprolactinemia).

Palpate the breasts for an underlying mass, look for lesions on the nipple, and assess the color of the fluid. Also note whether there is discharge from one or both breasts, whether it is spontaneous or expressive, and whether it occurs from a single or multiple ducts. Nipple lesions may require further testing with punch biopsy.

Nonlactational nipple discharge is classified as physiologic or pathologic. Physiologic nipple discharge is typically bilateral, involving multiple ducts, and is often clear or straw-colored but may also be green, gray, or brown.

White, opaque fluid is often related to galactorrhea as a result of hyperprolactinemia, hypothyroidism, or medications such as antipsychotic drugs (eg, haloperidol and fluphenazine) and gastrointestinal motility agents such as metoclopramide. Discharge also commonly results from benign underlying ductal abnormalities such as intraductal papilloma, periductal mastitis, and duct ectasia.

Pathologic nipple discharge is often unilateral and persistent, occurring spontaneously from a solitary duct, and may be bloody or serous.

For women with pathologic nipple discharge who are 30 or older, diagnostic imaging with mammography and subareolar ultrasonography is recommended. If the patient is younger than 30, ultrasonography of the subareolar region alone can be used. Targeted ultrasonography of any palpable area is also advised.

Cytologic assessment of the fluid is not recommended because it can often lead to a false-positive finding of atypical cells. Imaging studies such as ductography, duct lavage, ductoscopy, and magnetic resonance imaging are also generally unnecessary; instead, a persistent clinical concern should prompt a surgical referral for consideration of duct excision.

When a patient has pathologic nipple discharge with a negative physical examination and breast imaging, studies have shown that the risk of cancer is 3% or less.18

Patients with spontaneous bloody or serous single-duct discharge with negative results on mammography and ultrasonography should be reassured that they have a low risk of underlying cancer. If the patient prefers, one approachto management is follow-up mammography and ultrasonography at 6 months and clinical examination for up to 2 years or until the discharge resolves on its own.

On the other hand, if the discharge is distressing to the patient, subareolar duct excision can be performed with both a diagnostic and therapeutic purpose.

 

 

NIPPLE-AREOLAR RASH: CONSIDER PAGET DISEASE

A rash on the nipple or areolar region warrants careful evaluation because it may be the first sign of Paget disease of the breast.

In the clinical breast examination, assess the extent of the rash and the presence of any underlying breast mass or nipple discharge. Dermatitis often starts on the areola and resolves quickly with topical therapy. However, Paget disease tends to start directly on the nipple itself, is unresponsive or only partially responsive to topical therapy, and progresses gradually, leading to erosions and ultimately effacement of the nipple itself.

If the clinical examination suggests mild dermatitis and the results of breast imaging are negative, treat the patient with a topical medication because benign conditions such as dermatitis and eczema are common. However, continued follow-up is mandatory until the rash completely resolves: Paget disease sometimes initially improves with topical therapy due to its inflammatory nature.

If you suspect Paget disease or the rash does not fully resolve after 2 to 3 weeks of topical therapy, refer the patient to a dermatologist for full-thickness punch biopsy to establish the diagnosis.

Paget disease of the breast may or may not be associated with underlying ductal carcinoma in situ or invasive breast cancer.19 The absence of clinical or imaging abnormalities in a patient with Paget disease does not rule out underlying malignancy.20

DENSE BREASTS

BI-RADS breast density categories
From 35% to 50% of all women have dense breast tissue.21,22 Breast density is defined as the ratio of stromal and glandular tissues (which appear radio-opaque on mammography) to radiolucent fat. The Breast Imaging Reporting and Data System (BI-RADS), fifth edition, recognizes 4 categories of density, designated A through D (Table 2 and Figure 1).23        

Breast density categories
Figure 1.
Nearly 80% of women fall into category B (scattered areas of fibroglandular density) and category C (heterogeneously dense), with significant interreader variation. One study showed that 13% to 19% of women were reclassified from dense to nondense or vice versa on subsequent mammograms.22

Increased breast density has been shown to be a risk factor for breast cancer and may be prognostically useful when combined with the Tyrer-Cuzick model or the Gail model of breast cancer risk.24

Additionally, increased density can mask cancers on mammography, significantly reducing its sensitivity. In women with heterogeneously or extremely dense breasts, the sensitivity of mammography for detecting cancer is only 25% to 50%.21 Due to this low sensitivity, supplemental imaging is helpful, particularly in women already at risk of breast cancer based on family history.

Supplemental screening

Digital mammography with tomosynthesis was approved by the FDA in 2011 for use in combination with standard digital mammography for breast cancer screening. Compared with traditional 2-dimensional mammography alone, adding 3-D tomosynthesis decreases the recall rate and increases the cancer detection rate.25

Tomosynthesis tends to perform better in women with heterogeneously dense breasts (BI-RADS category C). There is no significant improvement in cancer detection in women with extremely dense breasts (BI-RADS category D).26

Depending on the methodology, radiation exposure can be either higher or lower than with traditional mammography. However, in all forms, the very small amount of radiation is considered safe.

Whole breast ultrasonography. When whole breast ultrasonography is used to supplement mammography, the recall rate is higher than when mammography is used alone (14% vs 7%–11%).22 It also increases the cancer detection rate by 4.4 additional cancers per 1,000 examinations. However, the false-positive rate with whole breast ultrasonography is higher; the positive predictive value of combined mammography and ultrasonography is 11.2% vs 22.6% for mammography alone.22 Therefore, we do not generally recommend whole breast ultrasonography as a supplement to mammography in women with dense breast tissue unless other studies are not an option.

Molecular breast imaging is not widely available because it requires special equipment, injection of a radiopharamceutical (technetium Tc 99m sestamibi), and a radiologist who specializes in breast imaging to interpret the results. When it is available, however, it increases the cancer detection rate by 8.8 in 1,000 examinations; the positive predictive value is similar to that of screening mammography alone.21 It is particularly useful in patients with dense breasts who do not qualify for screening magnetic resonance imaging (lifetime risk of < 20% to 25%).

Technetium sestamibi is associated with a minimal amount of radiation exposure (2.4 mSv vs 1.2 mSV with standard mammography). However, this exposure is much less than background radiation exposure and is considered safe.21

 

 

IF THE PATIENT HAS AN ABNORMAL SCREENING MAMMOGRAM

BI-RADS categories of screening mammography and their management

Screening mammography can disclose abnormalities such as calcifications, masses, asymmetry, or architectural distortion.27 Abnormalities are reported using standardized BI-RADS categories designated with the numbers 0 through 6 (Table 3).23

A report of BI-RADS category 0 (incomplete), 4 (suspicious), or 5 (highly suspicious) requires additional workup.

Category 1 (negative) requires no further follow-up, and the patient should resume age-appropriate screening.

For patients with category 2 (benign) findings, routine screening is recommended, whereas patients with category 3 (probably benign) are advised to come back in 6 months for follow-up imaging.

Diagnostic mammography includes additional assessments for focal symptoms or areas of abnormality noted on screening imaging or clinical examination. These may include spot magnification views of areas of asymmetry, mass, architectural distortion, or calcifications. Ultrasonography of focal breast abnormalities can help determine if there is an underlying cyst or solid mass.

MANAGEMENT OF BENIGN FINDINGS ON BREAST BIOPSY

Management of benign breast disease found on core-needle biopsy

Benign breast disease is diagnosed when a patient with a palpable or radiographic abnormality undergoes breast biopsy with benign findings.28,29 It can be largely grouped into 3 categories: nonproliferative, proliferative without atypia, and proliferative with atypia (Table 4).28,29

If core-needle biopsy study results are benign, the next step is to establish radiologic-pathologic and clinical-pathologic concordance. If the findings on clinical examination or imaging are not consistent with those on pathologic study, excisional biopsy should be performed, as imaging-directed biopsy may not have adequately sampled the lesion.30

Nonproliferative lesions account for about 65% of findings on core-needle biopsy and include simple cysts, fibroadenomas, columnar cell changes, apocrine metaplasia, and mild ductal hyperplasia of the usual type. These lesions do not significantly increase the risk of breast cancer; the relative risk is 1.2 to 1.4.28,29 Additionally, the risk of “upstaging” after excisional biopsy—ie, to a higher-risk lesion or to malignancy—is minimal. Therefore, no additional action is necessary when these findings alone are noted on core-needle biopsy.

Proliferative lesions without atypia account for about 30% of biopsy results and include usual ductal hyperplasia, sclerosing adenosis, columnar hyperplasia, papilloma, and radial scar. Generally, there is a slightly increased risk of subsequent breast cancer, with a relative risk of 1.7 to 2.1.28 Usual ductal hyperplasia and columnar hyperplasia have little risk of upstaging with excision, and therefore, surgical consultation is not recommended.

Previously, surgical excision was recommended for any intraductal papilloma due to risk of upgrade in pathologic diagnosis at the time of excision. However, more recent data suggest that the upgrade rate is about 2.2% for a solitary papilloma that is less than 1 cm in diameter and without associated mass lesion (either clinically or radiographically), is concordant with radiographic findings, and has no associated atypical cells on biopsy.31 In this case, observation and short-interval clinical follow-up are reasonable. If there are multiple papillomas, the patient has symptoms such as persistent bloody nipple discharge, or any of the above criteria are not met, surgical excision is recommended.28

Similarly, radial scars and complex sclerosing lesions are increasingly likely to be associated with malignancy based on size. Upstaging ranges from 0% to 12%. It is again important when evaluating radial scars that there is pathologic concordance and that there were no associated high-risk lesions on pathology. If this is the case, it is reasonable to clinically monitor patients with small radial scars, particularly in those who do not have an elevated risk of developing breast cancer.30

For all patients who have undergone biopsy and whose pathology study results are benign, a thorough risk evaluation should be performed, including calculation of their lifetime risk of breast cancer. This can be done with the National Cancer Institute Breast Cancer Risk Assessment Tool, the International Breast Cancer Intervention Study (IBIS) risk calculator, or other model using family history as a basis for calculations. Patients found to have a lifetime risk of breast cancer of greater than 20% to 25% should be offered annual screening with magnetic resonance imaging in addition to mammography.

ATYPICAL HYPERPLASIA: INCREASED RISK

When biopsy study shows atypical ductal hyperplasia or atypical lobular hyperplasia, there is an increased risk of breast cancer.28,32 The absolute overall risk of developing breast cancer in 25 years is 30%, and that risk is further stratified based on the number of foci of atypia noted in the specimen.29

When core-needle biopsy study reveals atypical ductal hyperplasia in the tissue, there is a 15% to 30% risk of finding breast cancer with surgical excision.28 Surgical excision is therefore recommended for atypical ductal hyperplasia noted on core-needle biopsy.28

In contrast, when atypical lobular hyperplasia alone is noted, the risk of upstagingto malignancy varies widely—from 0% to 67%—although recent studies have noted risks of 1% to 3%.33,34 Thus, the decision for surgical excision is more variable. Generally, if the atypical lobular hyperplasia is noted incidentally, is not associated with a higher grade lesion, and is concordant with imaging, it is reasonable to closely monitor with serial imaging and physical examination. Excision is unnecessary.35

Patients found to have atypical hyperplasia on breast biopsy should receive counseling about risk-reducing medications. Selective estrogen receptor modulators such as tamoxifen and raloxifene have been shown to reduce the risk of breast cancer by as much as 86% in patients with atypical hyperplasia.36 Similarly, aromatase inhibitors such as exemestane and anastrozole reduce breast cancer risk by approximately 65%.37

References
  1. Eberl MM, Phillips RL Jr, Lamberts H, Okkes I, Mahoney MC. Characterizing breast symptoms in family practice. Ann Fam Med 2008; 6(6):528–533. doi:10.1370/afm.905
  2. Harvey JA, Mahoney MC, Newell MS, et al. ACR appropriateness criteria palpable breast masses. J Am Coll Radiol 2013; 10(10):742–749.e3. doi:10.1016/j.jacr.2013.06.013
  3. Ha R, Kim H, Mango V, Wynn R, Comstock C. Ultrasonographic features and clinical implications of benign palpable breast lesions in young women. Ultrasonography 2015; 34(1):66–70. doi:10.14366/usg.14043
  4. Provencher L, Hogue JC, Desbiens C, et al. Is clinical breast examination important for breast cancer detection? Curr Oncol 2016; 23(4):e332–e339. doi:10.3747/co.23.2881
  5. Scurr J, Hedger W, Morris P, Brown N. The prevalence, severity, and impact of breast pain in the general population. Breast J 2014; 20(5):508–513. doi:10.1111/tbj.12305
  6. Leddy R, Irshad A, Zerwas E, et al. Role of breast ultrasound and mammography in evaluating patients presenting with focal breast pain in the absence of a palpable lump. Breast J 2013; 19(6):582–589. doi:10.1111/tbj.12178
  7. Noroozian M, Stein LF, Gaetke-Udager K, Helvie MA. Long-term clinical outcomes in women with breast pain in the absence of additional clinical findings: mammography remains indicated. Breast Cancer Res Treat 2015; 149(2):417–424. doi:10.1007/s10549-014-3257-3
  8. Gateley CA, Miers M, Mansel RE, Hughes LE. Drug treatments for mastalgia: 17 years experience in the Cardiff Mastalgia Clinic. J R Soc Med 1992; 85(1):12–15. pmid:1548647
  9. Fentiman IS, Caleffi M, Hamed H, Chaudary MA. Dosage and duration of tamoxifen treatment for mastalgia: a controlled trial. Br J Surg 1988; 75(9):845–846. pmid:3052691
  10. Oksa S, Luukkaala T, Mäenpää J. Toremifene for premenstrual mastalgia: a randomised, placebo-controlled crossover study. BJOG 2006; 113(6):713–718. doi:10.1111/j.1471-0528.2006.00943.x
  11. Mirghafourvand M, Mohammad-Alizadeh-Charandabi S, Ahmadpour P, Javadzadeh Y. Effects of Vitex agnus and flaxseed on cyclic mastalgia: a randomized controlled trial. Complement Ther Med 2016; 24:90–95. doi:10.1016/j.ctim.2015.12.009
  12. Shobeiri F, Oshvandi K, Nazari M. Clinical effectiveness of vitamin E and vitamin B6 for improving pain severity in cyclic mastalgia. Iran J Nurs Midwifery Res 2015; 20(6):723–727. doi:10.4103/1735-9066.170003
  13. Thicke LA, Hazelton JK, Bauer BA, et al. Acupuncture for treatment of noncyclic breast pain: a pilot study. Am J Chin Med 2011; 39(6):1117–1129. doi:10.1142/S0192415X11009445
  14. Santen RJ, Mansel R. Benign breast disorders. N Engl J Med 2005; 353(3):275–285. doi:10.1056/NEJMra035692
  15. Gülay H, Bora S, Kìlìçturgay S, Hamaloglu E, Göksel HA. Management of nipple discharge. J Am Coll Surg 1994; 178(5):471–474. pmid:8167884
  16. Murad TM, Contesso G, Mouriesse H. Nipple discharge from the breast. Ann Surg 1982; 195(3):259–264. pmid:6277258
  17. Sakorafas GH. Nipple discharge: current diagnostic and therapeutic approaches. Cancer Treat Rev 2001; 27(5):275–282. doi:10.1053/ctrv.2001.0234
  18. Ashfaq A, Senior D, Pockaj BA, et al. Validation study of a modern treatment algorithm for nipple discharge. Am J Surg 2014; 208(2):222–227. doi:10.1016/j.amjsurg.2013.12.035
  19. Chen CY, Sun LM, Anderson BO. Paget disease of the breast: changing patterns of incidence, clinical presentation, and treatment in the US. Cancer 2006; 107(7):1448–1458. doi:10.1002/cncr.22137
  20. Kollmorgen DR, Varanasi JS, Edge SB, Carson WE 3rd. Paget's disease of the breast: a 33-year experience. J Am Coll Surg 1998; 187(2):171–177. pmid:9704964
  21. Hruska CB. Molecular breast imaging for screening in dense breasts: state of the art and future directions. AJR Am J Roentgenol 2017; 208(2):275–283. doi:10.2214/AJR.16.17131
  22. Melnikow J, Fenton JJ, Whitlock EP, et al. Supplemental screening for breast cancer in women with dense breasts: a systematic review for the US Preventive Services Task Force. Ann Intern Med 2016; 164(4):268–278. doi:10.7326/M15-1789
  23. American College of Radiology. Breast imaging reporting and data system (BI-RADS). Reston, VA: American College of Radiology; 2013.
  24. Brentnall AR, Harkness EF, Astley SM, et al. Mammographic density adds accuracy to both the Tyrer-Cuzick and Gail breast cancer risk models in a prospective UK screening cohort. Breast Cancer Res 2015; 17(1):147. doi:10.1186/s13058-015-0653-5
  25. Friedewald SM, Rafferty EA, Rose SL, et al. Breast cancer screening using tomosynthesis in combination with digital mammography. JAMA 2014; 311(24):2499–2507. doi:10.1001/jama.2014.6095
  26. Rafferty EA, Durand MA, Conant EF, et al. Breast cancer screening using tomosynthesis and digital mammography in dense and nondense breasts. JAMA 2016; 315(16):1784–1786. doi:10.1001/jama.2016.1708
  27. Venkatesan A, Chu P, Kerlikowske K, Sickles EA, Smith-Bindman R. Positive predictive value of specific mammographic findings according to reader and patient variables. Radiology 2009; 250(3):648–657. doi:10.1148/radiol.2503080541
  28. Hartmann LC, Sellers TA, Frost MH, et al. Benign breast disease and the risk of breast cancer. N Engl J Med 2005; 353(3):229–237. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa044383
  29. Hartmann LC, Degnim AC, Santen RJ, DuPont WD, Ghosh K. Atypical hyperplasia of the breast—risk assessment and management options. N Engl J Med 2015; 372(1):78–89. doi:10.1056/NEJMsr1407164
  30. Neal L, Sandhu NP, Hieken TJ, et al. Diagnosis and management of benign, atypical, and indeterminate breast lesions detected on core needle biopsy. Mayo Clin Proc 2014; 89(4):536–547. doi:10.1016/j.mayocp.2014.02.004
  31. Nakhlis F, Ahmadiyeh N, Lester S, Raza S, Lotfi P, Golshan M. Papilloma on core biopsy: excision vs observation. Ann Surg Oncol 2015; 22(5):1479–1482. doi:10.1245/s10434-014-4091-x
  32. Degnim AC, Dupont WE, Radisky DC, et al. Extent of atypical hyperplasia stratifies breast cancer risk in 2 independent cohorts of women. Cancer 2016; 122(19):2971-2978. doi:10.1002/cncr.30153
  33. Sen LQ, Berg WA, Hooley RJ, Carter GJ, Desouki MM, Sumkin JH. Core breast biopsies showing lobular carcinoma in situ should be excised and surveillance is reasonable for atypical lobular hyperplasia. AJR Am J Roentgenol 2016; 207(5):1132–1145. doi:10.2214/AJR.15.15425
  34. Nakhlis F, Gilmore L, Gelman R, et al. Incidence of adjacent synchronous invasive carcinoma and/or ductal carcinoma in situ in patient with lobular neoplasia on core biopsy: results from a prospective multi-institutional registry (TBCRC 020). Ann Surg Oncol 2016; 23(3):722–728. doi:10.1245/s10434-015-4922-4
  35. Racz JM, Carter JM, Degnim AC. Lobular neoplasia and atypical ductal hyperplasia on core biopsy: current surgical management recommendations. Ann Surg Oncol 2017; 24(10):2848–2854. doi:10.1245/s10434-017-5978-0
  36. Fisher B, Costantino JP, Wickerham DL, et al. Tamoxifen for the prevention of breast cancer: report of the National Surgical Adjuvant Breast and Bowel Project P-1 Study. J Natl Cancer Inst 1998; 90:1371–1388. doi:10.1093/jnci/dji372
  37. Goss PE, Ingle JN, Alés-Martínez JE, et al. Exemestane for breast-cancer prevention in postmenopausal women. N Engl J Med 2011; 364(25):2381–2391. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1103507
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

Christine Lara Klassen, MD
Assistant Professor of Medicine, Division of General Internal Medicine, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN

Stephanie L. Hines, MD
Assistant Professor of Medicine, Division of General Internal Medicine, Mayo Clinic, Jacksonville, FL

Karthik Ghosh, MD
Professor of Medicine, Division of General Internal Medicine, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN

Address: Christine Lara Klassen, MD, Division of General Internal Medicine, Mayo Clinic, 200 First Street SW, Rochester, MN 55905; [email protected]

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
57-65
Legacy Keywords
breast, mass, benign, pain, discharge, BI-RADS, density, dense breasts, ultrasound, mammography, Paget disease, breast cancer, hyperplasia, cyst, Christine Klassen, Stephanie Hines, Karthik Ghosh
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Christine Lara Klassen, MD
Assistant Professor of Medicine, Division of General Internal Medicine, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN

Stephanie L. Hines, MD
Assistant Professor of Medicine, Division of General Internal Medicine, Mayo Clinic, Jacksonville, FL

Karthik Ghosh, MD
Professor of Medicine, Division of General Internal Medicine, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN

Address: Christine Lara Klassen, MD, Division of General Internal Medicine, Mayo Clinic, 200 First Street SW, Rochester, MN 55905; [email protected]

Author and Disclosure Information

Christine Lara Klassen, MD
Assistant Professor of Medicine, Division of General Internal Medicine, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN

Stephanie L. Hines, MD
Assistant Professor of Medicine, Division of General Internal Medicine, Mayo Clinic, Jacksonville, FL

Karthik Ghosh, MD
Professor of Medicine, Division of General Internal Medicine, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN

Address: Christine Lara Klassen, MD, Division of General Internal Medicine, Mayo Clinic, 200 First Street SW, Rochester, MN 55905; [email protected]

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Breast concerns account for approximately 3% of all female visits to a primary care practice.1 The most common symptoms are breast lumps and breast pain.

Benign causes of common breast symptoms

Because breast cancer is the most common malignancy in women in the United States, affecting nearly 1 in 8 women in their lifetime, women with breast problems often fear the worst. However, only about 3.5% of women reporting a concern have cancer; most problems are benign (Table 1).1

Here, we present an evidence-based review of common breast problems in primary care practice and discuss how to evaluate and manage them.

GENERAL APPROACH

The evaluation of a breast concern requires a systematic approach, beginning with a history that documents the onset, severity, and frequency of symptoms. If the concern is a lump or mass, ask whether it becomes more tender or increases in size at any point during the menstrual cycle.

Focus the physical examination on the cervical, supraclavicular, infraclavicular, and axillary lymph nodes and on the breast itself. Assess breast symmetry, note any skin changes such as dimpling, and check the nipples for discharge and inversion. Palpate the breasts for masses.

PALPABLE BREAST MASS: IMAGING NEEDED

If a mass is present, it is more likely to be malignant if any of the following is true:

  • Firm to hard texture or indistinct margins
  • Attached to the underlying deep fascia or skin
  • Associated nipple inversion or skin dimpling.2

Breast masses are more likely benign if they have discrete, well-defined margins, are mobile with a soft to rubbery consistency, and change with the menstrual cycle. However, clinical features are unreliable indicators of cause, and thus additional investigation with breast imaging is warranted.

Mammography remains the diagnostic test of choice for all women age 30 or older who have a palpable breast mass. It is less effective in younger women because they are more likely to have extremely dense fibroglandular tissue that will limit its sensitivity to imaging.

Order diagnostic mammography, which includes additional views focused on the area of concern, rather than screening mammography, which includes only standard cranio­caudal and mediolateral oblique views. A skin marker should be applied over the palpable lump to aid imaging. Because a breast that contains a mass may be denser than the opposite breast or may show asymmetry, both breasts should be imaged. The sensitivity of diagnostic mammography varies from 85% to 90%, so a negative mammogram does not rule out malignancy.2,3

Targeted ultrasonography of the palpable mass helps identify solid masses such as fibroadenomas or malignant tumors, classifies the margins (lobulated, smooth, or irregular), and assesses vascularity. Ultrasonography is particularly useful for characterizing cystic lesions (eg, simple, septated, or clustered cysts) and cysts with internal echoes. It can also identify lipomas or sebaceous cysts.

If the findings on both mammography and ultrasonography are benign, the likelihood of cancer is very low, with an estimated negative predictive value of 97% to 100%.2,3 Additionally, the likelihood of nonmalignant findings on biopsy after benign imaging is approximately 99%.3

Although radiologic imaging can define palpable masses, it is intended as a clinical aid. Suspicious findings on clinical examination should never be ignored even if findings on imaging are reassuring, as studies have documented that about 5% of breast cancers may be detected on clinical breast examination alone.4

Other imaging tests such as magnetic resonance imaging may be considered occasionally if clinical suspicion remains high after negative mammography and ultrasonography, but they cannot confirm a diagnosis of malignancy. In that case, refer the patient to a surgeon for consideration of excisional biopsy.

Patients with an indeterminate lesion can return in 3 to 12 weeks for a follow-up examination and repeat imaging, which helps assess interval clinical stability. The latter option is especially helpful for patients with masses that are of low suspicion or for patients who prefer to avoid invasive tissue biopsy.

Patients with clinical and radiologic findings that suggest a benign cause can return for short-term follow-up in 6 months or in 12 months for their regular mammogram.

 

 

BREAST PAIN: RARELY MALIGNANT

More than 50% of women experience breast pain at some point in their life.5 Of these, 35% report that the pain adversely affects their sleep, and 41% note that the pain detrimentally affects their sexual quality of life. Up to 66% of breast pain correlates directly with the patient’s menstrual cycle.5 Breast pain is rarely associated with malignancy.

Regardless of its severity and the low likelihood of malignancy, breast pain can be a significant source of distress for the patient, primarily because of concerns about underlying malignancy. If the patient has a focal area of pain on examination, order mammography in combination with targeted ultrasonography. The sensitivity and negative predictive value of benign findings on combination mammography and ultrasonography in this setting are as high as 100%. The incidence of underlying cancer in patients with focal breast pain and no palpable mass is approximately 1.2%.6

The long-term prognosis in women with diffuse, often bilateral breast pain (in the absence of additional clinical findings) is excellent. In one study, the incidence of a breast cancer diagnosis was 1.8% after a median of 51 months of follow-up.7 Therefore, patients presenting with diffuse pain, no palpable abnormalities, and benign imaging can be safely reassured. Magnetic resonance imaging is rarely indicated in patients with breast pain unless other clinical findings, such as a mass or skin changes, are noted and the results of mammography and ultrasonography are negative.

Treating breast pain

Treating breast pain remains a challenge. The first step is to reassure the patient about her prognosis and help her make appropriate lifestyle modifications.

A well-fitting bra. Suggest getting a professional bra fitting. Wearing a well-fitted bra that offers lift, support, and compression and reduces excess motion can help improve benign breast pain. A bra fitting is especially important for women with large breasts because it can be difficult for these women to get an accurate size. Wearing a lightly fitted bra at night may also provide comfort if there is nighttime pain with breast tissue movement.

Reducing daily caffeine intake is often advised for pain management, but strong evidence of its efficacy is lacking.

Anti-inflammatory drugs can be beneficial if used short-term, especially if costochondritis is suspected.

Danazol improves pain in more than 70% of patients with cyclical symptoms and in up to 48% of those with noncyclical symptoms.

Bromocriptine is effective in up to 54% of those with cyclical symptoms and in up to 33% of those with noncyclical symptoms.8 However, the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) withdrew approval for this indication because of adverse effects.

Tamoxifen, in contrast, provides relief in 94% of those with cyclical symptoms and in 56% of those with noncyclical symptoms.9

Adverse effects, however, limit the use of danazol, bromocriptine, and tamoxifen, and they should be prescribed only for short-term use (3 to 6 months) and only in women with chronic debilitating pain.

A few small studies have evaluated alternative options.

Toremifene is a triphenylethylene derivative similar to tamoxifen that is also used in the adjuvant treatment of postmenopausal breast cancer (but with fewer adverse effects). It has been documented to have a significant effect on premenstrual breast pain, with a 64% reduction in breast pain scores compared with a 26% reduction with placebo.10 However, the FDA has not approved it for this indication, and it can be cost-prohibitive.

Over-the-counter medications that may provide relief for cyclic breast pain include vitamin E or B6, products containing oil of Vitex agnus castus (chaste tree or chasteberry), and flaxseed.11,12

Acupuncture has been evaluated in patients with noncyclic breast pain and was found to reduce pain by 56% to 67% in one study,13 although it did not affect quality of life.

NIPPLE DISCHARGE

From 5% to 7% of women seek medical attention for nipple discharge.14,15 Breast cancer is found in 5% to 15% of women who undergo surgery for nipple discharge.16,17

Review the patient’s current medications and inquire about health conditions such as thyroid dysfunction or visual field changes that suggest a pituitary mass (which can lead to nipple discharge by causing hormonal dysregulation or hyperprolactinemia).

Palpate the breasts for an underlying mass, look for lesions on the nipple, and assess the color of the fluid. Also note whether there is discharge from one or both breasts, whether it is spontaneous or expressive, and whether it occurs from a single or multiple ducts. Nipple lesions may require further testing with punch biopsy.

Nonlactational nipple discharge is classified as physiologic or pathologic. Physiologic nipple discharge is typically bilateral, involving multiple ducts, and is often clear or straw-colored but may also be green, gray, or brown.

White, opaque fluid is often related to galactorrhea as a result of hyperprolactinemia, hypothyroidism, or medications such as antipsychotic drugs (eg, haloperidol and fluphenazine) and gastrointestinal motility agents such as metoclopramide. Discharge also commonly results from benign underlying ductal abnormalities such as intraductal papilloma, periductal mastitis, and duct ectasia.

Pathologic nipple discharge is often unilateral and persistent, occurring spontaneously from a solitary duct, and may be bloody or serous.

For women with pathologic nipple discharge who are 30 or older, diagnostic imaging with mammography and subareolar ultrasonography is recommended. If the patient is younger than 30, ultrasonography of the subareolar region alone can be used. Targeted ultrasonography of any palpable area is also advised.

Cytologic assessment of the fluid is not recommended because it can often lead to a false-positive finding of atypical cells. Imaging studies such as ductography, duct lavage, ductoscopy, and magnetic resonance imaging are also generally unnecessary; instead, a persistent clinical concern should prompt a surgical referral for consideration of duct excision.

When a patient has pathologic nipple discharge with a negative physical examination and breast imaging, studies have shown that the risk of cancer is 3% or less.18

Patients with spontaneous bloody or serous single-duct discharge with negative results on mammography and ultrasonography should be reassured that they have a low risk of underlying cancer. If the patient prefers, one approachto management is follow-up mammography and ultrasonography at 6 months and clinical examination for up to 2 years or until the discharge resolves on its own.

On the other hand, if the discharge is distressing to the patient, subareolar duct excision can be performed with both a diagnostic and therapeutic purpose.

 

 

NIPPLE-AREOLAR RASH: CONSIDER PAGET DISEASE

A rash on the nipple or areolar region warrants careful evaluation because it may be the first sign of Paget disease of the breast.

In the clinical breast examination, assess the extent of the rash and the presence of any underlying breast mass or nipple discharge. Dermatitis often starts on the areola and resolves quickly with topical therapy. However, Paget disease tends to start directly on the nipple itself, is unresponsive or only partially responsive to topical therapy, and progresses gradually, leading to erosions and ultimately effacement of the nipple itself.

If the clinical examination suggests mild dermatitis and the results of breast imaging are negative, treat the patient with a topical medication because benign conditions such as dermatitis and eczema are common. However, continued follow-up is mandatory until the rash completely resolves: Paget disease sometimes initially improves with topical therapy due to its inflammatory nature.

If you suspect Paget disease or the rash does not fully resolve after 2 to 3 weeks of topical therapy, refer the patient to a dermatologist for full-thickness punch biopsy to establish the diagnosis.

Paget disease of the breast may or may not be associated with underlying ductal carcinoma in situ or invasive breast cancer.19 The absence of clinical or imaging abnormalities in a patient with Paget disease does not rule out underlying malignancy.20

DENSE BREASTS

BI-RADS breast density categories
From 35% to 50% of all women have dense breast tissue.21,22 Breast density is defined as the ratio of stromal and glandular tissues (which appear radio-opaque on mammography) to radiolucent fat. The Breast Imaging Reporting and Data System (BI-RADS), fifth edition, recognizes 4 categories of density, designated A through D (Table 2 and Figure 1).23        

Breast density categories
Figure 1.
Nearly 80% of women fall into category B (scattered areas of fibroglandular density) and category C (heterogeneously dense), with significant interreader variation. One study showed that 13% to 19% of women were reclassified from dense to nondense or vice versa on subsequent mammograms.22

Increased breast density has been shown to be a risk factor for breast cancer and may be prognostically useful when combined with the Tyrer-Cuzick model or the Gail model of breast cancer risk.24

Additionally, increased density can mask cancers on mammography, significantly reducing its sensitivity. In women with heterogeneously or extremely dense breasts, the sensitivity of mammography for detecting cancer is only 25% to 50%.21 Due to this low sensitivity, supplemental imaging is helpful, particularly in women already at risk of breast cancer based on family history.

Supplemental screening

Digital mammography with tomosynthesis was approved by the FDA in 2011 for use in combination with standard digital mammography for breast cancer screening. Compared with traditional 2-dimensional mammography alone, adding 3-D tomosynthesis decreases the recall rate and increases the cancer detection rate.25

Tomosynthesis tends to perform better in women with heterogeneously dense breasts (BI-RADS category C). There is no significant improvement in cancer detection in women with extremely dense breasts (BI-RADS category D).26

Depending on the methodology, radiation exposure can be either higher or lower than with traditional mammography. However, in all forms, the very small amount of radiation is considered safe.

Whole breast ultrasonography. When whole breast ultrasonography is used to supplement mammography, the recall rate is higher than when mammography is used alone (14% vs 7%–11%).22 It also increases the cancer detection rate by 4.4 additional cancers per 1,000 examinations. However, the false-positive rate with whole breast ultrasonography is higher; the positive predictive value of combined mammography and ultrasonography is 11.2% vs 22.6% for mammography alone.22 Therefore, we do not generally recommend whole breast ultrasonography as a supplement to mammography in women with dense breast tissue unless other studies are not an option.

Molecular breast imaging is not widely available because it requires special equipment, injection of a radiopharamceutical (technetium Tc 99m sestamibi), and a radiologist who specializes in breast imaging to interpret the results. When it is available, however, it increases the cancer detection rate by 8.8 in 1,000 examinations; the positive predictive value is similar to that of screening mammography alone.21 It is particularly useful in patients with dense breasts who do not qualify for screening magnetic resonance imaging (lifetime risk of < 20% to 25%).

Technetium sestamibi is associated with a minimal amount of radiation exposure (2.4 mSv vs 1.2 mSV with standard mammography). However, this exposure is much less than background radiation exposure and is considered safe.21

 

 

IF THE PATIENT HAS AN ABNORMAL SCREENING MAMMOGRAM

BI-RADS categories of screening mammography and their management

Screening mammography can disclose abnormalities such as calcifications, masses, asymmetry, or architectural distortion.27 Abnormalities are reported using standardized BI-RADS categories designated with the numbers 0 through 6 (Table 3).23

A report of BI-RADS category 0 (incomplete), 4 (suspicious), or 5 (highly suspicious) requires additional workup.

Category 1 (negative) requires no further follow-up, and the patient should resume age-appropriate screening.

For patients with category 2 (benign) findings, routine screening is recommended, whereas patients with category 3 (probably benign) are advised to come back in 6 months for follow-up imaging.

Diagnostic mammography includes additional assessments for focal symptoms or areas of abnormality noted on screening imaging or clinical examination. These may include spot magnification views of areas of asymmetry, mass, architectural distortion, or calcifications. Ultrasonography of focal breast abnormalities can help determine if there is an underlying cyst or solid mass.

MANAGEMENT OF BENIGN FINDINGS ON BREAST BIOPSY

Management of benign breast disease found on core-needle biopsy

Benign breast disease is diagnosed when a patient with a palpable or radiographic abnormality undergoes breast biopsy with benign findings.28,29 It can be largely grouped into 3 categories: nonproliferative, proliferative without atypia, and proliferative with atypia (Table 4).28,29

If core-needle biopsy study results are benign, the next step is to establish radiologic-pathologic and clinical-pathologic concordance. If the findings on clinical examination or imaging are not consistent with those on pathologic study, excisional biopsy should be performed, as imaging-directed biopsy may not have adequately sampled the lesion.30

Nonproliferative lesions account for about 65% of findings on core-needle biopsy and include simple cysts, fibroadenomas, columnar cell changes, apocrine metaplasia, and mild ductal hyperplasia of the usual type. These lesions do not significantly increase the risk of breast cancer; the relative risk is 1.2 to 1.4.28,29 Additionally, the risk of “upstaging” after excisional biopsy—ie, to a higher-risk lesion or to malignancy—is minimal. Therefore, no additional action is necessary when these findings alone are noted on core-needle biopsy.

Proliferative lesions without atypia account for about 30% of biopsy results and include usual ductal hyperplasia, sclerosing adenosis, columnar hyperplasia, papilloma, and radial scar. Generally, there is a slightly increased risk of subsequent breast cancer, with a relative risk of 1.7 to 2.1.28 Usual ductal hyperplasia and columnar hyperplasia have little risk of upstaging with excision, and therefore, surgical consultation is not recommended.

Previously, surgical excision was recommended for any intraductal papilloma due to risk of upgrade in pathologic diagnosis at the time of excision. However, more recent data suggest that the upgrade rate is about 2.2% for a solitary papilloma that is less than 1 cm in diameter and without associated mass lesion (either clinically or radiographically), is concordant with radiographic findings, and has no associated atypical cells on biopsy.31 In this case, observation and short-interval clinical follow-up are reasonable. If there are multiple papillomas, the patient has symptoms such as persistent bloody nipple discharge, or any of the above criteria are not met, surgical excision is recommended.28

Similarly, radial scars and complex sclerosing lesions are increasingly likely to be associated with malignancy based on size. Upstaging ranges from 0% to 12%. It is again important when evaluating radial scars that there is pathologic concordance and that there were no associated high-risk lesions on pathology. If this is the case, it is reasonable to clinically monitor patients with small radial scars, particularly in those who do not have an elevated risk of developing breast cancer.30

For all patients who have undergone biopsy and whose pathology study results are benign, a thorough risk evaluation should be performed, including calculation of their lifetime risk of breast cancer. This can be done with the National Cancer Institute Breast Cancer Risk Assessment Tool, the International Breast Cancer Intervention Study (IBIS) risk calculator, or other model using family history as a basis for calculations. Patients found to have a lifetime risk of breast cancer of greater than 20% to 25% should be offered annual screening with magnetic resonance imaging in addition to mammography.

ATYPICAL HYPERPLASIA: INCREASED RISK

When biopsy study shows atypical ductal hyperplasia or atypical lobular hyperplasia, there is an increased risk of breast cancer.28,32 The absolute overall risk of developing breast cancer in 25 years is 30%, and that risk is further stratified based on the number of foci of atypia noted in the specimen.29

When core-needle biopsy study reveals atypical ductal hyperplasia in the tissue, there is a 15% to 30% risk of finding breast cancer with surgical excision.28 Surgical excision is therefore recommended for atypical ductal hyperplasia noted on core-needle biopsy.28

In contrast, when atypical lobular hyperplasia alone is noted, the risk of upstagingto malignancy varies widely—from 0% to 67%—although recent studies have noted risks of 1% to 3%.33,34 Thus, the decision for surgical excision is more variable. Generally, if the atypical lobular hyperplasia is noted incidentally, is not associated with a higher grade lesion, and is concordant with imaging, it is reasonable to closely monitor with serial imaging and physical examination. Excision is unnecessary.35

Patients found to have atypical hyperplasia on breast biopsy should receive counseling about risk-reducing medications. Selective estrogen receptor modulators such as tamoxifen and raloxifene have been shown to reduce the risk of breast cancer by as much as 86% in patients with atypical hyperplasia.36 Similarly, aromatase inhibitors such as exemestane and anastrozole reduce breast cancer risk by approximately 65%.37

Breast concerns account for approximately 3% of all female visits to a primary care practice.1 The most common symptoms are breast lumps and breast pain.

Benign causes of common breast symptoms

Because breast cancer is the most common malignancy in women in the United States, affecting nearly 1 in 8 women in their lifetime, women with breast problems often fear the worst. However, only about 3.5% of women reporting a concern have cancer; most problems are benign (Table 1).1

Here, we present an evidence-based review of common breast problems in primary care practice and discuss how to evaluate and manage them.

GENERAL APPROACH

The evaluation of a breast concern requires a systematic approach, beginning with a history that documents the onset, severity, and frequency of symptoms. If the concern is a lump or mass, ask whether it becomes more tender or increases in size at any point during the menstrual cycle.

Focus the physical examination on the cervical, supraclavicular, infraclavicular, and axillary lymph nodes and on the breast itself. Assess breast symmetry, note any skin changes such as dimpling, and check the nipples for discharge and inversion. Palpate the breasts for masses.

PALPABLE BREAST MASS: IMAGING NEEDED

If a mass is present, it is more likely to be malignant if any of the following is true:

  • Firm to hard texture or indistinct margins
  • Attached to the underlying deep fascia or skin
  • Associated nipple inversion or skin dimpling.2

Breast masses are more likely benign if they have discrete, well-defined margins, are mobile with a soft to rubbery consistency, and change with the menstrual cycle. However, clinical features are unreliable indicators of cause, and thus additional investigation with breast imaging is warranted.

Mammography remains the diagnostic test of choice for all women age 30 or older who have a palpable breast mass. It is less effective in younger women because they are more likely to have extremely dense fibroglandular tissue that will limit its sensitivity to imaging.

Order diagnostic mammography, which includes additional views focused on the area of concern, rather than screening mammography, which includes only standard cranio­caudal and mediolateral oblique views. A skin marker should be applied over the palpable lump to aid imaging. Because a breast that contains a mass may be denser than the opposite breast or may show asymmetry, both breasts should be imaged. The sensitivity of diagnostic mammography varies from 85% to 90%, so a negative mammogram does not rule out malignancy.2,3

Targeted ultrasonography of the palpable mass helps identify solid masses such as fibroadenomas or malignant tumors, classifies the margins (lobulated, smooth, or irregular), and assesses vascularity. Ultrasonography is particularly useful for characterizing cystic lesions (eg, simple, septated, or clustered cysts) and cysts with internal echoes. It can also identify lipomas or sebaceous cysts.

If the findings on both mammography and ultrasonography are benign, the likelihood of cancer is very low, with an estimated negative predictive value of 97% to 100%.2,3 Additionally, the likelihood of nonmalignant findings on biopsy after benign imaging is approximately 99%.3

Although radiologic imaging can define palpable masses, it is intended as a clinical aid. Suspicious findings on clinical examination should never be ignored even if findings on imaging are reassuring, as studies have documented that about 5% of breast cancers may be detected on clinical breast examination alone.4

Other imaging tests such as magnetic resonance imaging may be considered occasionally if clinical suspicion remains high after negative mammography and ultrasonography, but they cannot confirm a diagnosis of malignancy. In that case, refer the patient to a surgeon for consideration of excisional biopsy.

Patients with an indeterminate lesion can return in 3 to 12 weeks for a follow-up examination and repeat imaging, which helps assess interval clinical stability. The latter option is especially helpful for patients with masses that are of low suspicion or for patients who prefer to avoid invasive tissue biopsy.

Patients with clinical and radiologic findings that suggest a benign cause can return for short-term follow-up in 6 months or in 12 months for their regular mammogram.

 

 

BREAST PAIN: RARELY MALIGNANT

More than 50% of women experience breast pain at some point in their life.5 Of these, 35% report that the pain adversely affects their sleep, and 41% note that the pain detrimentally affects their sexual quality of life. Up to 66% of breast pain correlates directly with the patient’s menstrual cycle.5 Breast pain is rarely associated with malignancy.

Regardless of its severity and the low likelihood of malignancy, breast pain can be a significant source of distress for the patient, primarily because of concerns about underlying malignancy. If the patient has a focal area of pain on examination, order mammography in combination with targeted ultrasonography. The sensitivity and negative predictive value of benign findings on combination mammography and ultrasonography in this setting are as high as 100%. The incidence of underlying cancer in patients with focal breast pain and no palpable mass is approximately 1.2%.6

The long-term prognosis in women with diffuse, often bilateral breast pain (in the absence of additional clinical findings) is excellent. In one study, the incidence of a breast cancer diagnosis was 1.8% after a median of 51 months of follow-up.7 Therefore, patients presenting with diffuse pain, no palpable abnormalities, and benign imaging can be safely reassured. Magnetic resonance imaging is rarely indicated in patients with breast pain unless other clinical findings, such as a mass or skin changes, are noted and the results of mammography and ultrasonography are negative.

Treating breast pain

Treating breast pain remains a challenge. The first step is to reassure the patient about her prognosis and help her make appropriate lifestyle modifications.

A well-fitting bra. Suggest getting a professional bra fitting. Wearing a well-fitted bra that offers lift, support, and compression and reduces excess motion can help improve benign breast pain. A bra fitting is especially important for women with large breasts because it can be difficult for these women to get an accurate size. Wearing a lightly fitted bra at night may also provide comfort if there is nighttime pain with breast tissue movement.

Reducing daily caffeine intake is often advised for pain management, but strong evidence of its efficacy is lacking.

Anti-inflammatory drugs can be beneficial if used short-term, especially if costochondritis is suspected.

Danazol improves pain in more than 70% of patients with cyclical symptoms and in up to 48% of those with noncyclical symptoms.

Bromocriptine is effective in up to 54% of those with cyclical symptoms and in up to 33% of those with noncyclical symptoms.8 However, the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) withdrew approval for this indication because of adverse effects.

Tamoxifen, in contrast, provides relief in 94% of those with cyclical symptoms and in 56% of those with noncyclical symptoms.9

Adverse effects, however, limit the use of danazol, bromocriptine, and tamoxifen, and they should be prescribed only for short-term use (3 to 6 months) and only in women with chronic debilitating pain.

A few small studies have evaluated alternative options.

Toremifene is a triphenylethylene derivative similar to tamoxifen that is also used in the adjuvant treatment of postmenopausal breast cancer (but with fewer adverse effects). It has been documented to have a significant effect on premenstrual breast pain, with a 64% reduction in breast pain scores compared with a 26% reduction with placebo.10 However, the FDA has not approved it for this indication, and it can be cost-prohibitive.

Over-the-counter medications that may provide relief for cyclic breast pain include vitamin E or B6, products containing oil of Vitex agnus castus (chaste tree or chasteberry), and flaxseed.11,12

Acupuncture has been evaluated in patients with noncyclic breast pain and was found to reduce pain by 56% to 67% in one study,13 although it did not affect quality of life.

NIPPLE DISCHARGE

From 5% to 7% of women seek medical attention for nipple discharge.14,15 Breast cancer is found in 5% to 15% of women who undergo surgery for nipple discharge.16,17

Review the patient’s current medications and inquire about health conditions such as thyroid dysfunction or visual field changes that suggest a pituitary mass (which can lead to nipple discharge by causing hormonal dysregulation or hyperprolactinemia).

Palpate the breasts for an underlying mass, look for lesions on the nipple, and assess the color of the fluid. Also note whether there is discharge from one or both breasts, whether it is spontaneous or expressive, and whether it occurs from a single or multiple ducts. Nipple lesions may require further testing with punch biopsy.

Nonlactational nipple discharge is classified as physiologic or pathologic. Physiologic nipple discharge is typically bilateral, involving multiple ducts, and is often clear or straw-colored but may also be green, gray, or brown.

White, opaque fluid is often related to galactorrhea as a result of hyperprolactinemia, hypothyroidism, or medications such as antipsychotic drugs (eg, haloperidol and fluphenazine) and gastrointestinal motility agents such as metoclopramide. Discharge also commonly results from benign underlying ductal abnormalities such as intraductal papilloma, periductal mastitis, and duct ectasia.

Pathologic nipple discharge is often unilateral and persistent, occurring spontaneously from a solitary duct, and may be bloody or serous.

For women with pathologic nipple discharge who are 30 or older, diagnostic imaging with mammography and subareolar ultrasonography is recommended. If the patient is younger than 30, ultrasonography of the subareolar region alone can be used. Targeted ultrasonography of any palpable area is also advised.

Cytologic assessment of the fluid is not recommended because it can often lead to a false-positive finding of atypical cells. Imaging studies such as ductography, duct lavage, ductoscopy, and magnetic resonance imaging are also generally unnecessary; instead, a persistent clinical concern should prompt a surgical referral for consideration of duct excision.

When a patient has pathologic nipple discharge with a negative physical examination and breast imaging, studies have shown that the risk of cancer is 3% or less.18

Patients with spontaneous bloody or serous single-duct discharge with negative results on mammography and ultrasonography should be reassured that they have a low risk of underlying cancer. If the patient prefers, one approachto management is follow-up mammography and ultrasonography at 6 months and clinical examination for up to 2 years or until the discharge resolves on its own.

On the other hand, if the discharge is distressing to the patient, subareolar duct excision can be performed with both a diagnostic and therapeutic purpose.

 

 

NIPPLE-AREOLAR RASH: CONSIDER PAGET DISEASE

A rash on the nipple or areolar region warrants careful evaluation because it may be the first sign of Paget disease of the breast.

In the clinical breast examination, assess the extent of the rash and the presence of any underlying breast mass or nipple discharge. Dermatitis often starts on the areola and resolves quickly with topical therapy. However, Paget disease tends to start directly on the nipple itself, is unresponsive or only partially responsive to topical therapy, and progresses gradually, leading to erosions and ultimately effacement of the nipple itself.

If the clinical examination suggests mild dermatitis and the results of breast imaging are negative, treat the patient with a topical medication because benign conditions such as dermatitis and eczema are common. However, continued follow-up is mandatory until the rash completely resolves: Paget disease sometimes initially improves with topical therapy due to its inflammatory nature.

If you suspect Paget disease or the rash does not fully resolve after 2 to 3 weeks of topical therapy, refer the patient to a dermatologist for full-thickness punch biopsy to establish the diagnosis.

Paget disease of the breast may or may not be associated with underlying ductal carcinoma in situ or invasive breast cancer.19 The absence of clinical or imaging abnormalities in a patient with Paget disease does not rule out underlying malignancy.20

DENSE BREASTS

BI-RADS breast density categories
From 35% to 50% of all women have dense breast tissue.21,22 Breast density is defined as the ratio of stromal and glandular tissues (which appear radio-opaque on mammography) to radiolucent fat. The Breast Imaging Reporting and Data System (BI-RADS), fifth edition, recognizes 4 categories of density, designated A through D (Table 2 and Figure 1).23        

Breast density categories
Figure 1.
Nearly 80% of women fall into category B (scattered areas of fibroglandular density) and category C (heterogeneously dense), with significant interreader variation. One study showed that 13% to 19% of women were reclassified from dense to nondense or vice versa on subsequent mammograms.22

Increased breast density has been shown to be a risk factor for breast cancer and may be prognostically useful when combined with the Tyrer-Cuzick model or the Gail model of breast cancer risk.24

Additionally, increased density can mask cancers on mammography, significantly reducing its sensitivity. In women with heterogeneously or extremely dense breasts, the sensitivity of mammography for detecting cancer is only 25% to 50%.21 Due to this low sensitivity, supplemental imaging is helpful, particularly in women already at risk of breast cancer based on family history.

Supplemental screening

Digital mammography with tomosynthesis was approved by the FDA in 2011 for use in combination with standard digital mammography for breast cancer screening. Compared with traditional 2-dimensional mammography alone, adding 3-D tomosynthesis decreases the recall rate and increases the cancer detection rate.25

Tomosynthesis tends to perform better in women with heterogeneously dense breasts (BI-RADS category C). There is no significant improvement in cancer detection in women with extremely dense breasts (BI-RADS category D).26

Depending on the methodology, radiation exposure can be either higher or lower than with traditional mammography. However, in all forms, the very small amount of radiation is considered safe.

Whole breast ultrasonography. When whole breast ultrasonography is used to supplement mammography, the recall rate is higher than when mammography is used alone (14% vs 7%–11%).22 It also increases the cancer detection rate by 4.4 additional cancers per 1,000 examinations. However, the false-positive rate with whole breast ultrasonography is higher; the positive predictive value of combined mammography and ultrasonography is 11.2% vs 22.6% for mammography alone.22 Therefore, we do not generally recommend whole breast ultrasonography as a supplement to mammography in women with dense breast tissue unless other studies are not an option.

Molecular breast imaging is not widely available because it requires special equipment, injection of a radiopharamceutical (technetium Tc 99m sestamibi), and a radiologist who specializes in breast imaging to interpret the results. When it is available, however, it increases the cancer detection rate by 8.8 in 1,000 examinations; the positive predictive value is similar to that of screening mammography alone.21 It is particularly useful in patients with dense breasts who do not qualify for screening magnetic resonance imaging (lifetime risk of < 20% to 25%).

Technetium sestamibi is associated with a minimal amount of radiation exposure (2.4 mSv vs 1.2 mSV with standard mammography). However, this exposure is much less than background radiation exposure and is considered safe.21

 

 

IF THE PATIENT HAS AN ABNORMAL SCREENING MAMMOGRAM

BI-RADS categories of screening mammography and their management

Screening mammography can disclose abnormalities such as calcifications, masses, asymmetry, or architectural distortion.27 Abnormalities are reported using standardized BI-RADS categories designated with the numbers 0 through 6 (Table 3).23

A report of BI-RADS category 0 (incomplete), 4 (suspicious), or 5 (highly suspicious) requires additional workup.

Category 1 (negative) requires no further follow-up, and the patient should resume age-appropriate screening.

For patients with category 2 (benign) findings, routine screening is recommended, whereas patients with category 3 (probably benign) are advised to come back in 6 months for follow-up imaging.

Diagnostic mammography includes additional assessments for focal symptoms or areas of abnormality noted on screening imaging or clinical examination. These may include spot magnification views of areas of asymmetry, mass, architectural distortion, or calcifications. Ultrasonography of focal breast abnormalities can help determine if there is an underlying cyst or solid mass.

MANAGEMENT OF BENIGN FINDINGS ON BREAST BIOPSY

Management of benign breast disease found on core-needle biopsy

Benign breast disease is diagnosed when a patient with a palpable or radiographic abnormality undergoes breast biopsy with benign findings.28,29 It can be largely grouped into 3 categories: nonproliferative, proliferative without atypia, and proliferative with atypia (Table 4).28,29

If core-needle biopsy study results are benign, the next step is to establish radiologic-pathologic and clinical-pathologic concordance. If the findings on clinical examination or imaging are not consistent with those on pathologic study, excisional biopsy should be performed, as imaging-directed biopsy may not have adequately sampled the lesion.30

Nonproliferative lesions account for about 65% of findings on core-needle biopsy and include simple cysts, fibroadenomas, columnar cell changes, apocrine metaplasia, and mild ductal hyperplasia of the usual type. These lesions do not significantly increase the risk of breast cancer; the relative risk is 1.2 to 1.4.28,29 Additionally, the risk of “upstaging” after excisional biopsy—ie, to a higher-risk lesion or to malignancy—is minimal. Therefore, no additional action is necessary when these findings alone are noted on core-needle biopsy.

Proliferative lesions without atypia account for about 30% of biopsy results and include usual ductal hyperplasia, sclerosing adenosis, columnar hyperplasia, papilloma, and radial scar. Generally, there is a slightly increased risk of subsequent breast cancer, with a relative risk of 1.7 to 2.1.28 Usual ductal hyperplasia and columnar hyperplasia have little risk of upstaging with excision, and therefore, surgical consultation is not recommended.

Previously, surgical excision was recommended for any intraductal papilloma due to risk of upgrade in pathologic diagnosis at the time of excision. However, more recent data suggest that the upgrade rate is about 2.2% for a solitary papilloma that is less than 1 cm in diameter and without associated mass lesion (either clinically or radiographically), is concordant with radiographic findings, and has no associated atypical cells on biopsy.31 In this case, observation and short-interval clinical follow-up are reasonable. If there are multiple papillomas, the patient has symptoms such as persistent bloody nipple discharge, or any of the above criteria are not met, surgical excision is recommended.28

Similarly, radial scars and complex sclerosing lesions are increasingly likely to be associated with malignancy based on size. Upstaging ranges from 0% to 12%. It is again important when evaluating radial scars that there is pathologic concordance and that there were no associated high-risk lesions on pathology. If this is the case, it is reasonable to clinically monitor patients with small radial scars, particularly in those who do not have an elevated risk of developing breast cancer.30

For all patients who have undergone biopsy and whose pathology study results are benign, a thorough risk evaluation should be performed, including calculation of their lifetime risk of breast cancer. This can be done with the National Cancer Institute Breast Cancer Risk Assessment Tool, the International Breast Cancer Intervention Study (IBIS) risk calculator, or other model using family history as a basis for calculations. Patients found to have a lifetime risk of breast cancer of greater than 20% to 25% should be offered annual screening with magnetic resonance imaging in addition to mammography.

ATYPICAL HYPERPLASIA: INCREASED RISK

When biopsy study shows atypical ductal hyperplasia or atypical lobular hyperplasia, there is an increased risk of breast cancer.28,32 The absolute overall risk of developing breast cancer in 25 years is 30%, and that risk is further stratified based on the number of foci of atypia noted in the specimen.29

When core-needle biopsy study reveals atypical ductal hyperplasia in the tissue, there is a 15% to 30% risk of finding breast cancer with surgical excision.28 Surgical excision is therefore recommended for atypical ductal hyperplasia noted on core-needle biopsy.28

In contrast, when atypical lobular hyperplasia alone is noted, the risk of upstagingto malignancy varies widely—from 0% to 67%—although recent studies have noted risks of 1% to 3%.33,34 Thus, the decision for surgical excision is more variable. Generally, if the atypical lobular hyperplasia is noted incidentally, is not associated with a higher grade lesion, and is concordant with imaging, it is reasonable to closely monitor with serial imaging and physical examination. Excision is unnecessary.35

Patients found to have atypical hyperplasia on breast biopsy should receive counseling about risk-reducing medications. Selective estrogen receptor modulators such as tamoxifen and raloxifene have been shown to reduce the risk of breast cancer by as much as 86% in patients with atypical hyperplasia.36 Similarly, aromatase inhibitors such as exemestane and anastrozole reduce breast cancer risk by approximately 65%.37

References
  1. Eberl MM, Phillips RL Jr, Lamberts H, Okkes I, Mahoney MC. Characterizing breast symptoms in family practice. Ann Fam Med 2008; 6(6):528–533. doi:10.1370/afm.905
  2. Harvey JA, Mahoney MC, Newell MS, et al. ACR appropriateness criteria palpable breast masses. J Am Coll Radiol 2013; 10(10):742–749.e3. doi:10.1016/j.jacr.2013.06.013
  3. Ha R, Kim H, Mango V, Wynn R, Comstock C. Ultrasonographic features and clinical implications of benign palpable breast lesions in young women. Ultrasonography 2015; 34(1):66–70. doi:10.14366/usg.14043
  4. Provencher L, Hogue JC, Desbiens C, et al. Is clinical breast examination important for breast cancer detection? Curr Oncol 2016; 23(4):e332–e339. doi:10.3747/co.23.2881
  5. Scurr J, Hedger W, Morris P, Brown N. The prevalence, severity, and impact of breast pain in the general population. Breast J 2014; 20(5):508–513. doi:10.1111/tbj.12305
  6. Leddy R, Irshad A, Zerwas E, et al. Role of breast ultrasound and mammography in evaluating patients presenting with focal breast pain in the absence of a palpable lump. Breast J 2013; 19(6):582–589. doi:10.1111/tbj.12178
  7. Noroozian M, Stein LF, Gaetke-Udager K, Helvie MA. Long-term clinical outcomes in women with breast pain in the absence of additional clinical findings: mammography remains indicated. Breast Cancer Res Treat 2015; 149(2):417–424. doi:10.1007/s10549-014-3257-3
  8. Gateley CA, Miers M, Mansel RE, Hughes LE. Drug treatments for mastalgia: 17 years experience in the Cardiff Mastalgia Clinic. J R Soc Med 1992; 85(1):12–15. pmid:1548647
  9. Fentiman IS, Caleffi M, Hamed H, Chaudary MA. Dosage and duration of tamoxifen treatment for mastalgia: a controlled trial. Br J Surg 1988; 75(9):845–846. pmid:3052691
  10. Oksa S, Luukkaala T, Mäenpää J. Toremifene for premenstrual mastalgia: a randomised, placebo-controlled crossover study. BJOG 2006; 113(6):713–718. doi:10.1111/j.1471-0528.2006.00943.x
  11. Mirghafourvand M, Mohammad-Alizadeh-Charandabi S, Ahmadpour P, Javadzadeh Y. Effects of Vitex agnus and flaxseed on cyclic mastalgia: a randomized controlled trial. Complement Ther Med 2016; 24:90–95. doi:10.1016/j.ctim.2015.12.009
  12. Shobeiri F, Oshvandi K, Nazari M. Clinical effectiveness of vitamin E and vitamin B6 for improving pain severity in cyclic mastalgia. Iran J Nurs Midwifery Res 2015; 20(6):723–727. doi:10.4103/1735-9066.170003
  13. Thicke LA, Hazelton JK, Bauer BA, et al. Acupuncture for treatment of noncyclic breast pain: a pilot study. Am J Chin Med 2011; 39(6):1117–1129. doi:10.1142/S0192415X11009445
  14. Santen RJ, Mansel R. Benign breast disorders. N Engl J Med 2005; 353(3):275–285. doi:10.1056/NEJMra035692
  15. Gülay H, Bora S, Kìlìçturgay S, Hamaloglu E, Göksel HA. Management of nipple discharge. J Am Coll Surg 1994; 178(5):471–474. pmid:8167884
  16. Murad TM, Contesso G, Mouriesse H. Nipple discharge from the breast. Ann Surg 1982; 195(3):259–264. pmid:6277258
  17. Sakorafas GH. Nipple discharge: current diagnostic and therapeutic approaches. Cancer Treat Rev 2001; 27(5):275–282. doi:10.1053/ctrv.2001.0234
  18. Ashfaq A, Senior D, Pockaj BA, et al. Validation study of a modern treatment algorithm for nipple discharge. Am J Surg 2014; 208(2):222–227. doi:10.1016/j.amjsurg.2013.12.035
  19. Chen CY, Sun LM, Anderson BO. Paget disease of the breast: changing patterns of incidence, clinical presentation, and treatment in the US. Cancer 2006; 107(7):1448–1458. doi:10.1002/cncr.22137
  20. Kollmorgen DR, Varanasi JS, Edge SB, Carson WE 3rd. Paget's disease of the breast: a 33-year experience. J Am Coll Surg 1998; 187(2):171–177. pmid:9704964
  21. Hruska CB. Molecular breast imaging for screening in dense breasts: state of the art and future directions. AJR Am J Roentgenol 2017; 208(2):275–283. doi:10.2214/AJR.16.17131
  22. Melnikow J, Fenton JJ, Whitlock EP, et al. Supplemental screening for breast cancer in women with dense breasts: a systematic review for the US Preventive Services Task Force. Ann Intern Med 2016; 164(4):268–278. doi:10.7326/M15-1789
  23. American College of Radiology. Breast imaging reporting and data system (BI-RADS). Reston, VA: American College of Radiology; 2013.
  24. Brentnall AR, Harkness EF, Astley SM, et al. Mammographic density adds accuracy to both the Tyrer-Cuzick and Gail breast cancer risk models in a prospective UK screening cohort. Breast Cancer Res 2015; 17(1):147. doi:10.1186/s13058-015-0653-5
  25. Friedewald SM, Rafferty EA, Rose SL, et al. Breast cancer screening using tomosynthesis in combination with digital mammography. JAMA 2014; 311(24):2499–2507. doi:10.1001/jama.2014.6095
  26. Rafferty EA, Durand MA, Conant EF, et al. Breast cancer screening using tomosynthesis and digital mammography in dense and nondense breasts. JAMA 2016; 315(16):1784–1786. doi:10.1001/jama.2016.1708
  27. Venkatesan A, Chu P, Kerlikowske K, Sickles EA, Smith-Bindman R. Positive predictive value of specific mammographic findings according to reader and patient variables. Radiology 2009; 250(3):648–657. doi:10.1148/radiol.2503080541
  28. Hartmann LC, Sellers TA, Frost MH, et al. Benign breast disease and the risk of breast cancer. N Engl J Med 2005; 353(3):229–237. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa044383
  29. Hartmann LC, Degnim AC, Santen RJ, DuPont WD, Ghosh K. Atypical hyperplasia of the breast—risk assessment and management options. N Engl J Med 2015; 372(1):78–89. doi:10.1056/NEJMsr1407164
  30. Neal L, Sandhu NP, Hieken TJ, et al. Diagnosis and management of benign, atypical, and indeterminate breast lesions detected on core needle biopsy. Mayo Clin Proc 2014; 89(4):536–547. doi:10.1016/j.mayocp.2014.02.004
  31. Nakhlis F, Ahmadiyeh N, Lester S, Raza S, Lotfi P, Golshan M. Papilloma on core biopsy: excision vs observation. Ann Surg Oncol 2015; 22(5):1479–1482. doi:10.1245/s10434-014-4091-x
  32. Degnim AC, Dupont WE, Radisky DC, et al. Extent of atypical hyperplasia stratifies breast cancer risk in 2 independent cohorts of women. Cancer 2016; 122(19):2971-2978. doi:10.1002/cncr.30153
  33. Sen LQ, Berg WA, Hooley RJ, Carter GJ, Desouki MM, Sumkin JH. Core breast biopsies showing lobular carcinoma in situ should be excised and surveillance is reasonable for atypical lobular hyperplasia. AJR Am J Roentgenol 2016; 207(5):1132–1145. doi:10.2214/AJR.15.15425
  34. Nakhlis F, Gilmore L, Gelman R, et al. Incidence of adjacent synchronous invasive carcinoma and/or ductal carcinoma in situ in patient with lobular neoplasia on core biopsy: results from a prospective multi-institutional registry (TBCRC 020). Ann Surg Oncol 2016; 23(3):722–728. doi:10.1245/s10434-015-4922-4
  35. Racz JM, Carter JM, Degnim AC. Lobular neoplasia and atypical ductal hyperplasia on core biopsy: current surgical management recommendations. Ann Surg Oncol 2017; 24(10):2848–2854. doi:10.1245/s10434-017-5978-0
  36. Fisher B, Costantino JP, Wickerham DL, et al. Tamoxifen for the prevention of breast cancer: report of the National Surgical Adjuvant Breast and Bowel Project P-1 Study. J Natl Cancer Inst 1998; 90:1371–1388. doi:10.1093/jnci/dji372
  37. Goss PE, Ingle JN, Alés-Martínez JE, et al. Exemestane for breast-cancer prevention in postmenopausal women. N Engl J Med 2011; 364(25):2381–2391. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1103507
References
  1. Eberl MM, Phillips RL Jr, Lamberts H, Okkes I, Mahoney MC. Characterizing breast symptoms in family practice. Ann Fam Med 2008; 6(6):528–533. doi:10.1370/afm.905
  2. Harvey JA, Mahoney MC, Newell MS, et al. ACR appropriateness criteria palpable breast masses. J Am Coll Radiol 2013; 10(10):742–749.e3. doi:10.1016/j.jacr.2013.06.013
  3. Ha R, Kim H, Mango V, Wynn R, Comstock C. Ultrasonographic features and clinical implications of benign palpable breast lesions in young women. Ultrasonography 2015; 34(1):66–70. doi:10.14366/usg.14043
  4. Provencher L, Hogue JC, Desbiens C, et al. Is clinical breast examination important for breast cancer detection? Curr Oncol 2016; 23(4):e332–e339. doi:10.3747/co.23.2881
  5. Scurr J, Hedger W, Morris P, Brown N. The prevalence, severity, and impact of breast pain in the general population. Breast J 2014; 20(5):508–513. doi:10.1111/tbj.12305
  6. Leddy R, Irshad A, Zerwas E, et al. Role of breast ultrasound and mammography in evaluating patients presenting with focal breast pain in the absence of a palpable lump. Breast J 2013; 19(6):582–589. doi:10.1111/tbj.12178
  7. Noroozian M, Stein LF, Gaetke-Udager K, Helvie MA. Long-term clinical outcomes in women with breast pain in the absence of additional clinical findings: mammography remains indicated. Breast Cancer Res Treat 2015; 149(2):417–424. doi:10.1007/s10549-014-3257-3
  8. Gateley CA, Miers M, Mansel RE, Hughes LE. Drug treatments for mastalgia: 17 years experience in the Cardiff Mastalgia Clinic. J R Soc Med 1992; 85(1):12–15. pmid:1548647
  9. Fentiman IS, Caleffi M, Hamed H, Chaudary MA. Dosage and duration of tamoxifen treatment for mastalgia: a controlled trial. Br J Surg 1988; 75(9):845–846. pmid:3052691
  10. Oksa S, Luukkaala T, Mäenpää J. Toremifene for premenstrual mastalgia: a randomised, placebo-controlled crossover study. BJOG 2006; 113(6):713–718. doi:10.1111/j.1471-0528.2006.00943.x
  11. Mirghafourvand M, Mohammad-Alizadeh-Charandabi S, Ahmadpour P, Javadzadeh Y. Effects of Vitex agnus and flaxseed on cyclic mastalgia: a randomized controlled trial. Complement Ther Med 2016; 24:90–95. doi:10.1016/j.ctim.2015.12.009
  12. Shobeiri F, Oshvandi K, Nazari M. Clinical effectiveness of vitamin E and vitamin B6 for improving pain severity in cyclic mastalgia. Iran J Nurs Midwifery Res 2015; 20(6):723–727. doi:10.4103/1735-9066.170003
  13. Thicke LA, Hazelton JK, Bauer BA, et al. Acupuncture for treatment of noncyclic breast pain: a pilot study. Am J Chin Med 2011; 39(6):1117–1129. doi:10.1142/S0192415X11009445
  14. Santen RJ, Mansel R. Benign breast disorders. N Engl J Med 2005; 353(3):275–285. doi:10.1056/NEJMra035692
  15. Gülay H, Bora S, Kìlìçturgay S, Hamaloglu E, Göksel HA. Management of nipple discharge. J Am Coll Surg 1994; 178(5):471–474. pmid:8167884
  16. Murad TM, Contesso G, Mouriesse H. Nipple discharge from the breast. Ann Surg 1982; 195(3):259–264. pmid:6277258
  17. Sakorafas GH. Nipple discharge: current diagnostic and therapeutic approaches. Cancer Treat Rev 2001; 27(5):275–282. doi:10.1053/ctrv.2001.0234
  18. Ashfaq A, Senior D, Pockaj BA, et al. Validation study of a modern treatment algorithm for nipple discharge. Am J Surg 2014; 208(2):222–227. doi:10.1016/j.amjsurg.2013.12.035
  19. Chen CY, Sun LM, Anderson BO. Paget disease of the breast: changing patterns of incidence, clinical presentation, and treatment in the US. Cancer 2006; 107(7):1448–1458. doi:10.1002/cncr.22137
  20. Kollmorgen DR, Varanasi JS, Edge SB, Carson WE 3rd. Paget's disease of the breast: a 33-year experience. J Am Coll Surg 1998; 187(2):171–177. pmid:9704964
  21. Hruska CB. Molecular breast imaging for screening in dense breasts: state of the art and future directions. AJR Am J Roentgenol 2017; 208(2):275–283. doi:10.2214/AJR.16.17131
  22. Melnikow J, Fenton JJ, Whitlock EP, et al. Supplemental screening for breast cancer in women with dense breasts: a systematic review for the US Preventive Services Task Force. Ann Intern Med 2016; 164(4):268–278. doi:10.7326/M15-1789
  23. American College of Radiology. Breast imaging reporting and data system (BI-RADS). Reston, VA: American College of Radiology; 2013.
  24. Brentnall AR, Harkness EF, Astley SM, et al. Mammographic density adds accuracy to both the Tyrer-Cuzick and Gail breast cancer risk models in a prospective UK screening cohort. Breast Cancer Res 2015; 17(1):147. doi:10.1186/s13058-015-0653-5
  25. Friedewald SM, Rafferty EA, Rose SL, et al. Breast cancer screening using tomosynthesis in combination with digital mammography. JAMA 2014; 311(24):2499–2507. doi:10.1001/jama.2014.6095
  26. Rafferty EA, Durand MA, Conant EF, et al. Breast cancer screening using tomosynthesis and digital mammography in dense and nondense breasts. JAMA 2016; 315(16):1784–1786. doi:10.1001/jama.2016.1708
  27. Venkatesan A, Chu P, Kerlikowske K, Sickles EA, Smith-Bindman R. Positive predictive value of specific mammographic findings according to reader and patient variables. Radiology 2009; 250(3):648–657. doi:10.1148/radiol.2503080541
  28. Hartmann LC, Sellers TA, Frost MH, et al. Benign breast disease and the risk of breast cancer. N Engl J Med 2005; 353(3):229–237. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa044383
  29. Hartmann LC, Degnim AC, Santen RJ, DuPont WD, Ghosh K. Atypical hyperplasia of the breast—risk assessment and management options. N Engl J Med 2015; 372(1):78–89. doi:10.1056/NEJMsr1407164
  30. Neal L, Sandhu NP, Hieken TJ, et al. Diagnosis and management of benign, atypical, and indeterminate breast lesions detected on core needle biopsy. Mayo Clin Proc 2014; 89(4):536–547. doi:10.1016/j.mayocp.2014.02.004
  31. Nakhlis F, Ahmadiyeh N, Lester S, Raza S, Lotfi P, Golshan M. Papilloma on core biopsy: excision vs observation. Ann Surg Oncol 2015; 22(5):1479–1482. doi:10.1245/s10434-014-4091-x
  32. Degnim AC, Dupont WE, Radisky DC, et al. Extent of atypical hyperplasia stratifies breast cancer risk in 2 independent cohorts of women. Cancer 2016; 122(19):2971-2978. doi:10.1002/cncr.30153
  33. Sen LQ, Berg WA, Hooley RJ, Carter GJ, Desouki MM, Sumkin JH. Core breast biopsies showing lobular carcinoma in situ should be excised and surveillance is reasonable for atypical lobular hyperplasia. AJR Am J Roentgenol 2016; 207(5):1132–1145. doi:10.2214/AJR.15.15425
  34. Nakhlis F, Gilmore L, Gelman R, et al. Incidence of adjacent synchronous invasive carcinoma and/or ductal carcinoma in situ in patient with lobular neoplasia on core biopsy: results from a prospective multi-institutional registry (TBCRC 020). Ann Surg Oncol 2016; 23(3):722–728. doi:10.1245/s10434-015-4922-4
  35. Racz JM, Carter JM, Degnim AC. Lobular neoplasia and atypical ductal hyperplasia on core biopsy: current surgical management recommendations. Ann Surg Oncol 2017; 24(10):2848–2854. doi:10.1245/s10434-017-5978-0
  36. Fisher B, Costantino JP, Wickerham DL, et al. Tamoxifen for the prevention of breast cancer: report of the National Surgical Adjuvant Breast and Bowel Project P-1 Study. J Natl Cancer Inst 1998; 90:1371–1388. doi:10.1093/jnci/dji372
  37. Goss PE, Ingle JN, Alés-Martínez JE, et al. Exemestane for breast-cancer prevention in postmenopausal women. N Engl J Med 2011; 364(25):2381–2391. doi:10.1056/NEJMoa1103507
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Page Number
57-65
Page Number
57-65
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Common benign breast concerns for the primary care physician
Display Headline
Common benign breast concerns for the primary care physician
Legacy Keywords
breast, mass, benign, pain, discharge, BI-RADS, density, dense breasts, ultrasound, mammography, Paget disease, breast cancer, hyperplasia, cyst, Christine Klassen, Stephanie Hines, Karthik Ghosh
Legacy Keywords
breast, mass, benign, pain, discharge, BI-RADS, density, dense breasts, ultrasound, mammography, Paget disease, breast cancer, hyperplasia, cyst, Christine Klassen, Stephanie Hines, Karthik Ghosh
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • The two most common breast symptoms are lumps and pain.
  • Most breast problems are not caused by cancer.
  • Evaluation of any breast problem begins with a focused history followed by a breast examination and, when necessary, imaging.
  • If the results of the breast examination and imaging suggest a benign cause, no further follow-up is necessary.
  • If there is discordance between imaging and breast examination results, or if there is a high clinical suspicion of cancer, then consider serial follow-up examinations at short intervals, referral to a breast surgeon for excision, or both.
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Fri, 12/28/2018 - 14:15
Un-Gate On Date
Fri, 12/28/2018 - 14:15
Use ProPublica
CFC Schedule Remove Status
Fri, 12/28/2018 - 14:15
Article PDF Media

Who needs to carry an epinephrine autoinjector?

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 01/03/2019 - 09:38
Display Headline
Who needs to carry an epinephrine autoinjector?

Anaphylaxis is potentially fatal but can be prevented if the trigger is identified and avoided, and death can be avoided if episodes are treated promptly.

A consensus definition of anaphylaxis has been difficult to achieve, with slight variations among international guidelines. The World Allergy Organization classifies anaphylaxis as immunologic, nonimmunologic, or idiopathic.1 The National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases and the Food Allergy and Anaphylaxis Network highlight clinical symptoms and criteria.2 The International Consensus on Food Allergy describes reactions as being immunoglobulin E (IgE)-mediated, cell-mediated, or a combination of the 2 mechanisms.3

Despite the subtle differences in these definitions, all 3 international organizations have a common recommendation for anaphylaxis: once it is diagnosed, epinephrine is the treatment of choice.

EPINEPHRINE IS THE TREATMENT OF CHOICE FOR ANAPHYLAXIS

Anaphylaxis commonly results from exposure to foods, medications, and Hymenoptera venom.4 Avoiding triggers is key in preventing anaphylaxis but is not always possible.

Although epinephrine is the cornerstone of the emergency treatment of anaphylaxis, many patients instead receive antihistamines and corticosteroids as initial therapy. Some take these medications on their own, and some receive them in emergency departments and outpatient clinics.5

Diphenhydramine, a histamine 1 receptor antagonist, is often used as a first-line medication. But diphenhydramine has a slow onset of action, taking 80 minutes after an oral dose to suppress a histamine-induced cutaneous flare by 50%, and taking 52 minutes with intramuscular administration.6 Corticosteroids also have a slow onset of action. These drugs cannot prevent death in anaphylaxis, a condition in which the median time to respiratory or cardiac arrest is 30 minutes after ingestion of food, 15 minutes after envenomation, and 5 minutes after iatrogenic reactions.7

Combination therapy with diphenhydra­mine and a histamine 2 receptor antagonist (eg, cimetidine, famotidine) is also commonly used,8 but this combination offers no advantage in terms of onset of action, and a Cochrane review could find no definitive evidence for or against the use of histamine 2 receptor antagonists.9

Because of their slow onset of action, all of these should be second-line therapies, given after epinephrine. Epinephrine is the first line of treatment because it has a maximal pharmacokinetic effect (time to maximal peak serum level) within 10 minutes of intramuscular injection into the thigh.10,11

In addition, epinephrine acts on numerous receptors to antagonize the multiple pathologic effects of the mediators released during an anaphylactic episode. In contrast, antihistamines block only 1 mediator, while mediators other than histamine can be responsible for severe events and deaths.12,13

It is crucial that epinephrine be given immediately, as delay has been associated with fatalities.14 In addition, guidelines recommend repeating epinephrine dosing after 5 to 15 minutes if the response to the first dose is suboptimal.1,2 From 16% to 36% of patients may need a second dose.15–18 Therefore, many physicians recommend that patients at risk of anaphylaxis keep not 1 but 2 epinephrine autoinjectors on hand at all times, and so say the US guidelines for the management of anaphylaxis.19

WHO SHOULD CARRY AN EPINEPHRINE AUTOINJECTOR?

All published guidelines recommend epinephrine as the drug of choice for anaphylaxis. And an epinephrine autoinjector is indicated for anyone who has experienced an anaphylactic event or is at risk of one, and these patients should carry it with them at all times. Such individuals include those with food allergy or Hymenoptera hypersensitivity.

Food allergy

The foods that most often cause anaphylaxis are peanuts, tree nuts, fish, shellfish, milk, and eggs, but any food can cause a reaction.

The prevalence of food allergy has increased over time, and treatments are limited. Some food desensitization protocols look promising but are still in the research stages. The best treatment at this time is to avoid the offending food, but there are accidental exposures.

Hymenoptera hypersensitivity

Patients who have had anaphylaxis after being stung by insects such as bees, wasps, yellow-faced hornets, white-faced hornets, yellow jackets, and fire ants should be evaluated by an allergist. Skin testing and serum IgE testing helps properly diagnose Hymenoptera hypersensitivity.

Once the diagnosis is confirmed, venom immunotherapy should be considered. Some patients choose only to carry an epinephrine autoinjector and to avoid these insects as much as possible. However, most patients also choose to receive venom immunotherapy, because 80% to 90% of those who receive this treatment for 3 to 5 years do not have a systemic reaction if they are stung again.20

Regardless of whether they choose to undergo immunotherapy, sensitive patients should always carry an epinephrine autoinjector. This is also the case after treatment ends, since the therapy is not 100% effective.

 

 

PATIENTS FOR WHOM THE NEED MAY BE LESS CLEAR

In other patients who may be at increased risk, the mandate for an epinephrine autoinjector is less clear, and the decision to carry one is determined on an individual basis. Such individuals are those receiving allergen immunotherapy, with large local reactions to insect stings, with oral allergy syndrome, with mastocytosis, and with drug allergy. In these cases, the benefit vs the burden of carrying an autoinjector should be discussed with the patient.

Patients on allergen immunotherapy

National guidelines recommend that all patients who receive allergen immunotherapy be monitored in the clinic under a physician’s supervision for 30 minutes after the injection. Fortunately, life-threatening reactions occurring after 30 minutes are rare. But delayed systemic reactions can occur and may account for up to 50% of such events.21

Therefore, many physicians consider it prudent for patients on immunotherapy to carry an epinephrine autoinjector, but there is no consensus. A survey22 found that 13.5% of allergists did not prescribe the autoinjector for patients on immunotherapy, while 33.3% prescribed it for all their patients on immunotherapy, and the rest prescribed based on risk.

Since there are no national guidelines on epinephrine autoinjectors for patients on immunotherapy, the decision should be based on the patient’s risks and comorbidities and informed by discussion between the individual patient and his or her allergist.

Patients with large local reactions to insect stings

From 5% to 10% of patients who have large local reactions to insect stings are at risk of systemic reactions.20

Patients with oral allergy syndrome

Oral allergy syndrome, also known as pollen-food allergy, causes itching and mild swelling of the mouth, lips, and throat after eating fresh fruits and vegetables. The prevalence ranges from 2% to 10% of patients with allergies.23

A survey of allergists found that 20% of patients with oral allergy syndrome had experienced systemic symptoms.24 The survey also showed that the decision to prescribe an epinephrine autoinjector to these patients was highly variable. Only about 30% of allergists recommend epinephrine autoinjectors to patients with oral allergy syndrome, while most believe that the decision should be based on the individual’s symptoms and risk.

More research is needed in the area of food allergy. Because data are limited, there are no national guidelines on whether these patients should carry an epinephrine autoinjector. We agree with the Joint Task Force on Practice Parameters14 recommendation that the decision be made on an individual basis following discussion between the patient and physician. 

Patients with mastocytosis

Patients with mastocytosis and a history of anaphylaxis are at increased risk for systemic reactions to Hymenoptera venom.

Patients with medication allergy

Once medication allergy has been diagnosed, avoidance is usually effective, obviating the need for an epinephrine autoinjector, although the physician has the option of prescribing one.

CAUTIONS, NOT CONTRAINDICATIONS

Physicians may be reluctant to prescribe an epinephrine autoinjector because of the risk of an adverse reaction in patients with hypertension, coronary artery disease, or arrhythmias, and in elderly patients taking multiple drugs, especially drugs that can interact with epinephrine. Nevertheless, there is no absolute contraindication to the use of epinephrine in anaphylaxis.

In patients with atherosclerosis and cardiovascular disease

Epinephrine increases vasoconstriction, heart rate, and cardiac force of contraction. These effects are beneficial during anaphylaxis, but in rare cases patients have experienced myocardial infarction and acute coronary syndrome after receiving intravenous epinephrine.25 These incidents have naturally prompted reluctance to prescribe it in susceptible patients with coronary disease during anaphylaxis.

Yet epinephrine may not be solely to blame for these adverse responses. Mast cells are abundant in the heart, and their release of mediators can also result in adverse cardiac manifestations, including myocardial infarction.26

Conversely, some drugs used to treat cardiovascular disease can worsen anaphylaxis.

Beta-blockers can cause bronchospasm and decrease cardiac contractility. They can also blunt the pharmacologic effects of epinephrine. There is concern that epinephrine may produce dangerous elevations of blood pressure in patients taking beta-blockers by unopposed alpha-adrenergic stimulation and reflex vagotonic effects.27 And there is evidence that beta-blockers may increase the risk and severity of reactions. One study reported that patients taking beta-blockers are more than 8 times more likely to be hospitalized due to anaphylactoid reaction with bronchospasm.28

Beta-blockers and, to a lesser extent, angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors have been shown to increase the risk of anaphylaxis in the emergency department.29,30 However, some investigators have not found beta-blockers to be a risk factor. A study evaluating anaphylactoid reactions from contrast media found no statistically significant higher risk in patients taking beta-blockers.31 Similarly, a study of 3,178 patients on beta-blockers receiving venom immunotherapy or allergen immunotherapy found no increase in the frequency of systemic reactions.32 Nevertheless, overall, more studies support the hypothesis that beta-blockers may be an additional risk factor in anaphylaxis.33

Thus, clinicians treating patients with cardiovascular disease and anaphylaxis face a dilemma. Although there is concern in this population, epinephrine should not be withheld in patients with cardiovascular disease who are experiencing an anaphylactic event.33 If epinephrine is not administered, the patient could die.

Elderly patients on multiple medications

Older patients are also at risk of anaphylaxis. But clinicians are reluctant to treat older patients with epinephrine because of concerns about adverse effects.

Epinephrine dispensing rates vary substantially in different age groups: 1.44% for patients under age 17, 0.9% for those ages 17 to 64, and 0.32% for those age 65 or older.34 A Canadian study of 492 patients with anaphylaxis in the emergency department showed that those over age 50 received epinephrine less often than younger patients (36.1% vs 60.5%).35 Cardiovascular complications were more frequent in the older group, occurring in 4 (9.1%) of the 44 older patients who received epinephrine compared with 1 (0.4%) of the 225 younger patients who received it. On the other hand, the rate of adverse effects from subcutaneous epinephrine was no different in older asthma patients compared with younger patients.36

Many older patients take multiple medications, raising concern about adverse effects. Commonly prescribed medications in the elderly can affect the actions of epinephrine. Monoamine oxidase inhibitors retard the catabolism of epinephrine. Tricyclic antidepressants may decrease the reuptake of catecholamines by neurons and thus interfere with the degradation of epinephrine. Digoxin has a narrow therapeutic window and can potentially increase the risk of arrhythmias when given with epinephrine.

Although the clinician must be cautious in treating older patients who have comorbidities, these are not sufficient to withhold prescribing an epinephrine autoinjector to elderly patients at risk of anaphylaxis.

 

 

INJECTOR OPTIONS


Epinephrine autoinjectors come preloaded for prompt delivery of the drug. They are intended primarily for use by patients themselves in unsupervised settings in suspected anaphylaxis. Simplicity of use and safety must be considered in such a setting so that patients can use the device correctly and are not incorrectly dosed.

Several models are commercially available, with different ergonomic designs and sizes. EpiPen, the first one marketed in the United States, was introduced in 1987. One device (Auvi-Q) contains an audio chip that gives step-by-step instructions at the time of use. It is hoped that this device will reduce errors in usage during this stressful time for patients and caregivers.

In the United States, epinephrine autoinjectors contain either 0.15 or 0.30 mg of the drug, but some clinicians believe this may not be enough. The UK Resuscitation Council recommends 0.50 mg for patients over age 12,37 and an epinephrine autoinjector with that dose is available in Europe.

Subcutaneous vs intramuscular delivery

The package insert for some epinephrine autoinjectors says the injector can be used to treat anaphylaxis by both subcutaneous and intramuscular administration. However, the routes are not equivalent.

The goal in anaphylaxis is to quickly achieve high tissue and plasma epinephrine concentrations, and studies have found that injection into the vastus lateralis muscle, but not the deltoid muscle, results in faster time to peak plasma concentration: 8 minutes for injection in the vastus lateralis muscle and 34 minutes for subcutaneous delivery.10,11 In addition, injection in the vastus lateralis muscle results in a higher peak plasma concentration than the subcutaneous or deltoid route. Based on these data, intramuscular injection into the vastus lateralis muscle in the thigh appears to be the preferred route of administration of epinephrine.

Obese patients may need a longer needle

Research on the original autoinjector was conducted by the US military, which wanted a rapidly effective and easy-to-use antidote for battlefield exposure to poison gas. The resulting device had 2 separate spring-loaded syringes, 1 containing pralidoxime chloride and the other atropine sulfate. To enable its use through the thick fabric of a chemical warfare suit, the needles were 2.2 cm long.

The first commercial autoinjector to contain epinephrine was made by Survival Technology (Bethesda, MD) in the mid-1970s. The manufacturer considered a 2.2-cm needle to be too long, and the first commercially available epinephrine autoinjector, EpiPen, had a 1.43-cm needle for adult use.

Since then, needle lengths have ranged from 1.17 to 2.5 cm to accommodate different skin-to-muscle depths, with shorter needles for children and longer needles for obese adults.38

However, the prevalence of obesity is high and continues to rise.39 Obesity raises concern that the needles in epinephrine autoinjectors may be too short for the preferred intramuscular delivery, resulting in subcutaneous deposition.

A study that used computed tomography of the thigh found that 1 (2%) of 50 men and 21 (42%) of 50 women studied had a subcutaneous tissue depth greater than 1.43 cm, the needle length in EpiPen. These were not anaphylaxis patients, but the findings suggest that many patients—especially women—may be getting subcutaneous instead of intramuscular delivery with this device.40

Another study that used ultrasonography showed that the 1.43-cm EpiPen needle was too short for 36 (31%) of 116 adults.41 Women were 6.4 times more likely than men to encounter this problem. Other risk factors include higher body mass index, short height, and thicker thighs.

Emerade, an injector with a 2.5-cm needle, is available in some European countries. A longer needle may be helpful in some cases. but we do not yet have enough data to determine the optimal needle length.

Conversely, some children may need shorter needles and may in fact be at risk of having the needle penetrate bone.42 The US Food and Drug Administration recently approved a shorter needle for an epinephrine autoinjector (Auvi-Q) to be used in children weighing 7.5 kg to 15 kg.

BARRIERS TO USING EPINEPHRINE AUTOINJECTORS

Many patients do not use their epinephrine autoinjector in times of anaphylaxis or do not have one with them. Common reasons cited by respondents in a survey43 of 1,385 patients included the following:

They took an oral antihistamine instead (38%).

They never received a prescription for an epinephrine autoinjector (28%).

They thought their symptoms were mild and would resolve with time (13%).

They were afraid (6%). There are reports of accidental injection, typically into fingers, hands, and thumbs. Fortunately, most accidental injections do not require a hand surgeon evaluation or surgery.44 Conservative therapy and monitoring of the injection site are sufficient in most cases.

They could not afford an epinephrine autoinjector (1%).43 Mylan Pharmaceuticals infamously increased the price of its EpiPen to more than $600 for a package of 2 pens. Generic devices are available in the United States but are still too expensive for some patients and are cumbersome to carry.

However, even expensive epinephrine autoinjectors may be cost-effective. Epidemiologic studies have found that patients who did not use an epinephrine autoinjector incurred a higher burden of cost due to emergency department visits and inpatient hospitalizations.45

As a do-it-yourself option, some resourceful patients are obtaining autoinjectors intended for insulin injection, replacing the needle, and filling the injector with epinephrine, at a cost of about $30. (The manufacturer does not endorse this off-label use of their device—www.owenmumford.com/us/patients/if-you-need-to-inject.) Least costly of all is to prescribe multidose vials of epinephrine and regular syringes and teach patients and their caregivers how to draw up the proper dose and give themselves an injection—in essence going back to what was done before 1987.

It was past its expiration date (2%).43 Failure to refill the prescription is common. A California Kaiser Permanente study46 showed that only 46% of patients refilled their epinephrine autoinjector prescription at least once, and the refill rate decreased over time: 43% at 1 to 2 year follow-up, 35% at 3 to 4 years, and 30% at 5 years or longer. Based on these data, it is imperative to educate patients regarding the importance of replacing the epinephrine autoinjector when the old one expires.

NEED FOR PATIENT EDUCATION

Even though prompt treatment with epinephrine decreases fatalities, it continues to be underused in the community. In addition, it is often prescribed without adequate training in its use and appropriate emphasis on the need to keep the device on hand at all times and to replace it in a timely manner if it is used or has expired. Physicians need to educate patients on how to avoid triggers and how to recognize symptoms of anaphylaxis whenever they prescribe an epinephrine autoinjector.

References
  1. Simons FE, Ardusso LR, Bilò MB, et al. International consensus on (ICON) anaphylaxis. World Allergy Organ J 2014; 7(1):9. doi:10.1186/1939-4551-7-9
  2. NIAID-Sponsored Expert Panel; Boyce JA, Assa’ad A, Burks AW, et al. Guidelines for the diagnosis and management of food allergy in the United States: report of the NIAID-sponsored expert panel. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2010; 126(6 suppl):S1–S58. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2010.10.007
  3. Burks AW, Tang M, Sicherer S, et al. ICON: food allergy. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2012; 129(4):906–920. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2012.02.001
  4. Lieberman P, Carmago CA Jr, Bohlke K, et al. Epidemiology of anaphylaxis: findings of the American College of Allergy, Asthma, and Immunology. Epidemiology of Anaphylaxis Working Group. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2006; 97(5):596–602. doi:10.1016/S1081-1206(10)61086-1
  5. Kemp SF, Lockey RF, Simons FE; World Allergy Organization ad hoc Committee on Epinephrine in Anaphylaxis. Epinephrine: the drug of choice for anaphylaxis—a statement of the World Allergy Organization. World Allergy Organ J 2008; 1(suppl 7):S18–S26. doi:10.1097/WOX.0b013e31817c9338
  6. Jones DH, Romero FA, Casale TB. Time-dependent inhibition of histamine-induced cutaneous responses by oral and intramuscular diphenhydramine and oral fexofenadine. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2008; 100(5):452–456. doi:10.1016/S1081-1206(10)60470-X
  7. Pumphrey RS. Lessons for management of anaphylaxis from a study of fatal reactions. Clin Exp Allerg 2000; 30(8):1144–1150. pmid:10931122
  8. Runge JW, Martinez JC, Caravati EM, Williamson SG, Hartsell SC. Histamine antagonists in the treatment of acute allergic reactions. Ann Emerg Med 1992; 21:237–242. pmid:1536481
  9. Sheikh A, Simons FE, Barbour V, Worth A. Adrenaline auto-injectors for the treatment of anaphylaxis with and without cardiovascular collapse in the community. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2012; (8):CD008935. doi:10.1002/14651858.CD008935.pub2
  10. Simons FE, Gu X, Simons KJ. Epinephrine absorption in adults: intramuscular versus subcutaneous injection. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2001; 108(5):871–873. doi:10.1067/mai.2001.119409
  11. Simons FE, Roberts JR, Gu X, Simons KJ. Epinephrine absorption in children with a history of anaphylaxis. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1998; 101(1 pt 1):33–37. doi:10.1016/S0091-6749(98)70190-3
  12. Vadas P. The platelet-activating factor pathway in food allergy and anaphylaxis. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2016; 117(5):455–457. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2016.05.003
  13. Stone SF, Brown SG. Mediators released during human anaphylaxis. Curr Allergy Asthma Rep 2012; 12(1):33–41. doi:10.1007/s11882-011-0231-6
  14. Lieberman P, Nicklas RA, Oppenheimer J, et al. The diagnosis and management of anaphylaxis practice parameter: 2010 update. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2010; 126(3):477–480.e1–e42. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2010.06.022
  15. Kemp SF, Lockey RF, Simons FE; World Allergy Organization ad hoc Committee on Epinephrine in Anaphylaxis. Epinephrine: the drug of choice for anaphylaxis. A statement of the World Allergy Organization. Allergy 2008; 63(8):1061–1070. doi:10.1111/j.1398-9995.2008.01733.x
  16. Oren E, Banderji A, Clark S, Camargo CA Jr. Food-induced anaphylaxis and repeated epinephrine treatments. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2007; 99(5):429–432. doi:10.1016/S1081-1206(10)60568-6
  17. Uguz A, Lack G, Pumphrey R, et al. Allergic reactions in the community: a questionnaire survey of members of the anaphylaxis campaign. Clin Exp Allergy 2005; 35(6):746–750. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2222.2005.02257.x
  18. Kelso JM. A second dose of epinephrine for anaphylaxis: how often needed and how to carry. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2006; 117(2):464–465. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2005.11.015
  19. Lieberman P, Nicklas RA, Randolph C, et al. Anaphylaxis—a practice parameter update 2015. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2015; 115(5):341–384. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2015.07.019
  20. Golden BK, Demain J, Freeman T, et al. Stinging insect hypersensitivity: a practice parameter update 2016. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2017; 118(1):28–54. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2016.10.031
  21. Cox L, Nelson H, Lockey R, et al. Allergen immunotherapy: a practice parameter third update. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2011; 127(suppl 1):S1–S55. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2010.09.034
  22. Gupta P, Gerrish PK, Silverman B, Schneider A. Current practices among allergists on writing self-injectable epinephrine prescriptions for immunotherapy patients. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2012; 129(2):571–572.e1-e2. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2011.09.033
  23. Ortolani C, Pastorello EA, Farioli L, et al. IgE-mediated allergy from vegetable allergens. Ann Allergy 1993; 71:470–476. pmid: 8250353
  24. Ma S, Shcherer SH, Nowak-Wegrzyn A. A survey on the management of pollen food allergy syndrome in allergy practices. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2003;112:784–788. doi:10.1016/S0091-6749(03)02008-6
  25. Shaver KJ, Adams C, Weiss SJ. Acute myocardial infarction after administration of low dose intravenous epinephrine for anaphylaxis. CJEM 2006; 8(4):289–294. pmid:17324313
  26. Triggiani M, Patella V, Staiano RI, Granata F, Marone G. Allergy and the cardiovascular system. Clin Exp Immunol 2008; 153(suppl 1):7–11. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2249.2008.03714.x
  27. Gilman AG, Rail TW, Nies AS, Taylor P, eds. Goodman and Gilman’s the Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics. 8th ed. New York, NY: Pergamon Press; 1990.
  28. Lang DM, Alpern MB, Visintainer PF, Smith ST. Increased risk for anaphylactoid reaction from contrast media in patients on beta-adrenergic blockers or with asthma. Ann Intern Med 1991; 115(14):270–276. pmid:1677239
  29. Nassiri M, Babina M, Dölle S, Edenharter G, Ruëff F, Worm M. Ramipril and metoprolol intake aggravate human and murine anaphylaxis: evidence for direct mast cell priming. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2015; 135(2):491–499. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2014.09.004
  30. Lee S, Hess EP, Nestler DM, et al. Antihypertensive medication use is associated with increased organ system involvement and hospitalization in emergency department patients with anaphylaxis. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2013; 131(4):1103–1108. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2013.01.011
  31. Greenberger PA, Meyers SN, Kramer BL, Kramer BL. Effects of beta-adrenergic and calcium antagonists on the development of anaphylactoid reactions from radiographic contrast media during cardiac angiography. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1987; 80(5):698–702. pmid:2890682
  32. Hepner MJ, Ownby DR, Anderson JA, Rowe MS, Sears-Ewald D, Brown EB. Risk of systemic reactions in patients taking beta-blocker drugs receiving allergen immunotherapy injections. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1990; 86(3 pt 1):407–411. pmid:1976666
  33. Lieberman P, Simons FE. Anaphylaxis and cardiovascular disease: therapeutic dilemmas. Clin Exp Allergy 2015; 45(8):1288–1295. doi:10.1111/cea.12520
  34. Simons FE, Peterson S, Black CD. Epinephrine dispensing patterns for an out-of-hospital population: a novel approach to studying the epidemiology of anaphylaxis. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2002; 110(4):647–651. pmid:12373275
  35. Kawano T, Scheuermeyer FX, Stenstrom R, Rowe BH, Grafstein E, Grunau B. Epinephrine use in older patients with anaphylaxis: clinical outcomes and cardiovascular complications. Resuscitation 2017; 112:53–58. doi:10.1016/j.resuscitation.2016.12.020
  36. Cydulka R, Davison R, Grammer L, Parker M, Mathews J 4th. The use of epinephrine in the treatment of older adult asthmatics. Ann Emerg Med 1988; 17(4):322–326. pmid:3354935
  37. Soar J, Pumphrey R, Cant A, et al; Working Group of the Resuscitation Council (UK). Emergency treatment of anaphylactic reactions—guidelines for healthcare providers. Resuscitation 2008; 77(2):157–169. doi:10.1016/j.resuscitation.2008.02.001
  38. Dreborg S, Wen X, Kim L, et al. Do epinephrine auto-injectors have an unsuitable needle length in children and adolescents at risk for anaphylaxis from food allergy? Allergy Asthma Clin Immunol 2016; 12:11. doi:10.1186/s13223-016-0110-8
  39. Ogden CL, Carroll MD, Kit BK, Flegal KM. Prevalence of childhood and adult obesity in the United States, 2011–2012. JAMA 2014; 311(8):806–814. doi:10.1001/jama.2014.732
  40. Song TT, Nelson MR, Chang JH, Engler RJ, Chowdhury BA. Adequacy of the epinephrine autoinjector needle length in delivering epinephrine to the intramuscular tissues. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2005; 94(5):539–542. doi:10.1016/S1081-1206(10)61130-1
  41. Bhalla MC, Gable BD, Frey JA, Reichenbach MR, Wilber ST. Predictors of epinephrine autoinjector needle length inadequacy. Am J Emerg Med 2013; 31(12):1671–1676. doi:10.1016/j.ajem.2013.09.001
  42. Kim H, Dinakar C, McInnis P, et al. Inadequacy of current pediatric epinephrine autoinjector needle length for use in infants and toddlers. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2017; 118(6):719–725.e1. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2017.03.017
  43. Simons FE, Clark S, Camargo CA Jr. Anaphylaxis in the community: learning from the survivors. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2009; 124(2):301–306. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2009.03.050
  44. Muck AE, Bebarta VS, Borys DJ, Morgan DL. Six years of epinephrine digital injections: absence of significant local or systemic effects. Ann Emerg Med 2010; 56(3):270–274. doi:10.1016/j.annemergmed.2010.02.019
  45. Fleming JT, Clark S, Camargo CA Jr, Rudders SA. Early treatment of food-induced anaphylaxis with epinephrine is associated with a lower risk of hospitalization. J Allergy Clin Immunol Pract 2015; 3(1):57–62. doi:10.1016/j.jaip.2014.07.004
  46. Kaplan MS, Jung SY, Chiang ML. Epinephrine autoinjector refill history in an HMO. Curr Allergy Asthma Rep 2011; 11(1):65–70. doi:10.1007/s11882-010-0155-6
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information

T. Ted Song, DO, FAAAI, FACP
Clinical Associate Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Division of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, University of Washington, Seattle

Phil Lieberman, MD
Department of Medicine and Pediatrics, University of Tennessee College of Medicine, Memphis

Address: T. Ted Song, DO, Department of Medicine, Division of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, University of Washington, 1203 Bridgeport Way SW, Lakewood, WA 98499; [email protected]

Dr. Song has disclosed membership on advisory committees or review panels for Allergopharma, and teaching and speaking for Novartis and Teva. Dr. Lieberman has disclosed consulting for Kaléo.

Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
66-72
Legacy Keywords
epinephrine, autoinjector, anaphylaxis, allergy, EpiPen, bee sting, wasp, Hymenoptera, anaphylactic shock, Ted Song, Phil Lieberman
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

T. Ted Song, DO, FAAAI, FACP
Clinical Associate Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Division of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, University of Washington, Seattle

Phil Lieberman, MD
Department of Medicine and Pediatrics, University of Tennessee College of Medicine, Memphis

Address: T. Ted Song, DO, Department of Medicine, Division of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, University of Washington, 1203 Bridgeport Way SW, Lakewood, WA 98499; [email protected]

Dr. Song has disclosed membership on advisory committees or review panels for Allergopharma, and teaching and speaking for Novartis and Teva. Dr. Lieberman has disclosed consulting for Kaléo.

Author and Disclosure Information

T. Ted Song, DO, FAAAI, FACP
Clinical Associate Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Division of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, University of Washington, Seattle

Phil Lieberman, MD
Department of Medicine and Pediatrics, University of Tennessee College of Medicine, Memphis

Address: T. Ted Song, DO, Department of Medicine, Division of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, University of Washington, 1203 Bridgeport Way SW, Lakewood, WA 98499; [email protected]

Dr. Song has disclosed membership on advisory committees or review panels for Allergopharma, and teaching and speaking for Novartis and Teva. Dr. Lieberman has disclosed consulting for Kaléo.

Article PDF
Article PDF
Related Articles

Anaphylaxis is potentially fatal but can be prevented if the trigger is identified and avoided, and death can be avoided if episodes are treated promptly.

A consensus definition of anaphylaxis has been difficult to achieve, with slight variations among international guidelines. The World Allergy Organization classifies anaphylaxis as immunologic, nonimmunologic, or idiopathic.1 The National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases and the Food Allergy and Anaphylaxis Network highlight clinical symptoms and criteria.2 The International Consensus on Food Allergy describes reactions as being immunoglobulin E (IgE)-mediated, cell-mediated, or a combination of the 2 mechanisms.3

Despite the subtle differences in these definitions, all 3 international organizations have a common recommendation for anaphylaxis: once it is diagnosed, epinephrine is the treatment of choice.

EPINEPHRINE IS THE TREATMENT OF CHOICE FOR ANAPHYLAXIS

Anaphylaxis commonly results from exposure to foods, medications, and Hymenoptera venom.4 Avoiding triggers is key in preventing anaphylaxis but is not always possible.

Although epinephrine is the cornerstone of the emergency treatment of anaphylaxis, many patients instead receive antihistamines and corticosteroids as initial therapy. Some take these medications on their own, and some receive them in emergency departments and outpatient clinics.5

Diphenhydramine, a histamine 1 receptor antagonist, is often used as a first-line medication. But diphenhydramine has a slow onset of action, taking 80 minutes after an oral dose to suppress a histamine-induced cutaneous flare by 50%, and taking 52 minutes with intramuscular administration.6 Corticosteroids also have a slow onset of action. These drugs cannot prevent death in anaphylaxis, a condition in which the median time to respiratory or cardiac arrest is 30 minutes after ingestion of food, 15 minutes after envenomation, and 5 minutes after iatrogenic reactions.7

Combination therapy with diphenhydra­mine and a histamine 2 receptor antagonist (eg, cimetidine, famotidine) is also commonly used,8 but this combination offers no advantage in terms of onset of action, and a Cochrane review could find no definitive evidence for or against the use of histamine 2 receptor antagonists.9

Because of their slow onset of action, all of these should be second-line therapies, given after epinephrine. Epinephrine is the first line of treatment because it has a maximal pharmacokinetic effect (time to maximal peak serum level) within 10 minutes of intramuscular injection into the thigh.10,11

In addition, epinephrine acts on numerous receptors to antagonize the multiple pathologic effects of the mediators released during an anaphylactic episode. In contrast, antihistamines block only 1 mediator, while mediators other than histamine can be responsible for severe events and deaths.12,13

It is crucial that epinephrine be given immediately, as delay has been associated with fatalities.14 In addition, guidelines recommend repeating epinephrine dosing after 5 to 15 minutes if the response to the first dose is suboptimal.1,2 From 16% to 36% of patients may need a second dose.15–18 Therefore, many physicians recommend that patients at risk of anaphylaxis keep not 1 but 2 epinephrine autoinjectors on hand at all times, and so say the US guidelines for the management of anaphylaxis.19

WHO SHOULD CARRY AN EPINEPHRINE AUTOINJECTOR?

All published guidelines recommend epinephrine as the drug of choice for anaphylaxis. And an epinephrine autoinjector is indicated for anyone who has experienced an anaphylactic event or is at risk of one, and these patients should carry it with them at all times. Such individuals include those with food allergy or Hymenoptera hypersensitivity.

Food allergy

The foods that most often cause anaphylaxis are peanuts, tree nuts, fish, shellfish, milk, and eggs, but any food can cause a reaction.

The prevalence of food allergy has increased over time, and treatments are limited. Some food desensitization protocols look promising but are still in the research stages. The best treatment at this time is to avoid the offending food, but there are accidental exposures.

Hymenoptera hypersensitivity

Patients who have had anaphylaxis after being stung by insects such as bees, wasps, yellow-faced hornets, white-faced hornets, yellow jackets, and fire ants should be evaluated by an allergist. Skin testing and serum IgE testing helps properly diagnose Hymenoptera hypersensitivity.

Once the diagnosis is confirmed, venom immunotherapy should be considered. Some patients choose only to carry an epinephrine autoinjector and to avoid these insects as much as possible. However, most patients also choose to receive venom immunotherapy, because 80% to 90% of those who receive this treatment for 3 to 5 years do not have a systemic reaction if they are stung again.20

Regardless of whether they choose to undergo immunotherapy, sensitive patients should always carry an epinephrine autoinjector. This is also the case after treatment ends, since the therapy is not 100% effective.

 

 

PATIENTS FOR WHOM THE NEED MAY BE LESS CLEAR

In other patients who may be at increased risk, the mandate for an epinephrine autoinjector is less clear, and the decision to carry one is determined on an individual basis. Such individuals are those receiving allergen immunotherapy, with large local reactions to insect stings, with oral allergy syndrome, with mastocytosis, and with drug allergy. In these cases, the benefit vs the burden of carrying an autoinjector should be discussed with the patient.

Patients on allergen immunotherapy

National guidelines recommend that all patients who receive allergen immunotherapy be monitored in the clinic under a physician’s supervision for 30 minutes after the injection. Fortunately, life-threatening reactions occurring after 30 minutes are rare. But delayed systemic reactions can occur and may account for up to 50% of such events.21

Therefore, many physicians consider it prudent for patients on immunotherapy to carry an epinephrine autoinjector, but there is no consensus. A survey22 found that 13.5% of allergists did not prescribe the autoinjector for patients on immunotherapy, while 33.3% prescribed it for all their patients on immunotherapy, and the rest prescribed based on risk.

Since there are no national guidelines on epinephrine autoinjectors for patients on immunotherapy, the decision should be based on the patient’s risks and comorbidities and informed by discussion between the individual patient and his or her allergist.

Patients with large local reactions to insect stings

From 5% to 10% of patients who have large local reactions to insect stings are at risk of systemic reactions.20

Patients with oral allergy syndrome

Oral allergy syndrome, also known as pollen-food allergy, causes itching and mild swelling of the mouth, lips, and throat after eating fresh fruits and vegetables. The prevalence ranges from 2% to 10% of patients with allergies.23

A survey of allergists found that 20% of patients with oral allergy syndrome had experienced systemic symptoms.24 The survey also showed that the decision to prescribe an epinephrine autoinjector to these patients was highly variable. Only about 30% of allergists recommend epinephrine autoinjectors to patients with oral allergy syndrome, while most believe that the decision should be based on the individual’s symptoms and risk.

More research is needed in the area of food allergy. Because data are limited, there are no national guidelines on whether these patients should carry an epinephrine autoinjector. We agree with the Joint Task Force on Practice Parameters14 recommendation that the decision be made on an individual basis following discussion between the patient and physician. 

Patients with mastocytosis

Patients with mastocytosis and a history of anaphylaxis are at increased risk for systemic reactions to Hymenoptera venom.

Patients with medication allergy

Once medication allergy has been diagnosed, avoidance is usually effective, obviating the need for an epinephrine autoinjector, although the physician has the option of prescribing one.

CAUTIONS, NOT CONTRAINDICATIONS

Physicians may be reluctant to prescribe an epinephrine autoinjector because of the risk of an adverse reaction in patients with hypertension, coronary artery disease, or arrhythmias, and in elderly patients taking multiple drugs, especially drugs that can interact with epinephrine. Nevertheless, there is no absolute contraindication to the use of epinephrine in anaphylaxis.

In patients with atherosclerosis and cardiovascular disease

Epinephrine increases vasoconstriction, heart rate, and cardiac force of contraction. These effects are beneficial during anaphylaxis, but in rare cases patients have experienced myocardial infarction and acute coronary syndrome after receiving intravenous epinephrine.25 These incidents have naturally prompted reluctance to prescribe it in susceptible patients with coronary disease during anaphylaxis.

Yet epinephrine may not be solely to blame for these adverse responses. Mast cells are abundant in the heart, and their release of mediators can also result in adverse cardiac manifestations, including myocardial infarction.26

Conversely, some drugs used to treat cardiovascular disease can worsen anaphylaxis.

Beta-blockers can cause bronchospasm and decrease cardiac contractility. They can also blunt the pharmacologic effects of epinephrine. There is concern that epinephrine may produce dangerous elevations of blood pressure in patients taking beta-blockers by unopposed alpha-adrenergic stimulation and reflex vagotonic effects.27 And there is evidence that beta-blockers may increase the risk and severity of reactions. One study reported that patients taking beta-blockers are more than 8 times more likely to be hospitalized due to anaphylactoid reaction with bronchospasm.28

Beta-blockers and, to a lesser extent, angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors have been shown to increase the risk of anaphylaxis in the emergency department.29,30 However, some investigators have not found beta-blockers to be a risk factor. A study evaluating anaphylactoid reactions from contrast media found no statistically significant higher risk in patients taking beta-blockers.31 Similarly, a study of 3,178 patients on beta-blockers receiving venom immunotherapy or allergen immunotherapy found no increase in the frequency of systemic reactions.32 Nevertheless, overall, more studies support the hypothesis that beta-blockers may be an additional risk factor in anaphylaxis.33

Thus, clinicians treating patients with cardiovascular disease and anaphylaxis face a dilemma. Although there is concern in this population, epinephrine should not be withheld in patients with cardiovascular disease who are experiencing an anaphylactic event.33 If epinephrine is not administered, the patient could die.

Elderly patients on multiple medications

Older patients are also at risk of anaphylaxis. But clinicians are reluctant to treat older patients with epinephrine because of concerns about adverse effects.

Epinephrine dispensing rates vary substantially in different age groups: 1.44% for patients under age 17, 0.9% for those ages 17 to 64, and 0.32% for those age 65 or older.34 A Canadian study of 492 patients with anaphylaxis in the emergency department showed that those over age 50 received epinephrine less often than younger patients (36.1% vs 60.5%).35 Cardiovascular complications were more frequent in the older group, occurring in 4 (9.1%) of the 44 older patients who received epinephrine compared with 1 (0.4%) of the 225 younger patients who received it. On the other hand, the rate of adverse effects from subcutaneous epinephrine was no different in older asthma patients compared with younger patients.36

Many older patients take multiple medications, raising concern about adverse effects. Commonly prescribed medications in the elderly can affect the actions of epinephrine. Monoamine oxidase inhibitors retard the catabolism of epinephrine. Tricyclic antidepressants may decrease the reuptake of catecholamines by neurons and thus interfere with the degradation of epinephrine. Digoxin has a narrow therapeutic window and can potentially increase the risk of arrhythmias when given with epinephrine.

Although the clinician must be cautious in treating older patients who have comorbidities, these are not sufficient to withhold prescribing an epinephrine autoinjector to elderly patients at risk of anaphylaxis.

 

 

INJECTOR OPTIONS


Epinephrine autoinjectors come preloaded for prompt delivery of the drug. They are intended primarily for use by patients themselves in unsupervised settings in suspected anaphylaxis. Simplicity of use and safety must be considered in such a setting so that patients can use the device correctly and are not incorrectly dosed.

Several models are commercially available, with different ergonomic designs and sizes. EpiPen, the first one marketed in the United States, was introduced in 1987. One device (Auvi-Q) contains an audio chip that gives step-by-step instructions at the time of use. It is hoped that this device will reduce errors in usage during this stressful time for patients and caregivers.

In the United States, epinephrine autoinjectors contain either 0.15 or 0.30 mg of the drug, but some clinicians believe this may not be enough. The UK Resuscitation Council recommends 0.50 mg for patients over age 12,37 and an epinephrine autoinjector with that dose is available in Europe.

Subcutaneous vs intramuscular delivery

The package insert for some epinephrine autoinjectors says the injector can be used to treat anaphylaxis by both subcutaneous and intramuscular administration. However, the routes are not equivalent.

The goal in anaphylaxis is to quickly achieve high tissue and plasma epinephrine concentrations, and studies have found that injection into the vastus lateralis muscle, but not the deltoid muscle, results in faster time to peak plasma concentration: 8 minutes for injection in the vastus lateralis muscle and 34 minutes for subcutaneous delivery.10,11 In addition, injection in the vastus lateralis muscle results in a higher peak plasma concentration than the subcutaneous or deltoid route. Based on these data, intramuscular injection into the vastus lateralis muscle in the thigh appears to be the preferred route of administration of epinephrine.

Obese patients may need a longer needle

Research on the original autoinjector was conducted by the US military, which wanted a rapidly effective and easy-to-use antidote for battlefield exposure to poison gas. The resulting device had 2 separate spring-loaded syringes, 1 containing pralidoxime chloride and the other atropine sulfate. To enable its use through the thick fabric of a chemical warfare suit, the needles were 2.2 cm long.

The first commercial autoinjector to contain epinephrine was made by Survival Technology (Bethesda, MD) in the mid-1970s. The manufacturer considered a 2.2-cm needle to be too long, and the first commercially available epinephrine autoinjector, EpiPen, had a 1.43-cm needle for adult use.

Since then, needle lengths have ranged from 1.17 to 2.5 cm to accommodate different skin-to-muscle depths, with shorter needles for children and longer needles for obese adults.38

However, the prevalence of obesity is high and continues to rise.39 Obesity raises concern that the needles in epinephrine autoinjectors may be too short for the preferred intramuscular delivery, resulting in subcutaneous deposition.

A study that used computed tomography of the thigh found that 1 (2%) of 50 men and 21 (42%) of 50 women studied had a subcutaneous tissue depth greater than 1.43 cm, the needle length in EpiPen. These were not anaphylaxis patients, but the findings suggest that many patients—especially women—may be getting subcutaneous instead of intramuscular delivery with this device.40

Another study that used ultrasonography showed that the 1.43-cm EpiPen needle was too short for 36 (31%) of 116 adults.41 Women were 6.4 times more likely than men to encounter this problem. Other risk factors include higher body mass index, short height, and thicker thighs.

Emerade, an injector with a 2.5-cm needle, is available in some European countries. A longer needle may be helpful in some cases. but we do not yet have enough data to determine the optimal needle length.

Conversely, some children may need shorter needles and may in fact be at risk of having the needle penetrate bone.42 The US Food and Drug Administration recently approved a shorter needle for an epinephrine autoinjector (Auvi-Q) to be used in children weighing 7.5 kg to 15 kg.

BARRIERS TO USING EPINEPHRINE AUTOINJECTORS

Many patients do not use their epinephrine autoinjector in times of anaphylaxis or do not have one with them. Common reasons cited by respondents in a survey43 of 1,385 patients included the following:

They took an oral antihistamine instead (38%).

They never received a prescription for an epinephrine autoinjector (28%).

They thought their symptoms were mild and would resolve with time (13%).

They were afraid (6%). There are reports of accidental injection, typically into fingers, hands, and thumbs. Fortunately, most accidental injections do not require a hand surgeon evaluation or surgery.44 Conservative therapy and monitoring of the injection site are sufficient in most cases.

They could not afford an epinephrine autoinjector (1%).43 Mylan Pharmaceuticals infamously increased the price of its EpiPen to more than $600 for a package of 2 pens. Generic devices are available in the United States but are still too expensive for some patients and are cumbersome to carry.

However, even expensive epinephrine autoinjectors may be cost-effective. Epidemiologic studies have found that patients who did not use an epinephrine autoinjector incurred a higher burden of cost due to emergency department visits and inpatient hospitalizations.45

As a do-it-yourself option, some resourceful patients are obtaining autoinjectors intended for insulin injection, replacing the needle, and filling the injector with epinephrine, at a cost of about $30. (The manufacturer does not endorse this off-label use of their device—www.owenmumford.com/us/patients/if-you-need-to-inject.) Least costly of all is to prescribe multidose vials of epinephrine and regular syringes and teach patients and their caregivers how to draw up the proper dose and give themselves an injection—in essence going back to what was done before 1987.

It was past its expiration date (2%).43 Failure to refill the prescription is common. A California Kaiser Permanente study46 showed that only 46% of patients refilled their epinephrine autoinjector prescription at least once, and the refill rate decreased over time: 43% at 1 to 2 year follow-up, 35% at 3 to 4 years, and 30% at 5 years or longer. Based on these data, it is imperative to educate patients regarding the importance of replacing the epinephrine autoinjector when the old one expires.

NEED FOR PATIENT EDUCATION

Even though prompt treatment with epinephrine decreases fatalities, it continues to be underused in the community. In addition, it is often prescribed without adequate training in its use and appropriate emphasis on the need to keep the device on hand at all times and to replace it in a timely manner if it is used or has expired. Physicians need to educate patients on how to avoid triggers and how to recognize symptoms of anaphylaxis whenever they prescribe an epinephrine autoinjector.

Anaphylaxis is potentially fatal but can be prevented if the trigger is identified and avoided, and death can be avoided if episodes are treated promptly.

A consensus definition of anaphylaxis has been difficult to achieve, with slight variations among international guidelines. The World Allergy Organization classifies anaphylaxis as immunologic, nonimmunologic, or idiopathic.1 The National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases and the Food Allergy and Anaphylaxis Network highlight clinical symptoms and criteria.2 The International Consensus on Food Allergy describes reactions as being immunoglobulin E (IgE)-mediated, cell-mediated, or a combination of the 2 mechanisms.3

Despite the subtle differences in these definitions, all 3 international organizations have a common recommendation for anaphylaxis: once it is diagnosed, epinephrine is the treatment of choice.

EPINEPHRINE IS THE TREATMENT OF CHOICE FOR ANAPHYLAXIS

Anaphylaxis commonly results from exposure to foods, medications, and Hymenoptera venom.4 Avoiding triggers is key in preventing anaphylaxis but is not always possible.

Although epinephrine is the cornerstone of the emergency treatment of anaphylaxis, many patients instead receive antihistamines and corticosteroids as initial therapy. Some take these medications on their own, and some receive them in emergency departments and outpatient clinics.5

Diphenhydramine, a histamine 1 receptor antagonist, is often used as a first-line medication. But diphenhydramine has a slow onset of action, taking 80 minutes after an oral dose to suppress a histamine-induced cutaneous flare by 50%, and taking 52 minutes with intramuscular administration.6 Corticosteroids also have a slow onset of action. These drugs cannot prevent death in anaphylaxis, a condition in which the median time to respiratory or cardiac arrest is 30 minutes after ingestion of food, 15 minutes after envenomation, and 5 minutes after iatrogenic reactions.7

Combination therapy with diphenhydra­mine and a histamine 2 receptor antagonist (eg, cimetidine, famotidine) is also commonly used,8 but this combination offers no advantage in terms of onset of action, and a Cochrane review could find no definitive evidence for or against the use of histamine 2 receptor antagonists.9

Because of their slow onset of action, all of these should be second-line therapies, given after epinephrine. Epinephrine is the first line of treatment because it has a maximal pharmacokinetic effect (time to maximal peak serum level) within 10 minutes of intramuscular injection into the thigh.10,11

In addition, epinephrine acts on numerous receptors to antagonize the multiple pathologic effects of the mediators released during an anaphylactic episode. In contrast, antihistamines block only 1 mediator, while mediators other than histamine can be responsible for severe events and deaths.12,13

It is crucial that epinephrine be given immediately, as delay has been associated with fatalities.14 In addition, guidelines recommend repeating epinephrine dosing after 5 to 15 minutes if the response to the first dose is suboptimal.1,2 From 16% to 36% of patients may need a second dose.15–18 Therefore, many physicians recommend that patients at risk of anaphylaxis keep not 1 but 2 epinephrine autoinjectors on hand at all times, and so say the US guidelines for the management of anaphylaxis.19

WHO SHOULD CARRY AN EPINEPHRINE AUTOINJECTOR?

All published guidelines recommend epinephrine as the drug of choice for anaphylaxis. And an epinephrine autoinjector is indicated for anyone who has experienced an anaphylactic event or is at risk of one, and these patients should carry it with them at all times. Such individuals include those with food allergy or Hymenoptera hypersensitivity.

Food allergy

The foods that most often cause anaphylaxis are peanuts, tree nuts, fish, shellfish, milk, and eggs, but any food can cause a reaction.

The prevalence of food allergy has increased over time, and treatments are limited. Some food desensitization protocols look promising but are still in the research stages. The best treatment at this time is to avoid the offending food, but there are accidental exposures.

Hymenoptera hypersensitivity

Patients who have had anaphylaxis after being stung by insects such as bees, wasps, yellow-faced hornets, white-faced hornets, yellow jackets, and fire ants should be evaluated by an allergist. Skin testing and serum IgE testing helps properly diagnose Hymenoptera hypersensitivity.

Once the diagnosis is confirmed, venom immunotherapy should be considered. Some patients choose only to carry an epinephrine autoinjector and to avoid these insects as much as possible. However, most patients also choose to receive venom immunotherapy, because 80% to 90% of those who receive this treatment for 3 to 5 years do not have a systemic reaction if they are stung again.20

Regardless of whether they choose to undergo immunotherapy, sensitive patients should always carry an epinephrine autoinjector. This is also the case after treatment ends, since the therapy is not 100% effective.

 

 

PATIENTS FOR WHOM THE NEED MAY BE LESS CLEAR

In other patients who may be at increased risk, the mandate for an epinephrine autoinjector is less clear, and the decision to carry one is determined on an individual basis. Such individuals are those receiving allergen immunotherapy, with large local reactions to insect stings, with oral allergy syndrome, with mastocytosis, and with drug allergy. In these cases, the benefit vs the burden of carrying an autoinjector should be discussed with the patient.

Patients on allergen immunotherapy

National guidelines recommend that all patients who receive allergen immunotherapy be monitored in the clinic under a physician’s supervision for 30 minutes after the injection. Fortunately, life-threatening reactions occurring after 30 minutes are rare. But delayed systemic reactions can occur and may account for up to 50% of such events.21

Therefore, many physicians consider it prudent for patients on immunotherapy to carry an epinephrine autoinjector, but there is no consensus. A survey22 found that 13.5% of allergists did not prescribe the autoinjector for patients on immunotherapy, while 33.3% prescribed it for all their patients on immunotherapy, and the rest prescribed based on risk.

Since there are no national guidelines on epinephrine autoinjectors for patients on immunotherapy, the decision should be based on the patient’s risks and comorbidities and informed by discussion between the individual patient and his or her allergist.

Patients with large local reactions to insect stings

From 5% to 10% of patients who have large local reactions to insect stings are at risk of systemic reactions.20

Patients with oral allergy syndrome

Oral allergy syndrome, also known as pollen-food allergy, causes itching and mild swelling of the mouth, lips, and throat after eating fresh fruits and vegetables. The prevalence ranges from 2% to 10% of patients with allergies.23

A survey of allergists found that 20% of patients with oral allergy syndrome had experienced systemic symptoms.24 The survey also showed that the decision to prescribe an epinephrine autoinjector to these patients was highly variable. Only about 30% of allergists recommend epinephrine autoinjectors to patients with oral allergy syndrome, while most believe that the decision should be based on the individual’s symptoms and risk.

More research is needed in the area of food allergy. Because data are limited, there are no national guidelines on whether these patients should carry an epinephrine autoinjector. We agree with the Joint Task Force on Practice Parameters14 recommendation that the decision be made on an individual basis following discussion between the patient and physician. 

Patients with mastocytosis

Patients with mastocytosis and a history of anaphylaxis are at increased risk for systemic reactions to Hymenoptera venom.

Patients with medication allergy

Once medication allergy has been diagnosed, avoidance is usually effective, obviating the need for an epinephrine autoinjector, although the physician has the option of prescribing one.

CAUTIONS, NOT CONTRAINDICATIONS

Physicians may be reluctant to prescribe an epinephrine autoinjector because of the risk of an adverse reaction in patients with hypertension, coronary artery disease, or arrhythmias, and in elderly patients taking multiple drugs, especially drugs that can interact with epinephrine. Nevertheless, there is no absolute contraindication to the use of epinephrine in anaphylaxis.

In patients with atherosclerosis and cardiovascular disease

Epinephrine increases vasoconstriction, heart rate, and cardiac force of contraction. These effects are beneficial during anaphylaxis, but in rare cases patients have experienced myocardial infarction and acute coronary syndrome after receiving intravenous epinephrine.25 These incidents have naturally prompted reluctance to prescribe it in susceptible patients with coronary disease during anaphylaxis.

Yet epinephrine may not be solely to blame for these adverse responses. Mast cells are abundant in the heart, and their release of mediators can also result in adverse cardiac manifestations, including myocardial infarction.26

Conversely, some drugs used to treat cardiovascular disease can worsen anaphylaxis.

Beta-blockers can cause bronchospasm and decrease cardiac contractility. They can also blunt the pharmacologic effects of epinephrine. There is concern that epinephrine may produce dangerous elevations of blood pressure in patients taking beta-blockers by unopposed alpha-adrenergic stimulation and reflex vagotonic effects.27 And there is evidence that beta-blockers may increase the risk and severity of reactions. One study reported that patients taking beta-blockers are more than 8 times more likely to be hospitalized due to anaphylactoid reaction with bronchospasm.28

Beta-blockers and, to a lesser extent, angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors have been shown to increase the risk of anaphylaxis in the emergency department.29,30 However, some investigators have not found beta-blockers to be a risk factor. A study evaluating anaphylactoid reactions from contrast media found no statistically significant higher risk in patients taking beta-blockers.31 Similarly, a study of 3,178 patients on beta-blockers receiving venom immunotherapy or allergen immunotherapy found no increase in the frequency of systemic reactions.32 Nevertheless, overall, more studies support the hypothesis that beta-blockers may be an additional risk factor in anaphylaxis.33

Thus, clinicians treating patients with cardiovascular disease and anaphylaxis face a dilemma. Although there is concern in this population, epinephrine should not be withheld in patients with cardiovascular disease who are experiencing an anaphylactic event.33 If epinephrine is not administered, the patient could die.

Elderly patients on multiple medications

Older patients are also at risk of anaphylaxis. But clinicians are reluctant to treat older patients with epinephrine because of concerns about adverse effects.

Epinephrine dispensing rates vary substantially in different age groups: 1.44% for patients under age 17, 0.9% for those ages 17 to 64, and 0.32% for those age 65 or older.34 A Canadian study of 492 patients with anaphylaxis in the emergency department showed that those over age 50 received epinephrine less often than younger patients (36.1% vs 60.5%).35 Cardiovascular complications were more frequent in the older group, occurring in 4 (9.1%) of the 44 older patients who received epinephrine compared with 1 (0.4%) of the 225 younger patients who received it. On the other hand, the rate of adverse effects from subcutaneous epinephrine was no different in older asthma patients compared with younger patients.36

Many older patients take multiple medications, raising concern about adverse effects. Commonly prescribed medications in the elderly can affect the actions of epinephrine. Monoamine oxidase inhibitors retard the catabolism of epinephrine. Tricyclic antidepressants may decrease the reuptake of catecholamines by neurons and thus interfere with the degradation of epinephrine. Digoxin has a narrow therapeutic window and can potentially increase the risk of arrhythmias when given with epinephrine.

Although the clinician must be cautious in treating older patients who have comorbidities, these are not sufficient to withhold prescribing an epinephrine autoinjector to elderly patients at risk of anaphylaxis.

 

 

INJECTOR OPTIONS


Epinephrine autoinjectors come preloaded for prompt delivery of the drug. They are intended primarily for use by patients themselves in unsupervised settings in suspected anaphylaxis. Simplicity of use and safety must be considered in such a setting so that patients can use the device correctly and are not incorrectly dosed.

Several models are commercially available, with different ergonomic designs and sizes. EpiPen, the first one marketed in the United States, was introduced in 1987. One device (Auvi-Q) contains an audio chip that gives step-by-step instructions at the time of use. It is hoped that this device will reduce errors in usage during this stressful time for patients and caregivers.

In the United States, epinephrine autoinjectors contain either 0.15 or 0.30 mg of the drug, but some clinicians believe this may not be enough. The UK Resuscitation Council recommends 0.50 mg for patients over age 12,37 and an epinephrine autoinjector with that dose is available in Europe.

Subcutaneous vs intramuscular delivery

The package insert for some epinephrine autoinjectors says the injector can be used to treat anaphylaxis by both subcutaneous and intramuscular administration. However, the routes are not equivalent.

The goal in anaphylaxis is to quickly achieve high tissue and plasma epinephrine concentrations, and studies have found that injection into the vastus lateralis muscle, but not the deltoid muscle, results in faster time to peak plasma concentration: 8 minutes for injection in the vastus lateralis muscle and 34 minutes for subcutaneous delivery.10,11 In addition, injection in the vastus lateralis muscle results in a higher peak plasma concentration than the subcutaneous or deltoid route. Based on these data, intramuscular injection into the vastus lateralis muscle in the thigh appears to be the preferred route of administration of epinephrine.

Obese patients may need a longer needle

Research on the original autoinjector was conducted by the US military, which wanted a rapidly effective and easy-to-use antidote for battlefield exposure to poison gas. The resulting device had 2 separate spring-loaded syringes, 1 containing pralidoxime chloride and the other atropine sulfate. To enable its use through the thick fabric of a chemical warfare suit, the needles were 2.2 cm long.

The first commercial autoinjector to contain epinephrine was made by Survival Technology (Bethesda, MD) in the mid-1970s. The manufacturer considered a 2.2-cm needle to be too long, and the first commercially available epinephrine autoinjector, EpiPen, had a 1.43-cm needle for adult use.

Since then, needle lengths have ranged from 1.17 to 2.5 cm to accommodate different skin-to-muscle depths, with shorter needles for children and longer needles for obese adults.38

However, the prevalence of obesity is high and continues to rise.39 Obesity raises concern that the needles in epinephrine autoinjectors may be too short for the preferred intramuscular delivery, resulting in subcutaneous deposition.

A study that used computed tomography of the thigh found that 1 (2%) of 50 men and 21 (42%) of 50 women studied had a subcutaneous tissue depth greater than 1.43 cm, the needle length in EpiPen. These were not anaphylaxis patients, but the findings suggest that many patients—especially women—may be getting subcutaneous instead of intramuscular delivery with this device.40

Another study that used ultrasonography showed that the 1.43-cm EpiPen needle was too short for 36 (31%) of 116 adults.41 Women were 6.4 times more likely than men to encounter this problem. Other risk factors include higher body mass index, short height, and thicker thighs.

Emerade, an injector with a 2.5-cm needle, is available in some European countries. A longer needle may be helpful in some cases. but we do not yet have enough data to determine the optimal needle length.

Conversely, some children may need shorter needles and may in fact be at risk of having the needle penetrate bone.42 The US Food and Drug Administration recently approved a shorter needle for an epinephrine autoinjector (Auvi-Q) to be used in children weighing 7.5 kg to 15 kg.

BARRIERS TO USING EPINEPHRINE AUTOINJECTORS

Many patients do not use their epinephrine autoinjector in times of anaphylaxis or do not have one with them. Common reasons cited by respondents in a survey43 of 1,385 patients included the following:

They took an oral antihistamine instead (38%).

They never received a prescription for an epinephrine autoinjector (28%).

They thought their symptoms were mild and would resolve with time (13%).

They were afraid (6%). There are reports of accidental injection, typically into fingers, hands, and thumbs. Fortunately, most accidental injections do not require a hand surgeon evaluation or surgery.44 Conservative therapy and monitoring of the injection site are sufficient in most cases.

They could not afford an epinephrine autoinjector (1%).43 Mylan Pharmaceuticals infamously increased the price of its EpiPen to more than $600 for a package of 2 pens. Generic devices are available in the United States but are still too expensive for some patients and are cumbersome to carry.

However, even expensive epinephrine autoinjectors may be cost-effective. Epidemiologic studies have found that patients who did not use an epinephrine autoinjector incurred a higher burden of cost due to emergency department visits and inpatient hospitalizations.45

As a do-it-yourself option, some resourceful patients are obtaining autoinjectors intended for insulin injection, replacing the needle, and filling the injector with epinephrine, at a cost of about $30. (The manufacturer does not endorse this off-label use of their device—www.owenmumford.com/us/patients/if-you-need-to-inject.) Least costly of all is to prescribe multidose vials of epinephrine and regular syringes and teach patients and their caregivers how to draw up the proper dose and give themselves an injection—in essence going back to what was done before 1987.

It was past its expiration date (2%).43 Failure to refill the prescription is common. A California Kaiser Permanente study46 showed that only 46% of patients refilled their epinephrine autoinjector prescription at least once, and the refill rate decreased over time: 43% at 1 to 2 year follow-up, 35% at 3 to 4 years, and 30% at 5 years or longer. Based on these data, it is imperative to educate patients regarding the importance of replacing the epinephrine autoinjector when the old one expires.

NEED FOR PATIENT EDUCATION

Even though prompt treatment with epinephrine decreases fatalities, it continues to be underused in the community. In addition, it is often prescribed without adequate training in its use and appropriate emphasis on the need to keep the device on hand at all times and to replace it in a timely manner if it is used or has expired. Physicians need to educate patients on how to avoid triggers and how to recognize symptoms of anaphylaxis whenever they prescribe an epinephrine autoinjector.

References
  1. Simons FE, Ardusso LR, Bilò MB, et al. International consensus on (ICON) anaphylaxis. World Allergy Organ J 2014; 7(1):9. doi:10.1186/1939-4551-7-9
  2. NIAID-Sponsored Expert Panel; Boyce JA, Assa’ad A, Burks AW, et al. Guidelines for the diagnosis and management of food allergy in the United States: report of the NIAID-sponsored expert panel. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2010; 126(6 suppl):S1–S58. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2010.10.007
  3. Burks AW, Tang M, Sicherer S, et al. ICON: food allergy. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2012; 129(4):906–920. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2012.02.001
  4. Lieberman P, Carmago CA Jr, Bohlke K, et al. Epidemiology of anaphylaxis: findings of the American College of Allergy, Asthma, and Immunology. Epidemiology of Anaphylaxis Working Group. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2006; 97(5):596–602. doi:10.1016/S1081-1206(10)61086-1
  5. Kemp SF, Lockey RF, Simons FE; World Allergy Organization ad hoc Committee on Epinephrine in Anaphylaxis. Epinephrine: the drug of choice for anaphylaxis—a statement of the World Allergy Organization. World Allergy Organ J 2008; 1(suppl 7):S18–S26. doi:10.1097/WOX.0b013e31817c9338
  6. Jones DH, Romero FA, Casale TB. Time-dependent inhibition of histamine-induced cutaneous responses by oral and intramuscular diphenhydramine and oral fexofenadine. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2008; 100(5):452–456. doi:10.1016/S1081-1206(10)60470-X
  7. Pumphrey RS. Lessons for management of anaphylaxis from a study of fatal reactions. Clin Exp Allerg 2000; 30(8):1144–1150. pmid:10931122
  8. Runge JW, Martinez JC, Caravati EM, Williamson SG, Hartsell SC. Histamine antagonists in the treatment of acute allergic reactions. Ann Emerg Med 1992; 21:237–242. pmid:1536481
  9. Sheikh A, Simons FE, Barbour V, Worth A. Adrenaline auto-injectors for the treatment of anaphylaxis with and without cardiovascular collapse in the community. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2012; (8):CD008935. doi:10.1002/14651858.CD008935.pub2
  10. Simons FE, Gu X, Simons KJ. Epinephrine absorption in adults: intramuscular versus subcutaneous injection. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2001; 108(5):871–873. doi:10.1067/mai.2001.119409
  11. Simons FE, Roberts JR, Gu X, Simons KJ. Epinephrine absorption in children with a history of anaphylaxis. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1998; 101(1 pt 1):33–37. doi:10.1016/S0091-6749(98)70190-3
  12. Vadas P. The platelet-activating factor pathway in food allergy and anaphylaxis. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2016; 117(5):455–457. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2016.05.003
  13. Stone SF, Brown SG. Mediators released during human anaphylaxis. Curr Allergy Asthma Rep 2012; 12(1):33–41. doi:10.1007/s11882-011-0231-6
  14. Lieberman P, Nicklas RA, Oppenheimer J, et al. The diagnosis and management of anaphylaxis practice parameter: 2010 update. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2010; 126(3):477–480.e1–e42. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2010.06.022
  15. Kemp SF, Lockey RF, Simons FE; World Allergy Organization ad hoc Committee on Epinephrine in Anaphylaxis. Epinephrine: the drug of choice for anaphylaxis. A statement of the World Allergy Organization. Allergy 2008; 63(8):1061–1070. doi:10.1111/j.1398-9995.2008.01733.x
  16. Oren E, Banderji A, Clark S, Camargo CA Jr. Food-induced anaphylaxis and repeated epinephrine treatments. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2007; 99(5):429–432. doi:10.1016/S1081-1206(10)60568-6
  17. Uguz A, Lack G, Pumphrey R, et al. Allergic reactions in the community: a questionnaire survey of members of the anaphylaxis campaign. Clin Exp Allergy 2005; 35(6):746–750. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2222.2005.02257.x
  18. Kelso JM. A second dose of epinephrine for anaphylaxis: how often needed and how to carry. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2006; 117(2):464–465. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2005.11.015
  19. Lieberman P, Nicklas RA, Randolph C, et al. Anaphylaxis—a practice parameter update 2015. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2015; 115(5):341–384. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2015.07.019
  20. Golden BK, Demain J, Freeman T, et al. Stinging insect hypersensitivity: a practice parameter update 2016. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2017; 118(1):28–54. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2016.10.031
  21. Cox L, Nelson H, Lockey R, et al. Allergen immunotherapy: a practice parameter third update. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2011; 127(suppl 1):S1–S55. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2010.09.034
  22. Gupta P, Gerrish PK, Silverman B, Schneider A. Current practices among allergists on writing self-injectable epinephrine prescriptions for immunotherapy patients. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2012; 129(2):571–572.e1-e2. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2011.09.033
  23. Ortolani C, Pastorello EA, Farioli L, et al. IgE-mediated allergy from vegetable allergens. Ann Allergy 1993; 71:470–476. pmid: 8250353
  24. Ma S, Shcherer SH, Nowak-Wegrzyn A. A survey on the management of pollen food allergy syndrome in allergy practices. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2003;112:784–788. doi:10.1016/S0091-6749(03)02008-6
  25. Shaver KJ, Adams C, Weiss SJ. Acute myocardial infarction after administration of low dose intravenous epinephrine for anaphylaxis. CJEM 2006; 8(4):289–294. pmid:17324313
  26. Triggiani M, Patella V, Staiano RI, Granata F, Marone G. Allergy and the cardiovascular system. Clin Exp Immunol 2008; 153(suppl 1):7–11. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2249.2008.03714.x
  27. Gilman AG, Rail TW, Nies AS, Taylor P, eds. Goodman and Gilman’s the Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics. 8th ed. New York, NY: Pergamon Press; 1990.
  28. Lang DM, Alpern MB, Visintainer PF, Smith ST. Increased risk for anaphylactoid reaction from contrast media in patients on beta-adrenergic blockers or with asthma. Ann Intern Med 1991; 115(14):270–276. pmid:1677239
  29. Nassiri M, Babina M, Dölle S, Edenharter G, Ruëff F, Worm M. Ramipril and metoprolol intake aggravate human and murine anaphylaxis: evidence for direct mast cell priming. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2015; 135(2):491–499. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2014.09.004
  30. Lee S, Hess EP, Nestler DM, et al. Antihypertensive medication use is associated with increased organ system involvement and hospitalization in emergency department patients with anaphylaxis. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2013; 131(4):1103–1108. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2013.01.011
  31. Greenberger PA, Meyers SN, Kramer BL, Kramer BL. Effects of beta-adrenergic and calcium antagonists on the development of anaphylactoid reactions from radiographic contrast media during cardiac angiography. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1987; 80(5):698–702. pmid:2890682
  32. Hepner MJ, Ownby DR, Anderson JA, Rowe MS, Sears-Ewald D, Brown EB. Risk of systemic reactions in patients taking beta-blocker drugs receiving allergen immunotherapy injections. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1990; 86(3 pt 1):407–411. pmid:1976666
  33. Lieberman P, Simons FE. Anaphylaxis and cardiovascular disease: therapeutic dilemmas. Clin Exp Allergy 2015; 45(8):1288–1295. doi:10.1111/cea.12520
  34. Simons FE, Peterson S, Black CD. Epinephrine dispensing patterns for an out-of-hospital population: a novel approach to studying the epidemiology of anaphylaxis. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2002; 110(4):647–651. pmid:12373275
  35. Kawano T, Scheuermeyer FX, Stenstrom R, Rowe BH, Grafstein E, Grunau B. Epinephrine use in older patients with anaphylaxis: clinical outcomes and cardiovascular complications. Resuscitation 2017; 112:53–58. doi:10.1016/j.resuscitation.2016.12.020
  36. Cydulka R, Davison R, Grammer L, Parker M, Mathews J 4th. The use of epinephrine in the treatment of older adult asthmatics. Ann Emerg Med 1988; 17(4):322–326. pmid:3354935
  37. Soar J, Pumphrey R, Cant A, et al; Working Group of the Resuscitation Council (UK). Emergency treatment of anaphylactic reactions—guidelines for healthcare providers. Resuscitation 2008; 77(2):157–169. doi:10.1016/j.resuscitation.2008.02.001
  38. Dreborg S, Wen X, Kim L, et al. Do epinephrine auto-injectors have an unsuitable needle length in children and adolescents at risk for anaphylaxis from food allergy? Allergy Asthma Clin Immunol 2016; 12:11. doi:10.1186/s13223-016-0110-8
  39. Ogden CL, Carroll MD, Kit BK, Flegal KM. Prevalence of childhood and adult obesity in the United States, 2011–2012. JAMA 2014; 311(8):806–814. doi:10.1001/jama.2014.732
  40. Song TT, Nelson MR, Chang JH, Engler RJ, Chowdhury BA. Adequacy of the epinephrine autoinjector needle length in delivering epinephrine to the intramuscular tissues. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2005; 94(5):539–542. doi:10.1016/S1081-1206(10)61130-1
  41. Bhalla MC, Gable BD, Frey JA, Reichenbach MR, Wilber ST. Predictors of epinephrine autoinjector needle length inadequacy. Am J Emerg Med 2013; 31(12):1671–1676. doi:10.1016/j.ajem.2013.09.001
  42. Kim H, Dinakar C, McInnis P, et al. Inadequacy of current pediatric epinephrine autoinjector needle length for use in infants and toddlers. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2017; 118(6):719–725.e1. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2017.03.017
  43. Simons FE, Clark S, Camargo CA Jr. Anaphylaxis in the community: learning from the survivors. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2009; 124(2):301–306. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2009.03.050
  44. Muck AE, Bebarta VS, Borys DJ, Morgan DL. Six years of epinephrine digital injections: absence of significant local or systemic effects. Ann Emerg Med 2010; 56(3):270–274. doi:10.1016/j.annemergmed.2010.02.019
  45. Fleming JT, Clark S, Camargo CA Jr, Rudders SA. Early treatment of food-induced anaphylaxis with epinephrine is associated with a lower risk of hospitalization. J Allergy Clin Immunol Pract 2015; 3(1):57–62. doi:10.1016/j.jaip.2014.07.004
  46. Kaplan MS, Jung SY, Chiang ML. Epinephrine autoinjector refill history in an HMO. Curr Allergy Asthma Rep 2011; 11(1):65–70. doi:10.1007/s11882-010-0155-6
References
  1. Simons FE, Ardusso LR, Bilò MB, et al. International consensus on (ICON) anaphylaxis. World Allergy Organ J 2014; 7(1):9. doi:10.1186/1939-4551-7-9
  2. NIAID-Sponsored Expert Panel; Boyce JA, Assa’ad A, Burks AW, et al. Guidelines for the diagnosis and management of food allergy in the United States: report of the NIAID-sponsored expert panel. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2010; 126(6 suppl):S1–S58. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2010.10.007
  3. Burks AW, Tang M, Sicherer S, et al. ICON: food allergy. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2012; 129(4):906–920. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2012.02.001
  4. Lieberman P, Carmago CA Jr, Bohlke K, et al. Epidemiology of anaphylaxis: findings of the American College of Allergy, Asthma, and Immunology. Epidemiology of Anaphylaxis Working Group. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2006; 97(5):596–602. doi:10.1016/S1081-1206(10)61086-1
  5. Kemp SF, Lockey RF, Simons FE; World Allergy Organization ad hoc Committee on Epinephrine in Anaphylaxis. Epinephrine: the drug of choice for anaphylaxis—a statement of the World Allergy Organization. World Allergy Organ J 2008; 1(suppl 7):S18–S26. doi:10.1097/WOX.0b013e31817c9338
  6. Jones DH, Romero FA, Casale TB. Time-dependent inhibition of histamine-induced cutaneous responses by oral and intramuscular diphenhydramine and oral fexofenadine. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2008; 100(5):452–456. doi:10.1016/S1081-1206(10)60470-X
  7. Pumphrey RS. Lessons for management of anaphylaxis from a study of fatal reactions. Clin Exp Allerg 2000; 30(8):1144–1150. pmid:10931122
  8. Runge JW, Martinez JC, Caravati EM, Williamson SG, Hartsell SC. Histamine antagonists in the treatment of acute allergic reactions. Ann Emerg Med 1992; 21:237–242. pmid:1536481
  9. Sheikh A, Simons FE, Barbour V, Worth A. Adrenaline auto-injectors for the treatment of anaphylaxis with and without cardiovascular collapse in the community. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2012; (8):CD008935. doi:10.1002/14651858.CD008935.pub2
  10. Simons FE, Gu X, Simons KJ. Epinephrine absorption in adults: intramuscular versus subcutaneous injection. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2001; 108(5):871–873. doi:10.1067/mai.2001.119409
  11. Simons FE, Roberts JR, Gu X, Simons KJ. Epinephrine absorption in children with a history of anaphylaxis. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1998; 101(1 pt 1):33–37. doi:10.1016/S0091-6749(98)70190-3
  12. Vadas P. The platelet-activating factor pathway in food allergy and anaphylaxis. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2016; 117(5):455–457. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2016.05.003
  13. Stone SF, Brown SG. Mediators released during human anaphylaxis. Curr Allergy Asthma Rep 2012; 12(1):33–41. doi:10.1007/s11882-011-0231-6
  14. Lieberman P, Nicklas RA, Oppenheimer J, et al. The diagnosis and management of anaphylaxis practice parameter: 2010 update. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2010; 126(3):477–480.e1–e42. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2010.06.022
  15. Kemp SF, Lockey RF, Simons FE; World Allergy Organization ad hoc Committee on Epinephrine in Anaphylaxis. Epinephrine: the drug of choice for anaphylaxis. A statement of the World Allergy Organization. Allergy 2008; 63(8):1061–1070. doi:10.1111/j.1398-9995.2008.01733.x
  16. Oren E, Banderji A, Clark S, Camargo CA Jr. Food-induced anaphylaxis and repeated epinephrine treatments. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2007; 99(5):429–432. doi:10.1016/S1081-1206(10)60568-6
  17. Uguz A, Lack G, Pumphrey R, et al. Allergic reactions in the community: a questionnaire survey of members of the anaphylaxis campaign. Clin Exp Allergy 2005; 35(6):746–750. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2222.2005.02257.x
  18. Kelso JM. A second dose of epinephrine for anaphylaxis: how often needed and how to carry. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2006; 117(2):464–465. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2005.11.015
  19. Lieberman P, Nicklas RA, Randolph C, et al. Anaphylaxis—a practice parameter update 2015. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2015; 115(5):341–384. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2015.07.019
  20. Golden BK, Demain J, Freeman T, et al. Stinging insect hypersensitivity: a practice parameter update 2016. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2017; 118(1):28–54. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2016.10.031
  21. Cox L, Nelson H, Lockey R, et al. Allergen immunotherapy: a practice parameter third update. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2011; 127(suppl 1):S1–S55. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2010.09.034
  22. Gupta P, Gerrish PK, Silverman B, Schneider A. Current practices among allergists on writing self-injectable epinephrine prescriptions for immunotherapy patients. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2012; 129(2):571–572.e1-e2. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2011.09.033
  23. Ortolani C, Pastorello EA, Farioli L, et al. IgE-mediated allergy from vegetable allergens. Ann Allergy 1993; 71:470–476. pmid: 8250353
  24. Ma S, Shcherer SH, Nowak-Wegrzyn A. A survey on the management of pollen food allergy syndrome in allergy practices. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2003;112:784–788. doi:10.1016/S0091-6749(03)02008-6
  25. Shaver KJ, Adams C, Weiss SJ. Acute myocardial infarction after administration of low dose intravenous epinephrine for anaphylaxis. CJEM 2006; 8(4):289–294. pmid:17324313
  26. Triggiani M, Patella V, Staiano RI, Granata F, Marone G. Allergy and the cardiovascular system. Clin Exp Immunol 2008; 153(suppl 1):7–11. doi:10.1111/j.1365-2249.2008.03714.x
  27. Gilman AG, Rail TW, Nies AS, Taylor P, eds. Goodman and Gilman’s the Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics. 8th ed. New York, NY: Pergamon Press; 1990.
  28. Lang DM, Alpern MB, Visintainer PF, Smith ST. Increased risk for anaphylactoid reaction from contrast media in patients on beta-adrenergic blockers or with asthma. Ann Intern Med 1991; 115(14):270–276. pmid:1677239
  29. Nassiri M, Babina M, Dölle S, Edenharter G, Ruëff F, Worm M. Ramipril and metoprolol intake aggravate human and murine anaphylaxis: evidence for direct mast cell priming. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2015; 135(2):491–499. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2014.09.004
  30. Lee S, Hess EP, Nestler DM, et al. Antihypertensive medication use is associated with increased organ system involvement and hospitalization in emergency department patients with anaphylaxis. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2013; 131(4):1103–1108. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2013.01.011
  31. Greenberger PA, Meyers SN, Kramer BL, Kramer BL. Effects of beta-adrenergic and calcium antagonists on the development of anaphylactoid reactions from radiographic contrast media during cardiac angiography. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1987; 80(5):698–702. pmid:2890682
  32. Hepner MJ, Ownby DR, Anderson JA, Rowe MS, Sears-Ewald D, Brown EB. Risk of systemic reactions in patients taking beta-blocker drugs receiving allergen immunotherapy injections. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1990; 86(3 pt 1):407–411. pmid:1976666
  33. Lieberman P, Simons FE. Anaphylaxis and cardiovascular disease: therapeutic dilemmas. Clin Exp Allergy 2015; 45(8):1288–1295. doi:10.1111/cea.12520
  34. Simons FE, Peterson S, Black CD. Epinephrine dispensing patterns for an out-of-hospital population: a novel approach to studying the epidemiology of anaphylaxis. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2002; 110(4):647–651. pmid:12373275
  35. Kawano T, Scheuermeyer FX, Stenstrom R, Rowe BH, Grafstein E, Grunau B. Epinephrine use in older patients with anaphylaxis: clinical outcomes and cardiovascular complications. Resuscitation 2017; 112:53–58. doi:10.1016/j.resuscitation.2016.12.020
  36. Cydulka R, Davison R, Grammer L, Parker M, Mathews J 4th. The use of epinephrine in the treatment of older adult asthmatics. Ann Emerg Med 1988; 17(4):322–326. pmid:3354935
  37. Soar J, Pumphrey R, Cant A, et al; Working Group of the Resuscitation Council (UK). Emergency treatment of anaphylactic reactions—guidelines for healthcare providers. Resuscitation 2008; 77(2):157–169. doi:10.1016/j.resuscitation.2008.02.001
  38. Dreborg S, Wen X, Kim L, et al. Do epinephrine auto-injectors have an unsuitable needle length in children and adolescents at risk for anaphylaxis from food allergy? Allergy Asthma Clin Immunol 2016; 12:11. doi:10.1186/s13223-016-0110-8
  39. Ogden CL, Carroll MD, Kit BK, Flegal KM. Prevalence of childhood and adult obesity in the United States, 2011–2012. JAMA 2014; 311(8):806–814. doi:10.1001/jama.2014.732
  40. Song TT, Nelson MR, Chang JH, Engler RJ, Chowdhury BA. Adequacy of the epinephrine autoinjector needle length in delivering epinephrine to the intramuscular tissues. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2005; 94(5):539–542. doi:10.1016/S1081-1206(10)61130-1
  41. Bhalla MC, Gable BD, Frey JA, Reichenbach MR, Wilber ST. Predictors of epinephrine autoinjector needle length inadequacy. Am J Emerg Med 2013; 31(12):1671–1676. doi:10.1016/j.ajem.2013.09.001
  42. Kim H, Dinakar C, McInnis P, et al. Inadequacy of current pediatric epinephrine autoinjector needle length for use in infants and toddlers. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol 2017; 118(6):719–725.e1. doi:10.1016/j.anai.2017.03.017
  43. Simons FE, Clark S, Camargo CA Jr. Anaphylaxis in the community: learning from the survivors. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2009; 124(2):301–306. doi:10.1016/j.jaci.2009.03.050
  44. Muck AE, Bebarta VS, Borys DJ, Morgan DL. Six years of epinephrine digital injections: absence of significant local or systemic effects. Ann Emerg Med 2010; 56(3):270–274. doi:10.1016/j.annemergmed.2010.02.019
  45. Fleming JT, Clark S, Camargo CA Jr, Rudders SA. Early treatment of food-induced anaphylaxis with epinephrine is associated with a lower risk of hospitalization. J Allergy Clin Immunol Pract 2015; 3(1):57–62. doi:10.1016/j.jaip.2014.07.004
  46. Kaplan MS, Jung SY, Chiang ML. Epinephrine autoinjector refill history in an HMO. Curr Allergy Asthma Rep 2011; 11(1):65–70. doi:10.1007/s11882-010-0155-6
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Page Number
66-72
Page Number
66-72
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Who needs to carry an epinephrine autoinjector?
Display Headline
Who needs to carry an epinephrine autoinjector?
Legacy Keywords
epinephrine, autoinjector, anaphylaxis, allergy, EpiPen, bee sting, wasp, Hymenoptera, anaphylactic shock, Ted Song, Phil Lieberman
Legacy Keywords
epinephrine, autoinjector, anaphylaxis, allergy, EpiPen, bee sting, wasp, Hymenoptera, anaphylactic shock, Ted Song, Phil Lieberman
Sections
Inside the Article

KEY POINTS

  • Based on current data, there is no absolute contraindication to epinephrine for anaphylaxis. And failure to give epinephrine promptly has resulted in deaths.
  • Clinicians concerned about adverse effects of epinephrine may be reluctant to give it during anaphylaxis.
  • Education about anaphylaxis and its prompt treatment with epinephrine is critical for patients and their caregivers.
     
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Wed, 01/02/2019 - 13:00
Un-Gate On Date
Wed, 01/02/2019 - 13:00
Use ProPublica
CFC Schedule Remove Status
Wed, 01/02/2019 - 13:00
Article PDF Media

CONDOR trial: Most psoriasis patients can be downshifted to reduced-dose biologics

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 02/07/2023 - 16:53

Two-thirds of psoriasis patients with stable low disease activity while on full-dose biologic therapy can successfully undergo biologic dose reduction with long-term maintenance of disease control and no adverse consequences, Juul van den Reek, MD, PhD, reported at the annual congress of the European Academy of Dermatology and Venereology.

Bruce Jancin/MDedge News
Dr. Juul van den Reek (left) and her coinvestigator and graduate student Selma Atalay

She presented the results of the CONDOR trial, the first-ever formal, randomized, controlled trial of tightly regulated dose reduction of biologics, compared with usual care standard-dose therapy. “Our current advice is we think you can try to reduce the dose because there are a lot of patients who benefit from this,” declared Dr. van den Reek, a dermatologist at Radboud University, Nijmegen, the Netherlands.

The advantages of this strategy are twofold: lower expenditures for this costly collection of medications and less exposure to any long-term, drug-related health risks, she noted.

CONDOR was a Dutch six-center, 12-month, open-label, unblinded, noninferiority, randomized trial including 111 patients. Participants had to have stable low disease activity as defined by both Psoriasis Area and Severity Index (PASI) and Dermatology Life Quality Index (DLQI) scores of 5 or less for at least 6 months while on standard-dose etanercept (Enbrel), adalimumab (Humira), or ustekinumab (Stelara) prior to enrollment. In fact, the average baseline PASI score was less than 2, with a DLQI of 0.

Participants were randomized to usual care – the customary approved dose of biologic therapy – or a drop down to 67% of that dose, achieved through prolongation of the dosing interval. If the reduced-dose patients kept their PASI and DLQI scores at 5 or less for 3 months straight, they dropped further to 50% of their original dose. However, patients who exceeded those thresholds were immediately returned to their previously effective dose.


The primary endpoint in this noninferiority trial was the difference in mean PASI scores between the dose-reduction and usual-care groups at 12 months. The prespecified margin for noninferiority was a difference of 0.5 PASI points. And that’s where the results get dicey: The mean difference turned out to be 1.1 PASI points in favor of usual care, meaning that, according to the study ground rules, dose reduction was not statistically noninferior. In hindsight, however, that 0.5-point margin was ill-considered and too narrowly defined.

“Within the chosen margins, the dose-reduction strategy seemed inferior. But what is the clinical relevance of a mean difference of 1.1 PASI points, when the accepted minimal clinically important difference is 3.2 points?” Dr. van den Reek observed.

There was no significant between-group difference in DLQI scores at 12 months. Nor did the two study arms differ in terms of the prespecified secondary endpoint of persistent disease flares as defined by a PASI or DLQI greater than 5 for 3 consecutive months: five patients in the reduced-dose group and three in the usual-care arm experienced such flares. There were no serious adverse events or other safety signals related to the intervention.

At 12 months, 50% of patients in the dose-reduction group were well maintained on 50% of their original approved-dose biologic and another 17% were doing well on 67% of their former dose.

Session chair Dedee Murrell, MD, professor of dermatology at the University of New South Wales, Sydney, noted that neither patients nor dermatologists were blinded as to treatment status in CONDOR. She then asked the question on everybody’s minds: Was there any loss of treatment efficacy when patients in the dose-reduction arm needed to resume higher-dose therapy?

No, Dr. van den Reek replied. She added that planned future CONDOR analyses include a cost-effectiveness determination as well as measurement of serum drug levels and identification of antidrug antibodies, information that might prove helpful in identifying an enriched population of patients most likely to respond favorably to biologic dose reduction. In addition, CONDOR-X, a long-term extension study, is ongoing in order to learn how patients on reduced-dose biologics fare after the 12-month mark.

 

The CONDOR trial was funded by the Netherlands Organization for Health Research and Development; Dr. van den Reek reported having no financial conflicts of interest.

Meeting/Event
Publications
Topics
Sections
Meeting/Event
Meeting/Event

Two-thirds of psoriasis patients with stable low disease activity while on full-dose biologic therapy can successfully undergo biologic dose reduction with long-term maintenance of disease control and no adverse consequences, Juul van den Reek, MD, PhD, reported at the annual congress of the European Academy of Dermatology and Venereology.

Bruce Jancin/MDedge News
Dr. Juul van den Reek (left) and her coinvestigator and graduate student Selma Atalay

She presented the results of the CONDOR trial, the first-ever formal, randomized, controlled trial of tightly regulated dose reduction of biologics, compared with usual care standard-dose therapy. “Our current advice is we think you can try to reduce the dose because there are a lot of patients who benefit from this,” declared Dr. van den Reek, a dermatologist at Radboud University, Nijmegen, the Netherlands.

The advantages of this strategy are twofold: lower expenditures for this costly collection of medications and less exposure to any long-term, drug-related health risks, she noted.

CONDOR was a Dutch six-center, 12-month, open-label, unblinded, noninferiority, randomized trial including 111 patients. Participants had to have stable low disease activity as defined by both Psoriasis Area and Severity Index (PASI) and Dermatology Life Quality Index (DLQI) scores of 5 or less for at least 6 months while on standard-dose etanercept (Enbrel), adalimumab (Humira), or ustekinumab (Stelara) prior to enrollment. In fact, the average baseline PASI score was less than 2, with a DLQI of 0.

Participants were randomized to usual care – the customary approved dose of biologic therapy – or a drop down to 67% of that dose, achieved through prolongation of the dosing interval. If the reduced-dose patients kept their PASI and DLQI scores at 5 or less for 3 months straight, they dropped further to 50% of their original dose. However, patients who exceeded those thresholds were immediately returned to their previously effective dose.


The primary endpoint in this noninferiority trial was the difference in mean PASI scores between the dose-reduction and usual-care groups at 12 months. The prespecified margin for noninferiority was a difference of 0.5 PASI points. And that’s where the results get dicey: The mean difference turned out to be 1.1 PASI points in favor of usual care, meaning that, according to the study ground rules, dose reduction was not statistically noninferior. In hindsight, however, that 0.5-point margin was ill-considered and too narrowly defined.

“Within the chosen margins, the dose-reduction strategy seemed inferior. But what is the clinical relevance of a mean difference of 1.1 PASI points, when the accepted minimal clinically important difference is 3.2 points?” Dr. van den Reek observed.

There was no significant between-group difference in DLQI scores at 12 months. Nor did the two study arms differ in terms of the prespecified secondary endpoint of persistent disease flares as defined by a PASI or DLQI greater than 5 for 3 consecutive months: five patients in the reduced-dose group and three in the usual-care arm experienced such flares. There were no serious adverse events or other safety signals related to the intervention.

At 12 months, 50% of patients in the dose-reduction group were well maintained on 50% of their original approved-dose biologic and another 17% were doing well on 67% of their former dose.

Session chair Dedee Murrell, MD, professor of dermatology at the University of New South Wales, Sydney, noted that neither patients nor dermatologists were blinded as to treatment status in CONDOR. She then asked the question on everybody’s minds: Was there any loss of treatment efficacy when patients in the dose-reduction arm needed to resume higher-dose therapy?

No, Dr. van den Reek replied. She added that planned future CONDOR analyses include a cost-effectiveness determination as well as measurement of serum drug levels and identification of antidrug antibodies, information that might prove helpful in identifying an enriched population of patients most likely to respond favorably to biologic dose reduction. In addition, CONDOR-X, a long-term extension study, is ongoing in order to learn how patients on reduced-dose biologics fare after the 12-month mark.

 

The CONDOR trial was funded by the Netherlands Organization for Health Research and Development; Dr. van den Reek reported having no financial conflicts of interest.

Two-thirds of psoriasis patients with stable low disease activity while on full-dose biologic therapy can successfully undergo biologic dose reduction with long-term maintenance of disease control and no adverse consequences, Juul van den Reek, MD, PhD, reported at the annual congress of the European Academy of Dermatology and Venereology.

Bruce Jancin/MDedge News
Dr. Juul van den Reek (left) and her coinvestigator and graduate student Selma Atalay

She presented the results of the CONDOR trial, the first-ever formal, randomized, controlled trial of tightly regulated dose reduction of biologics, compared with usual care standard-dose therapy. “Our current advice is we think you can try to reduce the dose because there are a lot of patients who benefit from this,” declared Dr. van den Reek, a dermatologist at Radboud University, Nijmegen, the Netherlands.

The advantages of this strategy are twofold: lower expenditures for this costly collection of medications and less exposure to any long-term, drug-related health risks, she noted.

CONDOR was a Dutch six-center, 12-month, open-label, unblinded, noninferiority, randomized trial including 111 patients. Participants had to have stable low disease activity as defined by both Psoriasis Area and Severity Index (PASI) and Dermatology Life Quality Index (DLQI) scores of 5 or less for at least 6 months while on standard-dose etanercept (Enbrel), adalimumab (Humira), or ustekinumab (Stelara) prior to enrollment. In fact, the average baseline PASI score was less than 2, with a DLQI of 0.

Participants were randomized to usual care – the customary approved dose of biologic therapy – or a drop down to 67% of that dose, achieved through prolongation of the dosing interval. If the reduced-dose patients kept their PASI and DLQI scores at 5 or less for 3 months straight, they dropped further to 50% of their original dose. However, patients who exceeded those thresholds were immediately returned to their previously effective dose.


The primary endpoint in this noninferiority trial was the difference in mean PASI scores between the dose-reduction and usual-care groups at 12 months. The prespecified margin for noninferiority was a difference of 0.5 PASI points. And that’s where the results get dicey: The mean difference turned out to be 1.1 PASI points in favor of usual care, meaning that, according to the study ground rules, dose reduction was not statistically noninferior. In hindsight, however, that 0.5-point margin was ill-considered and too narrowly defined.

“Within the chosen margins, the dose-reduction strategy seemed inferior. But what is the clinical relevance of a mean difference of 1.1 PASI points, when the accepted minimal clinically important difference is 3.2 points?” Dr. van den Reek observed.

There was no significant between-group difference in DLQI scores at 12 months. Nor did the two study arms differ in terms of the prespecified secondary endpoint of persistent disease flares as defined by a PASI or DLQI greater than 5 for 3 consecutive months: five patients in the reduced-dose group and three in the usual-care arm experienced such flares. There were no serious adverse events or other safety signals related to the intervention.

At 12 months, 50% of patients in the dose-reduction group were well maintained on 50% of their original approved-dose biologic and another 17% were doing well on 67% of their former dose.

Session chair Dedee Murrell, MD, professor of dermatology at the University of New South Wales, Sydney, noted that neither patients nor dermatologists were blinded as to treatment status in CONDOR. She then asked the question on everybody’s minds: Was there any loss of treatment efficacy when patients in the dose-reduction arm needed to resume higher-dose therapy?

No, Dr. van den Reek replied. She added that planned future CONDOR analyses include a cost-effectiveness determination as well as measurement of serum drug levels and identification of antidrug antibodies, information that might prove helpful in identifying an enriched population of patients most likely to respond favorably to biologic dose reduction. In addition, CONDOR-X, a long-term extension study, is ongoing in order to learn how patients on reduced-dose biologics fare after the 12-month mark.

 

The CONDOR trial was funded by the Netherlands Organization for Health Research and Development; Dr. van den Reek reported having no financial conflicts of interest.

Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Click for Credit Status
Ready
Sections
Article Source

REPORTING FROM THE EADV CONGRESS

Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Vitals

Key clinical point: An attempt at dose reduction is worthwhile in psoriasis patients well controlled on full-dose biologic therapy.

Major finding: Two-thirds of psoriasis patients maintained disease control after 12 months on reduced-dose biologic therapy.

Study details: This was a Dutch six-center, 12-month, open-label, unblinded, noninferiority, randomized trial of 111 psoriasis patients with stable low disease activity on standard-dose biologics at enrollment.

Disclosures: The CONDOR trial was funded by the Netherlands Organization for Health Research and Development; the presenter reported having no financial conflicts of interest.

Disqus Comments
Default
Use ProPublica

MGUS: It’s about the protein, not just the marrow

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 01/17/2019 - 11:48
Display Headline
MGUS: It’s about the protein, not just the marrow

Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS) has always been a favorite topic on internal medicine teaching rounds and is sometimes used to challenge residents. It is a relatively uncommon cause of some common laboratory and clinical anomalies. Thus, residents must field questions such as, “What is a cause of a high erythrocyte sedimentation rate with a concurrently normal C-reactive protein level and a low anion gap?” And for internists who love probabilistic assessments, there are now data and flowcharts to help predict the likelihood that a patient with MGUS will develop myeloma, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, or other malignant clonal proliferative disorder that will warrant therapy.

In the past decade, it has been increasingly recognized that these clonally produced proteins—entire immunoglobulins or free light chains—may be directly pathogenic, independent of any pathologic effect of cellular clonal expansion and infiltration. Brouet class 1 cryoglobulinemia (in which a monoclonal paraprotein precipitates in cooler temperatures and acts as a source of complement, activating the immune complex) and light chain (usually lambda)-related amyloidosis have been recognized for much longer. But a newer concept, monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance (MGRS), has attracted significant attention and to some extent has modified our approach to patients with either known MGUS or unexplained chronic kidney disease.

Finding MGUS still warrants a parsimonious evaluation for possible progression to myeloma or other proliferative disorder, as discussed by Khouri et al in this issue of the Journal. But it should also prompt a thoughtful assessment of renal function, including estimating the glomerular filtration rate and looking for proteinuria, hematuria, and unexplained glucosuria or inappropriate urine pH. While typical light chain-induced renal tubular injury is usually associated with high levels of proteins such as those seen with myeloma, other patterns of glomerular, vascular, and mixed renal disease are associated with deposition of proteins that, once considered in the differential diagnosis, warrant renal biopsy to diagnose and direct appropriate therapy. That MGUS and MGRS occur more frequently in older patients, who are already at greater risk of multiple common causes of kidney disease, complicates clinical decision-making.1 Some of these disorders are associated with other initially subtle or seemingly disconnected clinical symptoms such as polyneuropathy, rash, and carpal tunnel syndrome, but many are at least initially limited to the kidneys.

As we enter a new calendar year, we at the Journal send our best wishes to all of our readers, authors, and peer reviewers, and we thank you for sharing in our medical education ventures. I personally hope that we have added some joy, enthusiasm—and some knowledge—to your professional activities, and I hope that we all can participate in some way to refashion a more civil and peaceful world in 2019.

References
  1. Rosner MH, Edeani A, Yanagita M, et al. Paraprotein-related kidney disease: diagnosing and treating monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance. Clin J Am Soc Neph 2016; 11(12):2280–2287. doi:10.2215/CJN.02920316
Article PDF
Author and Disclosure Information
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Publications
Topics
Page Number
4-5
Legacy Keywords
monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance, MGUS, cardiac amyloidosis, light chain, Brian Mandell
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information
Author and Disclosure Information
Article PDF
Article PDF

Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS) has always been a favorite topic on internal medicine teaching rounds and is sometimes used to challenge residents. It is a relatively uncommon cause of some common laboratory and clinical anomalies. Thus, residents must field questions such as, “What is a cause of a high erythrocyte sedimentation rate with a concurrently normal C-reactive protein level and a low anion gap?” And for internists who love probabilistic assessments, there are now data and flowcharts to help predict the likelihood that a patient with MGUS will develop myeloma, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, or other malignant clonal proliferative disorder that will warrant therapy.

In the past decade, it has been increasingly recognized that these clonally produced proteins—entire immunoglobulins or free light chains—may be directly pathogenic, independent of any pathologic effect of cellular clonal expansion and infiltration. Brouet class 1 cryoglobulinemia (in which a monoclonal paraprotein precipitates in cooler temperatures and acts as a source of complement, activating the immune complex) and light chain (usually lambda)-related amyloidosis have been recognized for much longer. But a newer concept, monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance (MGRS), has attracted significant attention and to some extent has modified our approach to patients with either known MGUS or unexplained chronic kidney disease.

Finding MGUS still warrants a parsimonious evaluation for possible progression to myeloma or other proliferative disorder, as discussed by Khouri et al in this issue of the Journal. But it should also prompt a thoughtful assessment of renal function, including estimating the glomerular filtration rate and looking for proteinuria, hematuria, and unexplained glucosuria or inappropriate urine pH. While typical light chain-induced renal tubular injury is usually associated with high levels of proteins such as those seen with myeloma, other patterns of glomerular, vascular, and mixed renal disease are associated with deposition of proteins that, once considered in the differential diagnosis, warrant renal biopsy to diagnose and direct appropriate therapy. That MGUS and MGRS occur more frequently in older patients, who are already at greater risk of multiple common causes of kidney disease, complicates clinical decision-making.1 Some of these disorders are associated with other initially subtle or seemingly disconnected clinical symptoms such as polyneuropathy, rash, and carpal tunnel syndrome, but many are at least initially limited to the kidneys.

As we enter a new calendar year, we at the Journal send our best wishes to all of our readers, authors, and peer reviewers, and we thank you for sharing in our medical education ventures. I personally hope that we have added some joy, enthusiasm—and some knowledge—to your professional activities, and I hope that we all can participate in some way to refashion a more civil and peaceful world in 2019.

Monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance (MGUS) has always been a favorite topic on internal medicine teaching rounds and is sometimes used to challenge residents. It is a relatively uncommon cause of some common laboratory and clinical anomalies. Thus, residents must field questions such as, “What is a cause of a high erythrocyte sedimentation rate with a concurrently normal C-reactive protein level and a low anion gap?” And for internists who love probabilistic assessments, there are now data and flowcharts to help predict the likelihood that a patient with MGUS will develop myeloma, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, or other malignant clonal proliferative disorder that will warrant therapy.

In the past decade, it has been increasingly recognized that these clonally produced proteins—entire immunoglobulins or free light chains—may be directly pathogenic, independent of any pathologic effect of cellular clonal expansion and infiltration. Brouet class 1 cryoglobulinemia (in which a monoclonal paraprotein precipitates in cooler temperatures and acts as a source of complement, activating the immune complex) and light chain (usually lambda)-related amyloidosis have been recognized for much longer. But a newer concept, monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance (MGRS), has attracted significant attention and to some extent has modified our approach to patients with either known MGUS or unexplained chronic kidney disease.

Finding MGUS still warrants a parsimonious evaluation for possible progression to myeloma or other proliferative disorder, as discussed by Khouri et al in this issue of the Journal. But it should also prompt a thoughtful assessment of renal function, including estimating the glomerular filtration rate and looking for proteinuria, hematuria, and unexplained glucosuria or inappropriate urine pH. While typical light chain-induced renal tubular injury is usually associated with high levels of proteins such as those seen with myeloma, other patterns of glomerular, vascular, and mixed renal disease are associated with deposition of proteins that, once considered in the differential diagnosis, warrant renal biopsy to diagnose and direct appropriate therapy. That MGUS and MGRS occur more frequently in older patients, who are already at greater risk of multiple common causes of kidney disease, complicates clinical decision-making.1 Some of these disorders are associated with other initially subtle or seemingly disconnected clinical symptoms such as polyneuropathy, rash, and carpal tunnel syndrome, but many are at least initially limited to the kidneys.

As we enter a new calendar year, we at the Journal send our best wishes to all of our readers, authors, and peer reviewers, and we thank you for sharing in our medical education ventures. I personally hope that we have added some joy, enthusiasm—and some knowledge—to your professional activities, and I hope that we all can participate in some way to refashion a more civil and peaceful world in 2019.

References
  1. Rosner MH, Edeani A, Yanagita M, et al. Paraprotein-related kidney disease: diagnosing and treating monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance. Clin J Am Soc Neph 2016; 11(12):2280–2287. doi:10.2215/CJN.02920316
References
  1. Rosner MH, Edeani A, Yanagita M, et al. Paraprotein-related kidney disease: diagnosing and treating monoclonal gammopathy of renal significance. Clin J Am Soc Neph 2016; 11(12):2280–2287. doi:10.2215/CJN.02920316
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Issue
Cleveland Clinic Journal of Medicine - 86(1)
Page Number
4-5
Page Number
4-5
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
MGUS: It’s about the protein, not just the marrow
Display Headline
MGUS: It’s about the protein, not just the marrow
Legacy Keywords
monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance, MGUS, cardiac amyloidosis, light chain, Brian Mandell
Legacy Keywords
monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance, MGUS, cardiac amyloidosis, light chain, Brian Mandell
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Gate On Date
Fri, 12/28/2018 - 11:15
Un-Gate On Date
Fri, 12/28/2018 - 11:15
Use ProPublica
CFC Schedule Remove Status
Fri, 12/28/2018 - 11:15
Article PDF Media